
Eetoo

by Robby Charters

Smashwords Edition

© 2007 by robby charters

Also by Robby Charters:

Pepe

The Zondon

The Story of Saint Catrick

The Eurasian

        [Visit Robby on Facebook](http://www.facebook.com/pages/Robbys-Books/219546151504167)

www.RobbyCharters.co.uk

E-book design and cover art by Robby's E-book Formatting

www.Robbys-eBook-Formatting.co.uk

# Dedication:

To my dear father (may he rest in peace).

One of the last things he did was to go over this manuscript, making notes of the spelling and usage errors.

He also could speak Karen, the language of the tribal group on which I based the Fa-tzi-zhi, the tribe to which Eetoo belonged.

# Part 1 -- The Shepherd

## 1

nights are dark on Kalodzu-Famta; there is no moon   
not an orbiting body to light the planet at night

nor to interrupt the menagerie of stars  
the galaxy thus visible in unobscured glory

the shepherd boy sits beneath a tree  
on a rise on the edge of a grove he rests

surrounded by grass plains, no living soul but the sheep  
half a day's journey from any human dwelling, he sits alone

the sheep, one by one, go off to sleep  
alone in the quietness of night, his young eyes scan the sky

This is the third time I've seen a light moving about in the sky.

The first time, Uncle Zhue Paw told me it was only a shooting star. I thought it went too slow for that, but I figured maybe he was right and it was my mind playing tricks on me. Then I saw it again a week ago -- definitely too slow.

Now I'm positive it wasn't. Shooting stars don't stop and go back the way they came. But they'd probably say I was lying. They already say that knowing how to read the ancient writing makes my head too cloudy.

Oh well, it's not bothering the sheep anyway. And they're probably right. Lights in the sky don't do anything to people anyway, especially this far from the village, so telling them would only make more trouble for me.

I might tell Venerable Too Dha, though. He's different from the others. He takes me seriously, probably because he can read, and knows it isn't bad for you. Uncle Zhue Paw would only scold me for being so dreamy from too much reading.

Anyway, I'd better get to sleep. It'll be a long walk back to the village tomorrow. The sheep have settled down anyway.

There's that light again, and now it's coming from that direction. Wouldn't it be something if that were a ship -- like what our fathers arrived on?

* * *

Heptosh scanned the surface once more, this time at an altitude from which he could make out individual features. The all-around viewer, aided by the infrared sensor, showed the nocturnal landscape. The grassland, the few clumps of forest here and there, looked dryer than Heptosh's home planet, but well suited to keeping sheep. His activity shouldn't raise any undue alarm from the inhabitants on this side of the mountain divide. They'd mistake him for a shooting star.

Here and there, he could pick out a shepherd minding his sheep, or a caravan camped out for the night -- harmless, but it wouldn't be good to interrupt their peaceful existence by suddenly appearing to them out of the sky.

It was those on the other side that worried him. They were a more advanced civilisation -- or, at least they used to be.

If they were as they used to be, they'd present no problem. The Kalodzu and the Toki human populations had enjoyed many happy interactions.

Then, they reported some sort of struggle. The Kalodzu had sent out a warning not to enter their solar system until they had got their problem sorted out. They also said something about seven transport shiploads of refugees. It wasn't clear exactly what the trouble was, but the refugees would explain it. So the sector council issued a restriction, and waited. Then they went silent. No refugees ever appeared. That all happened twelve years ago, as humans still counted time.

Now, the restriction had expired -- still, the silence, so Heptosh was on a scouting mission.

So far, he determined that on the Famtizhi half of the planet, civilisation carried on as it always had. Heptosh had spent the last several weeks making observations of life on the ground -- nothing to worry about here.

But, over the divide? He had detected no satellite surveillance, no reconnaissance ships -- the Kalodzu hadn't been in the habit of maintaining a close watch, but who was in control now?

Whoever it was, at least hadn't begun to guard the airspace. Perhaps that was good.

But perhaps it meant bionics. Bionics would follow the habits of their human hosts, and therefore maintain the same level of surveillance.

There were no signs of bionics on this side of the divide. He would cross over and examine the ground on the Kalodzu side -- carefully.

A mountainous isthmus separated the Famtizhi land mass from the Kalodzu continent. Nestled in a valley in that isthmus, was the city of Kalodzu, where he would find the space port. The mountains were quite impassable for land travel, except for a tunnel through a mountain from the Famtizhi area into the city, which was only approachable from the rest of Kalodzuland via the subterranean portion of the city. The same mountain range lined the North coast of the Famtizhi land mass, surrounded the city, and then went along the South coast of Kalodzuland. Therefore, access by sea was also all but impossible.

Heptosh began flying at a low level across Famtizhi territory towards the mountain range. His intention was to creep over in stealth mode below the range of their scanners.

The line of cliffs topping the mountain range loomed ahead of him, running in a straight line as far as his eyes could see. A millennia of erosion had rendered them more natural looking, otherwise, the straightness of the formation was the hallmark of its human design. Everything on these artificial planets, the mountain ranges, the coastlines, even the caves under the ground, were done in straight lines.

His ship hovered in a cleft that had been eroded between two giant stones forming the mountain range, providing him a vantage point. From there, he looked.

## 2

greenness, large rocks, a winding stream betwixt vertical rock cliffs  
the sound of a waterfall echoes from deep within

a fence encloses the mouth of the canyon  
approach to the grass within is through a gate

outside lies what once was a market  
old stalls and stone tables tell of bygone days

They say Fa-tzi-zhi, used to trade here with the Kalodzu. It must have been exciting with so many people about selling things. I would have been two years old when it all stopped, so I don't remember any of it.

The sheep will be safe fenced inside the canyon until I come back with more food. I won't stay in the village very long. I never do. Ever since Ni Gwah got sucked down the whirlpool, Venerable Too Dha is the only close friend I have.

I'll visit him, and tell him about the lights in the sky.

I wonder if it was the lights last night that prompted that dream?

It was the same as I've had before. I'm with someone in a dark cave, holding a light. We find these golden plates that were buried in the wall. The first time I dreamed it was when Paw and Maw were still alive, and Venerable Too Dha hadn't started teaching me to read yet. I must have been six years old. After that I started reading the writings, and I read where it says there are golden tablets hidden somewhere that will complete our knowledge, and it will be someone's job to fetch them. Later, I had the dream again, when I knew it was about those golden tablets. After I told Venerable Too Dha the dream, he got all quiet. He still mentions it sometimes. I'm sure he doesn't take it seriously,

I'll ask Venerable Too Dha to let me read the tablets again. I've read them so many times already, I wish there were more to read -- maybe if someone found the golden ones.

* * *

Heptosh wasn't sure who introduced Bionic Replication to his native planet of Nefzed. He was only old enough at the time to know it was the in-thing for the rich and leisurely. Several renowned playwrights, minstrels and storytellers had taken an implant. So had a few senators' wives and other setters of the latest fashions.

They placed it under the skin either in the forehead or in the wrist. It was a chip containing microscopic bionic self-reproducing cells, programmed to replace their neighbouring cells until the whole limb, and eventually, one's whole body became bionic. When the process was complete, there was the bionic humanoid, perfect in every way, with super strength, super intelligence (so they said), absorbing all its energy from sunlight, thus not needing organic food to keep it alive. In fact, with proper maintenance, it would go on living forever.

For all the advantages that were publicised, there appeared a sinister downside.

Heptosh's father, a university professor named Dr. Nashtep, was one of the first to have major doubts regarding the process. Heptosh had accompanied his father as a pupil and remembered the discussions they had. One of his friends, a doctor, while closely observing the human psyche during the last stages of the transformation, noted what he was sure indicated the death of the human personality that originally animated the body. Others of their friends, including other professors, doctors, art and literary critics, had also noticed disturbing changes in the personality before and after. They became convinced that the human soul did not survived a complete bionic transformation. The bionic humanoid was no more than a non-sentient artificial intelligence storing the memory that used to belong to the soul.

What was left was a good representation of a human personality, enough to fool many. Playwrights and storytellers continued producing stories, sometimes more furiously than ever. However, as time went by, and the demand grew for new types of plots or literary styles, only non-bionic human artists were able to adapt. Bionics couldn't keep up with new trends.

Only certain ones noticed this. The masses only continued following the works of their favourites as long as they were popular. The fact that they were bionic only seemed to enhance their image. They never wondered, as the critics did, why they went from liking an old artist to a newly bionic one. If anything, society put that much more pressure on the more creative to accept a bionic implant. Refusal, in some cases, put artists on a blacklist.

Those who had undergone a complete transformation, the Total Bionics, insisted that everything was fine. They voiced strong opinions that they were the better for it, and did their utmost to influence yet more people to become host to a bionic cell. As their numbers grew, the dissenting voices became more and more marginalised. The Total Bionics continued to gain political clout, and before long, there was discussion about making a bionic implant mandatory for all citizens of Nefzed.

Because of the increasingly frequent food shortages, the idea of a body that didn't require food, gained all the more appeal. The working classes and the unemployed masses rallied for the legislation, which would mean they would get their implant for free. Farmers weren't as enthusiastic -- it would mean less demand for farm products -- but even they began to accept it as inevitable.

Dr. Nashtep and his circle of professionals formed the core of the dissenting party. They spoke out as loudly as they could, but there were backlashes. Mr. Takanen, a social commentator who had become a close friend, made a final impassioned plea that was heard planet-wide. Then he was soundly discredited, caricatured as a crackpot, and banished from the media. Heptosh, himself, vividly remembered the taunts by former playmates, the ostracism, the betrayals by ones he loved; and at the same time, the fear for the future -- his own and of humanity. Would he finally be forced to take an implant? Would his soul die at such a young age? Would this mean the extinction of the human race?

At first, it looked as though all the dissidents could do now was to ponder this question and wait for it to happen, or perhaps go into hiding. A limited number were exploring other avenues.

One of these included space travel. At first, that sounded like a pipe dream. Even though most of the population was aware that space travel existed, it wasn't an option that most thought likely. They knew that humanity wasn't birthed on Nefzed. Humans had to come from somewhere, and this presupposed space travel.

Dr. Nashtep was the expert in history, so he knew that space travel was a reality, only to be rediscovered. Once in Nefzed's history, a major portion of the population had to be shifted to a new planet. That was a long time ago, in the days of the ancient Nephteshi Interstellar Empire. Then, they had the capacity to build mini planets out of black holes. But that technology disappeared with the collapse of the great empire. Their only legacy: hundreds of artificial planets scattered throughout the galaxy, all populated to capacity. No one was building new planets any more.

But perhaps an empty planet wasn't necessary -- there weren't really that many dissidents. Where there any friendly planets out there that could take just a few more? They began to look at the options. Dr. Nashtep's brother-in-law Nagasha, an engineer, spearheaded in this operation.

They had to be discreet, as some of the powers-that-be were opposed to anyone seeking to leave. However, some of them were able to obtain the information that was available.

Another of their number, Mr. Vashkanen, had been a bureaucrat in the planetary government, and had opted to take retirement before his refusal to take an implant became an issue. Though bureaucrats and academics had always been at odds, it was his concern about bionic replication that brought him into their circle. Having once been high up in the government, he knew things that historians, like Dr. Nashtep, didn't. One of these was the fact that since the collapse of the Nephteshi empire, interplanetary travel throughout the galaxy was now regulated by the sector councils -- most representing species other than human.

The council for their part of the galaxy, the Ziern Sector, was primarily composed of Groki, a species that did everything in their power to discourage human space travel. They had an extensive knowledge of history, and some had even lived long enough to personally remember the Nephteshi empire -- that it had been a thorn in the side of all non-human species. The more they learned of the Ziern sector council, the more it became obvious that the Groki were supportive of mandatory bionic implants for humans. Other planets in the sector were in the same position as they.

This had never been a concern for most Nefzedis, as no one but government people had ever though it necessary to do any space travel. The government, knowing the perils, had always suppressed any ideas that would lead to people venturing to try. Mr. Vashkanen knew all about that, and in his career days, was party to it.

But this was a new day, with new dangers. Now, with Mr. Vashkanen's help, Nagasha's people were able to find some unused ships powered by logical relocators, the records of which had long faded from the inventory books of the planet's bureaucrats. These kinds of ships could simply relocate somewhere outside of the sector without being detected. They also gained access to a galactic map, which showed other sectors of the galaxy. Nagasha with a crew of four went off in search of a friendly planet. Though they travelled hundreds of light years, they kept in touch via twin particle communicators.

Tok, though administered by non-humans, offered the best prospect. The governors of that planet were a non-Groki species that tended to show sympathy toward humans. There was already a human community living there quite happily, an Akkadi speaking tribe. The governors, when they heard of the Nefzedi plight, extended them an invitation to relocate a portion of their human population there. Other planets in that sector were also found, with their help, and they sent giant ships to help with the move.

The exodus went on discreetly and took the bionic population by surprise. All non-bionic humans who wished to move, gathered in a predetermined location. They communicated their coordinates to the Toki ships that were waiting in the upper atmosphere. They landed in stealth mode, brought them all on board and sped them across the galaxy to their new home.

That was a long time ago, when Heptosh was young. Most of the elders, including his father, Dr. Nashtep, his Uncle Nagasha and others were dead. Only Mr. Takanen was left of that group, having lived to an extraordinarily old age. Heptosh, himself, wasn't a young man anymore, though he remembered all of this as though it were yesterday.

Now, the original home planet of the Nefzedi was wholly inhabited by Total Bionics. No humans were left. Nefzedi humans were all living in the Noofrishi sector of the Galaxy. Their Toki hosts allowed them to administer their own affairs and they had relative freedom of travel within the sector in which they lived.

Now, perched in the cleft of the cliff overlooking Kalodzu City, he wondered. Did the same fate befall Kalodzu-land?

## 3

simple dwellings, the colour of the yellow brown earth  
from which they are made

further on, yellow brown paths slope up the side of the mountain range  
also yellow brown, except where interrupted by patches of green

near by, small children run, their naked skin matching the yellow brown earth  
both through dirtiness and natural colour

their elders finish their chores, chat and enjoy the evening

as for the smells...

I can smell stew cooking behind Tee Maw's house. I hope someone has enough food left from their family meal for me. Uncle Zhue Paw usually has some but he always makes me wait until everyone else has eaten. Venerable Too Dha usually eats by himself, so he might have something.

Oh, no! Here comes that brat, Nyu.

He shouts, 'Hoi! Eetoo!'

'Aren't you supposed to be studying?' I say.

'Hah! I'm of age already! I can do whatever I want!'

'Of age! You're not thirteen yet!'

'Of course I am!' he snaps back.

'I'm thirteen,' I emphasise to get it into his thick head. 'I've just had my manhood ceremony two months ago. You're at least a year younger than me!'

'Count the cycles around the sun! I'm thirteen!'

'Yeah! Thirteen cycles around this star!'

'What other stars do you expect to go around!' He says it as though I were the stupid one!

'Didn't they teach you or what? Our fathers came from a different place: different star, different planet!'

'Hah! I think we've always been on this one!'

He's so obstinate! 'And you expect to be the next Keeper of the Writings?' I ask. 'You haven't even read them!'

'It sure won't be you! You're just an orphan boy!'

'At least I'm keeping up my family reputation of being a sheep owning family. What are you doing?'

'My Paw's got the biggest flock, and he has the respect of the whole village.'

He's got a point. I'd better not say anything stupid. 'Well, Ni Gwah should have been it. He was better than both you or your Paw!'

'Hah! The gods obviously didn't think so!'

He's off in the other direction, muttering something extremely disrespectful about Ni Gwah.

That's another thing. The writings, which he thinks he's going to keep say we must worship only one god. He still talks about the other gods like the shaman of Tu-tu-ah does.

A lot of people have got fires going. Mo Paw, the traditional wrestling instructor is still at work making clay bricks. I think he's going to build an extension to his house. I hope he leaves enough room for his wrestling gym. Ni Gwah used to be good at that too -- always beat me in wrestling.

There's Wee Ta, still working away on her weaving loom.

I'll need a new tunic soon. I hope this one won't start showing my nakedness before shearing season. Now that I'm a man, no one gives me any slack. I have to come up with raw wool before anyone will make me a tunic. I might have to start going naked on days I'm far enough from the village, so my tunic won't wear out so fast.

Cousin Zhue is so shameless, he does that even when he's near the village, in plain sight of everyone. He also eats most of the food at home so there'll probably not be enough for a decent meal for me. Uncle Zhue Paw never restrains him like he does me.

Venerable Too Dha's all right though. He treats me like a family member, even better than Uncle Zhue Paw. I think I'll go straight to his house.

There's Doo Bweh, the baker. He sees me coming. I know exactly what he'll say:

'Remember! You owe me wool!' -- yep.

'I'll remember,' I say on cue.

'Good. Then come by in the morning for another dozen.' He's got the routine down. I don't even have to put in an order.

I pass by a few more houses and there's Venerable Too Dha, sitting on a bench outside his door.

'Good day, Eetoo,' he says.

'Good day to you, Venerable Too Dha.'

'Come, sit down and rest. How are the sheep?'

'They are well. I left them in the canyon behind the old market.'

'You won't leave them there many days, I hope.'

'No. I just came back for more bread.'

'You still have credit with Doo Bweh, the baker, I trust.'

'Yes. I'll owe him three bags of wool, come shearing season.'

'You have grown to be a responsible young man, Eetoo. Your father would be proud of you.'

'You flatter me, Venerable Too Dha.'

We sit quietly for a while. He seems to be thinking about something.

I think too, but about things Nyu just said.

'Nyu seems to think he's going to be chosen to be the keeper of the writings when you die.'

'Yes,' he says, 'That seems to be the will of the village. But I'm afraid I won't live long enough to teach him at the rate he's learning.'

'He only knows the pictographs, and even then he says them in Fa-tzi-zhi instead of the holy language.'

'Hah! I remember you and Ni Gwah; I caught you two spelling out Fa-tzi-zhi words using the Nephteshi phonetic letters.'

'Yeah! You almost gave us a hiding!'

'At least it showed you had mastered the language.' Has he got softer in his old age? 'Ni Gwah was very good at it.'

'Yeah,' I agree. 'Ni Gwah should have been the next keeper of the writings. At least he worshipped only the creator god. Nyu still talks about the lesser gods.'

'Yes. It's a losing battle. Many of them, including Nyu Paw and Doo Bweh Paw, went off to attend the spirit celebrations in Tu-tu-ah a few days ago. At least they haven't tried to install a shaman here as well.'

He looks sad. After a pause, he says, 'I tried to persuade the council at the last meeting, to make you the keeper -- that you were ready even now -- but Nyu Paw seems to wield influence, and he wants his son to be. Perhaps, unless I live to be very old, you can teach him what he needs.'

'He's such a brat, he'll never listen to me.'

'Perhaps he'll grow wiser with age...' He's back to thinking again. '...and, maybe it's better this way.'

'Why?'

'I've been thinking a lot about that dream you had. I've had dreams of my own.'

What does that have to do with it?

'You have a more important job,' he says. 'I've been wanting to tell you, I haven't known how, and I fear time may be short.'

'What, Venerable?' He looks healthy enough.

'Do you remember what is written in the fifth tablet?'

'About the seven laws?' I return.

'About how Venerable Noka passed on his legacy to his three sons.'

'Yes. He gave his eldest son the golden tablets, but to his second son, he wrote it down on tablets of stone, and to his youngest, he wrote it on animal hide. What we have are copies of the tablets of stone. The original stone tablets were neglected by the Nephteshi guardians, so Imhotep, the prophet-ruler, obtained them and added them to the great library at Memphis.'

'Do you remember what else?' he prods.

'Yes. Someday, one from among the descendants of the second son must go to read the golden tablets belonging to the eldest son so that our knowledge of the Way will be complete.'

'I believe the time is near when the descendant of the second son must make his journey. That descendent is you. I am very sure of that.'

I can hardly talk. I whisper, 'Me?'

'Make your heart strong, Eetoo. I would not say it if I didn't believe it were so. I've thought so for a long time now.'

'But --'

'At first, I dismissed it as an idle thought,' he explains. 'I tried to forget it, but with time, it only began coming back stronger and stronger. I discussed it with Venerables Zti Paw of Sho-ta-le and Meh Zha of Nyu Pee River Village. They all feel the time is near, and believe that my instincts are right. So, now, I must tell you.'

I can't think of what to say.

'Rest here tonight. Read the fifth tablet one more time. You must tune your mind to the truth. I feel as though your journey may begin soon. Perhaps even tomorrow when you leave here.'

'But, where must I go to find the golden tablets?' I ask.

'That, I don't know. There is much that I don't understand. That is why I have delayed telling you, but tell you, I must. I've been troubled about it in my sleep for a year now -- visions in the night. All I know is, the tablets are not on this planet. They are near the birthplace of humanity. Our people haven't travelled in the ships for hundreds of years. They haven't been seen since before you were born.'

'I saw a ship last night -- or it was a light in the sky. I know it wasn't a shooting star. And then I had the dream again.'

'There you are, then,' he sounds more sure than ever. 'The hand of the most high is already at work. You are the one. And don't worry about your debt to Doo Bweh. If I don't see you again, I will repay it.'

We have a meal of bread with a stew that Ae Maw brought by.

I read the tablet.

* * *

Heptosh had observed as much as he could from his perch in the cliffs surrounding the city. He had use his magnifiers to get a closer look. He saw no signs of life apart from a few herds of cattle. Perhaps some wrecked vehicles, and -- bones? He didn't dare speculate. He still couldn't bring himself to descend to ground level, at least not within sight of the space port built into the mountains opposite.

Perhaps with the information he had gleaned so far, the sector council would see fit to send a larger investigation team.

He used the linear propulsion motor to bring his ship into orbit before engaging the logical relocator. The one had to be completely shut down before it was safe to use the other.

The first step was to simulate linear motion. That involved the reverse beam transmitter sending a series of commands at very high speed, each inducing relocation by half a hydrogen atom's width, thus, pushing other matter out of the way instead of trying to occupy the same location. Two atoms occupying the same space at the same time can lead to atomic fusion, at worst.

It also insured that the relocator was working properly. Not everyone bothered to do that, but Heptosh believed in playing it safe. Only one person he knew of had relocated himself to a totally unknown part of the universe. By a miracle, he had managed to find his way back with a faulty relocator and a good geographical knowledge of space.

Heptosh set the relocator to simulated forward motion, and engaged.

Nine-hundred-and-ninety-nine times out of a thousand it worked just fine. But this was that one time out of a thousand that it didn't. The planet below him, instead of growing steadily smaller, was jumping from one size to another.

He flicked the relocator off. Using linear propulsion, he began moving back to Kalodzu-Famta.

What to do?

If he travelled back to Tok using linear propulsion, it would take a couple of centuries to get there. To him it would only seem like a couple of months travelling close to the speed of light, but it would be far too late to make use of the data he had gathered on the Kalodzu.

The non-human species had other means of travelling beyond the speed of light, but the only technology known to humans was logical relocation, using the hyperspace coordinates to re-plot the location of each atom within a given range.

So, Heptosh's logical relocator wasn't working properly. He'd have to land and try to get it fixed.

Was it something he could fix himself? Where would he get help? Half of the planet was primitive. The other half -- what? Heptosh still didn't know. Did he dare land there and find out?

He was moving at a linear speed that would get him there in half a day. He had time to think.

## 4

So, they say I'm the one who's supposed to find the golden tablets. Venerable Too Dha talks like I have to go right away! How does he think I'm going to do that? It's not on this planet, and I can't even go everywhere here, much less anywhere else!

I'm hungry. I'll have a piece of bread with some goat's milk cheese. Tomorrow I'll take the sheep to the grass field near where I've planted some gourds. There, I can pick some cucumbers and squash to eat with my bread.

I should start a small herd of goats so I can make my own cheese. I wonder if I'll have enough wool left after shearing season to buy one or two?

Hold on! What's bothering the sheep?

They see something, but whatever it is is behind those huts. I'll go check.

I leave my food on the stone table and walk about the huts near the fence.

Oh holy! It's a man -- dressed all funny! And I've never seen anyone with hair like that -- it's grey, but it's in really tiny ringlets, and his skin is real dark -- almost black! Did the Kalodzus look like that?

He sees me. I'm sure glad I didn't take off my tunic!

He walks up to me and he's saying something.

'Shelta pakh khalti'

Huh?

He's saying it again, more slowly.

'Shel-ta pakh khal-ti'

Part of that sounds -- but no! The Kalodzu didn't speak Nephteshi. That's a holy language!

'Shel-ta pakh khal-ti -- khati Heptosh'

Khati Heptosh -- That is Nephteshi! It means 'my name is Heptosh'. Oh the gods! How can he be speaking Nepteshi?

He's saying it all again, this time using his hands to point and all that sort of thing.

Ni Gwah and I used to say things in Nepteshi when we didn't want other people to know what we were talking about.

'Kha ti Eetoo,' I say.

I think I know what else he was saying: 'Can you help me?'

It doesn't sound exactly like Nephteshi, but close enough.

'Nosh ta, Eetoo,' he says. That means, 'Hello, Eetoo.'

I ask him if he is a Kalodzu.

He says, 'No, I'm a Nefzedi, living on Tok.' He says it slowly, so I can understand him. I have no idea what those places are, though.

He talks faster than me, but he's got his sounds all wrong. That's why I didn't understand him at first.

'I need help with my ship,' he says. 'Does anyone near here know how to fix a ship?'

'No ships come here,' I say. 'I never see a ship.'

I don't know if I have my tenses right or not. He understands me, though.

'Come,' he says.

I follow him. We walk past the edge of the canyon, around the protrusion and into the smaller canyon next to it.

That must be a ship. It's a big round thing, like a covered dish, but with legs. If he didn't say it was a ship, I would have thought it was a giant's dish for cooking people in.

How does he get the lid off?

I stand there looking at it.

* * *

Heptosh looked again at the shepherd boy standing with his mouth open. Obviously he'd never seen a ship before. He looked as primitive as they come -- the homespun tunic that he could almost see through, no shoes, straight rusty brown hair that might have been cut some months ago by placing a bowl on his head, his question if he were a Kalodzu, probably never met anyone outside his tribe. Did Heptosh really expect any help from him?

But the boy spoke Nephteshi! That was truly amazing.

Heptosh probably would never have discovered that had he not been so desperate. Maybe there was hope.

'Have you never seen a ship like this?' he asked.

'Have not,' said the boy.

'Do you know who has seen one?'

The boy only shook his head.

Heptosh hadn't expected him to say yes, but he didn't know anything else he could ask. But maybe...

'Do you know the way to the land of the Kalodzu?'

'Yes.' The boy pointed back towards the abandoned village.

'Can you take me there?'

The boy stared at him for a moment with his greenish eyes, and then said, 'Come.'

Heptosh followed him back to the village, and then towards the rail fence.

'Many years ago, the Kalodzu come here, they buy, they sell. Fa-tzi-zhi come to trade. They stop. Now, nothing.'

'What happened to the Kalodzu?' asked Heptosh.

'They stop coming.'

'Why?'

The boy shrugged, 'They stop.'

The boy, Eetoo, lifted the rail that served as a gate. The sheep stood at a safe distance, obviously wary of Heptosh.

A winding stream flowed from inside the canyon, out past the village where a stone bridge crossed it. The path Eetoo took crossed one of the bends. He simply began wading in.

'Wait,' called Heptosh.

Eetoo stopped while Heptosh took off his shoes. The water came up to the boy's knees.

Carrying his shoes, Heptosh followed. Perhaps he'd try to follow as best he could barefoot.

Some of the sheep followed at a distance, though on the other side of the stream.

The boy's feet were obviously well calloused from years of trampling the countryside unshod. After they crossed another stream, Heptosh had to put his shoes back on. The ground was becoming more uneven, and the stream was now bubbling over the jagged rocks.

Soon they could see the end of the canyon and the waterfall that fed the stream.

The boy pointed to a road built against the cliff. Now, Heptosh could see it went all the way along the cliff to the village, probably leading to the stone bridge.

All this stumbling over rocks and wading the streams when a road went all the way!

Heptosh looked in disbelief, but the boy looked oblivious to the irony.

They climbed a few rocks up the face of the cliff until they met the road. It took so much climbing it would have almost been worthwhile going back to the stone bridge.

The path continued to climb until it brought them behind the waterfall. There, they found a cave.

It was dark inside. They'd need a light. It was also getting late in the day.

'How far is it to the other end?'

The boy shrugged. 'Three furlongs.'

Not far, but Heptosh preferred to make a fresh start in the morning.

'I'll come back tomorrow. Let's go back. Can we take this road all the way to the village?'

Eetoo saw no problem.

They went back that way.

## 5

What will the stranger want next?

I still didn't eat my lunch, and it's evening already. My bag is still on the stone bench.

The stranger's gone back to his ship thing. He's probably got food there.

I should have offered him some of mine. He is a stranger, and we should show hospitality.

But he's gone now. I finish my food.

I wonder if that's the same ship I've been seeing?

It's still light. I walk over to where the ship is. I don't see the man. I sit on a rock and look at it.

I've never seen anything like it. Where did the man go? He must be inside, but I don't see any way to get in.

Is this the kind of ship that goes to the stars? Maybe our ancestors came on them.

It's getting dark. I get up and walk back to the market. I put my stuff into one of the huts and roll out my rug. I hang up my tunic to air out, take my blanket and settle down.

I can't sleep. There's so much happening.

I'm still thinking about Venerable Too Dha's strange words. I have to go to find the golden plates. He doesn't have any idea how, nor do I. Our people haven't travelled on the ships for hundreds of years.

But today, I've seen a ship, and I met the man that keeps it. I showed him to the cave.

Perhaps I can go on his ship to the stars, and then I can find the golden tablets.

He seems a nice man. I'm sure he'll take me. I'll ask him in the morning as he goes to Kalodzuland.

He even speaks the holy language for everyday conversation! He's probably one of the gods.

* * *

Heptosh flicked on his viewer. The whole upper dome of his ship turned transparent from the inside, revealing that it was morning.

The first thing he noticed was the shepherd boy sitting on a nearby rock, gazing at the ship. To the boy, the ship would have looked no different than before, as it was a one way viewer.

Interesting young chap. Knows Nephteshi, though not very fluently.

Heptosh hadn't heard that the Famtizhi understood Nephteshi. The Kalodzu only used Nephteshi as the language of interstellar communication.

Wonder what he wants now?

The look on the boy's face gave no hint. He didn't look as though he were in any hurry. Maybe it was idle curiosity.

Heptosh decided to have his breakfast before emerging. He reached into one of the compartments and got one large corn wafer and a jar of honey. That would do for breakfast.

Corn wafers were ideal for interplanetary trips. Some were made with various fillings, such as meat or vegetable, or perhaps something sweet. For breakfast, Heptosh preferred a plain one with honey.

The boy just sat, perfectly still.

I wonder if I couldn't use a helper for this excursion? Thought Heptosh. The boy looked as though he'd be no trouble. He seemed to have the time for it.

Heptosh had no idea what he'd find on the other side of the divide besides the landscape he had seen from the cliff. He wasn't as young as he used to be. Perhaps it would be a good idea to have a companion. Could the boy fight?

He downed the last of his wafer, licked some honey from his fingers, and reached for his flask of coourzt beverage.

Usually, three or four swigs of it did him for the morning, but today, he lingered over it. He wanted to think a while longer over what he had to do.

The coourzt berry was native to one of the Blilkin planets, but had been introduced to most of the populations in the sector -- both human and non. The Nefzedi traditionally drank wine or fresh juice on their own planet, but since settling in Tok, they readily adopted the coourzt beverage as their favourite. Wine was okay for digestion, or getting drunk, but coourzt could be taken more often and in larger quantities without the side effects. They brewed it in a manner similar to wine, often with various herbs blended in, but it was more of a stimulant. A few swigs in the morning made the eyes brighter and made one feel better prepared to face the day. It was also good for adjusting to different day and night schedules by helping one stay awake when one needed to. But too much, too late in the day could lead to a sleepless night.

Heptosh nursed his coourzt and deliberated.

He knew that much of what was to be found in the Kalodzu area was underground. The surface had shown him nothing.

Normally there would be at least a few people on the surface. The fact that he saw none, should mean something. So should the fact that the shepherd boy had never met a Kalodzu, nor, apparently, knew what one looked like. They were not a black-skinned race, like the Nefzedi. He said the Kalodzu used to trade at this market, but had long stopped.

So, what was he to expect? Was it safe to venture underground?

What choice did he have? He'd have to live here for the rest of his life, or until someone got curious as to why he didn't return and came looking for him. That could be a lifetime. This wasn't a high priority mission, or they would have issued him a twin particle communicator. The Human Affairs department of the sector council, administered by humans, wasn't known for its efficiency.

He began to gather various items and put them in a carry bag: a metzig torch, some corn wafers, a water flask, his coourzt flask, a spare loin cloth and toga, bedding, and a few items for personal hygiene. He already had his utility belt strapped on, which had his distance viewer, night goggles, balm, knife and a small dart-gun. Then he twisted the release handle and pushed the door open.

The boy lurched to his feet in surprise, then stood there, indecisively.

'Can you go with me through the tunnel?' Heptosh asked in as simple Nephteshi as he could.

'I can,' said Eetoo.

'Good. Let's go then. I might need your help.'

Eetoo followed.

Heptosh insisted on going by way of the stone bridge. Eetoo had no objection.

Though Eetoo had tended to walk either in front or directly behind Heptosh, here he began walking beside him. He looked as though he were wanting to say something. He made several attempts, but seemed to give up before he started

'Yes?' said Heptosh, finally. 'What do you want to tell me?'

Eetoo pointed in the direction of the other canyon. 'Boat?'

'Yes?'

'Go to sky? To heaven?'

'I -- er -- travel to the heavens, yes.'

'Planet have golden tablets, where?'

'What again?'

'Er -- ' then without warning, the simple shepherd boy launched into a spiel in a literary form of ancient Nephteshi: '"Noka was the father of three sons, and after the waters subsided, he wrote for them, the words of this account: for his first son, Sim-Hep, he wrote it on golden tablets; for his second, Kham-Hep, he wrote in on stone; and for his youngest, Yap-Phet, he wrote it on an animal hide. The account, according to all three, is complete, but in none of them is it whole. One among the sons of Kham shall one day journey to the sons of Sim and receive from his sons the writings from the tablet of gold. One from among the sons of Sim will one day journey to the sons of Yap Phet, and give to him the message of the golden tablet."'

Heptosh listened in amazement. Obviously, the boy had been taught Nephteshi as a means to read ancient manuscripts in the possession of his tribe. The names sounded familiar. They were associated with a legendary account of a planet that was engulfed in water.

Eetoo went back to his broken Nephteshi: 'I -- son of Kham-Hep. I must travel find golden tablets of Sim-Hep.'

Heptosh noticed he was looking at him, as though hoping for an answer.

'Who told you that?' asked Heptosh.

'Er -- ancient -- er -- old man Too Dha. He keeper of the tablets. He have dream say I go.'

'How do you plan to go?'

'Er -- ' suddenly Eetoo looked perplexed, as though he were surprised that Heptosh didn't already know. 'Er -- you Nephteshi speak -- you god?'

'Oh dear! No! I'm certainly not a god!'

'But -- Nephteshi -- holy tongue! Men not speak to men!'

So, Nephteshi was a holy language to his tribe, for reading their holy writings. The fact the Heptosh spoke it made him a god!

'Nephteshi is spoken by many peoples,' corrected Heptosh. 'On my planet, we speak Nephteshi to people of other nationalities and other planets. On the planet of Nephtesh, they have no other language to speak. They must speak Nephteshi.'

'You not god? But you have boat.'

'My "boat" is broken. I must fix, repair, mend. If I were a god, I could snap my finger and make it better. I cannot. That's why I must go to land of Kalodzu.'

'You carry me to planet of Nephtesh?'

'I don't know where the planet is. I only heard it was the centre of a vast empire once. And, my ship is broken.'

'Can help me find?'

The boy looked as though he'd break into tears if Heptosh refused.

'I'll tell you what. You help me find parts for my ship. I'll think about helping you look for the planet, Nephtesh. But what about your father and mother? What would they say?'

'Father and mother died. Only Uncle Zhue Paw, and old man Too Dha. I am man now. I can go.'

Suddenly Eetoo was no longer the shy timid shepherd boy of earlier. He was someone with a mission.

By now, they had reached the waterfall. Between the falling stream and the cliff face, the road ended at the cave.

Eetoo looked doubtful.

'You've been in before, haven't you?'

'Yes. Sheep run away, go in. I go in after. It night. I have fire.'

'Did you find your sheep?'

'No. I go and go, I hear sheep ahead, sheep afraid of light and go on. I think road must stop, but go on. I want to go back, I afraid, but I hear sheep. Then I see star light. Sheep gone. I wait for morning, but then, no fire. Also, no sheep. I see Kalodzuland. I afraid to go but I know I must not stay. Fa-tzi-zhi people must not stay. I go in dark -- afraid.'

'I have a light here.' Heptosh brought out his metzig torch. He lit it. Eetoo looked at it in amazement. It lit the cave walls like broad daylight.

'Ah! Not afraid now!'

They stepped into the tunnel.

'But -- Kalodzuland dangerous for Fa-tzi-zhi people.'

'If you are to go in search of the golden tablets, you will certainly pass through places more dangerous than Kalodzuland.'

They walked on and on. It was a straight rectangular passage with no features aside from bare rock, and straight vertical seams every few yards. Now and then, the passage made a slight angle. This prevented any light from showing from either entrance, so it was impossible to see how much further they had to go.

'How much further?' asked Heptosh.

'Three furlongs.'

'Oh -- er, but didn't you say it was three furlongs all the way through?'

'Yes. Three furlongs.'

'I'm sure we've already been three furlongs. How much further?'

'Three furlongs.'

'Then that should be six furlongs.'

'Huh?'

By the time Heptosh saw daylight showing around the corner, he estimated that they had been seven.

He shook his head.

## 6

the valley stretches before, an ancient city, overgrown  
avenues and boulevards draped in shrubs and creeping vines

the mountains that line the city, appear like giant bricks place atop one another  
the man-made landscape towers over the city

beyond these, again, giant blocks rise into mountain peaks  
forming the geometric mountain range

This is just the way I saw it before. Still don't see any people. It must be okay. The Nephteshi man said it is. I can't believe I'm going to go to the stars and find the golden tablets.

The man is taking out something from his belt, putting it up to his eye, and looking into it. He points it here and there. Maybe it shows him things.

He's looking at the mountain on the other side of the valley. It looks as though it were made of giant bricks. There's a wide hole on the side facing us that looks awfully big -- a lot bigger than this hole we're in. A tree could easily stand up inside, and it looks as wide as the mouth of the Nyu Pee river.

Now, he's looking at the big square thing in middle of the valley, that looks like a giant's house, made of the same giant bricks. I also see normal sized houses here and there. Some are pretty big. There's a road that leads from there, and a fork off to the mountain across from us. There's lots of trees in between, and more houses.

Now, he's trying to see where this path leads -- the one we're standing on.

'Let's go,' he says.

So we start walking.

* * *

It's been a long walk. We're at the bottom of the mountain now, and there's a road that goes off straight ahead. It looks like solid rock. There's ivy growing on it in some places, and big cracks in others where plants are growing through.

There's a herd of cows up ahead going from one side of the road to another. Some are stopping in the middle to eat the plants growing up through the cracks.

There's got to be no one about. Why would cows be wandering about like this by themselves? Further off I see some horses, also loose by themselves.

There's a house, but it looks half fallen down.

The man's looking about too. It looks as though he's as surprised as me at not seeing anyone.

'Let's go in here,' he says.

It has an upper floor. We go to the big gate at the bottom. There's a board missing. He looks in.

He tries to open it, but it's locked.

Then, he steps back a bit and gives it a hard kick. The door gives way.

We go in. It's one big room downstairs.

The back door is open. We could have gone in that way.

There's a big thing in the middle. It has a couple of chairs built in, and some handles and some sort of other funny things in the front, some things with letters and crystal surfaces.

'A (something or other)!' he says. 'I didn't think they were so (something or other)!'

'Huh?' I say.

'Have you seen one of these before?'

'No,' I say.

'It's an (something or other).' He says it again.

Looking at me, he says it again. This time I catch it.

'An air scooter?'

'Yes. It's been a long time since anyone's used it.'

In another corner, there's a wooden cart, but part of it is rotted. There's also some feeding troughs. I'm sure they had horses once, but they escaped out the back door.

The man looks at the ladder leading up to a door in the ceiling. He tries the ladder to make sure it's safe. Then he starts climbing.

I follow him.

I've never seen so many cobwebs. The dust is as thick as my finger in some places. I'm sure no one's been here in years. The room has chairs and tables. There are some things lying about. He takes a stick and pulls the cobwebs off, and dusts off some of the things. Some things, he puts into his bag. One looks like a light, like the one he already has. He's trying it out, and shining it on the rest of the room.

He picks up a small flat box and opens it. There's no room to put anything. It's just solid silvery stuff. There's a stick attached to the lid, and he takes that and pushes it into the silvery stuff. He waits for something to happen, but it doesn't. Then, he turns off the shiny thing, opens it up and sticks the end into the back end of the box. Suddenly the stuff starts moving, and little bits of it stick up. I see they're all little tiny pins all stuck together. He pushes some down to make letters, and other ones pop up, so he can read it. I can tell they're pictographic letters in Nephteshi. It must be magic.

He turns about and sees me.

'This is a (something-or-other).'

'Huh?'

'A computer.'

He shuts the lid and puts it in his bag.

'I'll read it later. It may tell us a lot.'

He opens a door to another room, but suddenly he shuts it again. He looks at me, looking a bit pale.

'You'd better stay out here, Eetoo.'

He goes in.

What does he see?

I go to the door and open it a bit and peep in.

There's a bed. It's hard to see what's there because of the cobwebs.

Oh! The gods! It's someone's bones -- two people's! They're lying side by side on the bed.

My friend looks about and sees me. He tells me to go ahead and come in.

He probably thought I'd be spooked.

He's pulling the cobwebs off with a stick.

The bones are a bit funny though. Some of it's not completely rotted. One arm still looks it's still together, but it doesn't look like a real arm. The man looks at me and says, 'Have you seen this before?' He's pointing to the arm.

I shake my head.

'It's (something-or-other).'

'It's -- what?'

'Bionic. It's not real skin and flesh. It's human flesh that started to turn into machinery. This is what I feared had happened. This also happened on my own planet, and many families there also killed themselves when they knew what they had done.'

Humans turning into machinery?

'Let's go,' he says.

We go down the ladder again.

Now, he's looking at the big contraption downstairs. He opens the gates on both sides of the room so we can see it better.

He turns some handles on it, and pushes on something, and waits. Nothing happens. Now he's looking about the room. There's stuff all over the place. He picks up this and that. It looks as though he's found what he's looking for. It's a small box. He brings it to the thing, gets down and opens a little door. He takes out a box that looks like the one he found, and puts the other one in. He tries turning the handles again. Something seems to be doing what he wanted. At least he's happy about that. Then, he opens something else and does something to another part of the contraption.

Then, he dusts off the seat in front, and sits on it. He pulls a handle, and suddenly there's a noise, sort of like a waterfall. Then, the whole contraption lifts up into the air, about one hand's breadth high.

'Get on,' he says.

I don't know about this. It flies!

'It's okay. It won't hurt you.'

I get in the seat behind him -- very carefully. The thing starts to tip when I step on it, as though it were a boat.

I'm sitting down. It's a nice chair.

Suddenly we're going out the gate and back onto the road.

Wow! We're going fast! Is it safe to go this fast? He said it would be okay.

We're going past more houses. Some cows run to get out of our way.

I'm starting to enjoy this!

* * *

Heptosh kept his apprehensions to himself. The boy had no idea of the danger that might lurk behind any corner.

Up ahead were the remains of another air scooter. Bones were scattered about.

This time, there were whole bodies that looked bionic. One lacked a head, and another had a hole in it's chest. The cavity looked burnt about the edges. One of them looked as though its head had been burned off.

Heptosh stopped the scooter, dismounted and walked over to the bionics.

What could have caused this much damage to bionic bodies?

He stepped to the wreckage. The bones looked as though they had been undisturbed throughout the 12 year restriction. They were completely dry, lacked any smell, one of the hands was bionic.

Wait. What was the other one holding?

It looked like a voltage shooter.

He stooped to pick it up. It was a hand held tool that would draw the voltage from whatever power cell was attached, and send a lightning bolt to whatever you aimed it at. It could set fire to sticks, or jump start a machine, or -- with a power cell this size -- kill a bionic.

Clever!

How much voltage was there left after 12 years?

Heptosh aimed it at the wrecked vehicle. Just enough to produce a visible bolt and make a black spot on the surface. Then it died.

It also made Eetoo jump out of his skin.

'Good weapon,' Heptosh said. 'We just need to find another power cell.'

The boy looked at him blankly.

Heptosh pointed to the bionics. 'Have you ever seen people that looked like that?'

'No.'

Strange. Apparently no survivors. Perhaps they did a thorough job of exterminating them. But some should have survived, either bionic or human.

He wouldn't take any chances. He searched the wreckage for any spare power cell. There were none. He put the shooter into his bag and they got onto the scooter once again.

'What people them?' asked Eetoo.

'They used to be normal people,' began Heptosh. 'They took an implant -- er -- a very small machine thing that can use what's in the body to make more of itself. It reads the DNA and...'

Eetoo looked blank.

'Well -- it just makes more of itself until the whole body becomes bionic. But the soul is dead.'

'Dead?'

'Just a machine man without a soul.'

Eetoo looked at the dead bionic once more with a look of dread.

Heptosh started the scooter and they moved on.

They passed more houses in various states of disrepair -- more wrecked vehicles -- bones and bionic remains -- Heptosh searched a few of the sites for power cells and other supplies. Another computer or two would give a fuller account of what happened -- a tragic story, by the looks of it.

Robbing the dead wasn't Heptosh's idea of a good time, but if it would avenge their death --

One power cell seemed to have half a charge left -- probably enough to disable three bionics if he set the voltage only moderately high. His bag was weighing him down. If they had to do much walking, maybe Eetoo could carry some of the items into his shepherd bag.

He took a turn that he judged would take him to the pyramid. There should be an entry to the underground infrastructure. All the human-made planets had a similar architectural design, even if their facial geography varied.

Though they saw more wreckages and signs of battle, they stayed on course until they came to the foot of the pyramid. Then, they circled it until they found the entrance.

On the side of the pyramid facing the space port he saw a lake -- rectangular shaped, but it didn't have a proper shore. Some dead trees were sticking out of the water.

There wasn't supposed to be a lake here, thought Heptosh.

A road led to the open gate through what appeared to be a park with stone tables in the shade of some big trees. They stopped for lunch before proceeding. Eetoo appeared to enjoy the corn wafer with spinach and chicken filling.

They entered the pyramid via a downward ramp wide enough for land vehicles. From there, if Heptosh knew internal planetary infrastructure, there would be a road straight to the space port.

He and Eetoo mounted the scooter, Heptosh lit the lamps and they descended the ramp.

He turned to the left, the direction of the space port, but suddenly found himself facing a rock wall.

He turned to move along the wall to look for a door, but he found none, only rubble and broken rock.

He moved away from the wall, put the lamps on high power to get a better look. What he saw took his breath away.

The giant slab that formed the roof over the passage had fallen in, blocking off the way to the space port. The two ends of the fallen slab looked as though they had been blasted so as to make it fit precisely into the entrance.

That explained the rectangular lake up on the surface. The ground had sunken in and filled up with rain water.

There were other ways of getting in. Heptosh dimmed the lights, and started down the other corridor.

Several furlongs onward he came to one of the smaller doors into the central area. It was shut, and there were stone beams placed into the aperture, wedging the door in closed position. It was, in effect, locked from outside.

What about the entrance further down?

They sped on to that. Same story. Were all the entry points to the central area blocked off?

Suddenly Heptosh knew. He also conjectured that if he were to go to the surface, he'd find all skylights and vent holes likewise sealed. Probably the entire population of bionics were trapped inside the central area. Without sunlight, their primary energy source, they would eventually go comatose.

It was a good-news-bad-news situation. They probably didn't have to worry about the bionics, but the only way to the spaceport now was through the mountain range -- a long way. The scooter wouldn't be able to navigate the whole route.

What about approaching the space port from the surface?

If he were a lot younger, he could have tried scaling the face of the great wall to reach the spaceship entrance. Eetoo could do it, maybe, but how would he get Heptosh up?

They'd have to go the long way. If they rationed wisely, the food would probably last.

'Come Eetoo. We have a long way to go,' he said.

## 7

sunlight filtering from openings high above illuminates stalactites and stalagmites that time has glazed over the human-hewn cave walls

the sound of running water echoes through the caverns

This trip is really taking a long time. I'm sure the sheep will have scoured the ground bare by now.

We stopped twice to eat. His crispy bread is nice, but I think I'll go back to my normal bread with cheese next meal. I'll offer him some.

We're walking now. The 'scooter' thing won't fit through all these places we have to go. We've crossed one underground stream.

At least we don't need the torches on all the time, there's just enough light coming through from up there.

I can hear water up ahead. Probably another stream we have to cross. There's also more light coming from that way.

Hang on! I smell something cooking! There's a bit of smoke in the air. Heptosh smells it too.

'Fish?' he says.

Everyone we've found so far is dead. Who could be cooking fish?

We're up to the stream now. There's the mouth of a cave where the stream goes out, and there I see a fire. Someone's sitting beside it -- a kid, he's got no clothes on.

He's looking at us, like he's scared.

Wait! I know him! Ni Gwah? It couldn't be! He's dead!

He's standing up. It is him! He's turning to run away.

'Ni Gwah! Stop! It's me, Eetoo!'

He stops, and turns about.

'Eetoo?'

'Ni Gwah! How did you get here? We all thought you were dead!'

'I think I am dead! How did you get here? Did you die?'

'You look alive to me.'

'But this is the place of the dead. Everywhere I go I only see people's bones!'

'No. It's Kalodzuland. All the Kalodzu's died or something. Some of them started to turn into funny machine things, and they all killed each other.'

'Who's this man?'

'That's Heptosh. He's going to take me to the Planet of Nephtesh to find the golden tablets...'

'Huh?'

'..and he speaks Nephteshi. Try talking to him.'

Heptosh just stands there looking at us. I think he doesn't have any idea what we're talking about.

I tell him, 'This is my friend, Ni Gwah. He go down a -- er -- water go around and round -- not come up again. We not find him. We think he dead, but I find him here.'

'A whirlpool?' says Heptosh. 'Ask him where he came down.'

Ni Gwah understands him. 'There,' he says. He points upstream. 'Water come down -- er ...' then he says to me in Fa-tzi-zhi, 'a long slide, I thought I was sliding into hell. Then I landed in the stream and I followed it until I came here.' Then he says in Nephteshi, 'Water go whoosh!' He makes a motion with his hand.

Heptosh looks like he knows. 'So,' he says, 'The head of this stream is in the Famtizhi area. You must be a very good swimmer to survive being sucked into a whirlpool.'

'Yes,' I say. 'He very good.'

'How long have you lived here now?'

'I don't know,' Ni Gwah says.

'One year,' I say.

'It's been a year?' he asks me in Fa-tzi-zhi.

He takes us to the mouth of the cave. There are his fishes cooking on the open fire. He turns one of them over.

Outside, I see we're on top of a waterfall. Down there, there's a pool, and a stream that goes on through a canyon. I guess it must lead into the flat lands, but we see only steep cliffs from here. There's a vegetable garden next to the pool.

'Did you plant that?' says Heptosh.

'I find herbs and plant garden,' he answers him. Then to me, in Fa-tzi-zhi, he says, 'I found all sorts of vegetables growing wild near dead people's houses. I take them and plant them here, so I never have to go off and look at people's bones and stuff.'

I can see beans, cabbages, a few gourds, and carrots.

Then, he says, 'Come!'

He jumps off the edge into the pool below.

The water looks good. We've been walking a long way. I throw off my tunic, put it beside the fire, and jump in myself. Heptosh walks down the path on the edge of the cliff. He watches us for a while, swimming and splashing. The, he carefully takes off his clothes and gets in.

He has a lot more to take off than me. There's a cloth he wraps about his shoulders, and then a leather belt with pockets and lots of stuff stuck in it, and then a cloth that he wears about his waist, and then his shoes. Even then he's not totally naked. He's still got something wrapped about his waste and strung between his legs, but I guess he doesn't mind getting that wet.

We have a good time in the water.

Heptosh says we'd better spend the night here. Ni Gwah spears some more fish with his stick, and cooks them for us. He's also made a blowgun, and he says he catches rabbit and squirrel sometimes.

* * *

Heptosh looked about as much as he could in the morning light. The mountains blocked any view and it would be a long walk to the mouth of the canyon -- Ni Gwah said it was three furlongs. He was beginning to suspect that Famtizhi people could only count up to three. He decided that the best thing would be to continue through the underground passages.

The new boy, Ni Gwah, could come with them. They would get him home where his parents and relatives would certainly be happy. Ni Gwah could probably use some clothes. He'd obviously been sucked down the whirlpool while swimming naked in the stream, and hadn't seen any clothes since, except those draped about dead bodies.

Heptosh fetched his extra toga from his carry bag and helped Ni Gwah put it on. He didn't look bad in it, though it wasn't the sort of thing he was used to wearing.

Then, they were off. This time, their food supply included some cooked fish and various vegetables from Ni Gwah's garden plot.

Later, they lunched on some of Eetoo's bread and cheese, and some cabbage and cucumber. The cheese tasted rather nice, Heptosh thought.

By evening, they had entered an area with wider passages. The scooter could have been useful here. They finished Ni Gwah's fish with some of Eetoo's bread, and settled down for the night.

They drifted off to sleep.

## 8

Heptosh was abruptly awakened by a kick to his ribs. There were people walking about, holding weapons. He heard a scuffle next to him, and looked just in time to see a human figure grabbing a toga, while Ni Gwah escaped its folds, running off in the direction they had come.

The human figures -- three of them, Heptosh counted -- forced Heptosh and Eetoo to their feet and they walked down the corridor in the opposite direction from the way Ni Gwah escaped.

There was a conveyance waiting for them. As soon as they were seated and flying down the wide corridor, Heptosh tried to catch a glimpse of their captors by what light was available.

It was too dark. He could only see that there were three of them, plus himself and Eetoo.

Good luck, Ni Gwah, He thought.

Soon, they came to a more well lit area.

These were bionics.

They came to a stop, and the bionics escorted the two off the conveyance, up a narrow corridor, and into an office.

There, they met a stout gentleman dressed in his human clothes, but with bionic skin. Most bionics Heptosh had known hadn't bothered with clothes after their transformation.

He said something to the escorts, and they bowed and left the room.

'Don't be alarmed, gentlemen. I have a glitch in my programming that prevents me from pretending to be a self conscious living human. Please sit down. Welcome to Kalodzuland. My name is Shan. That is, my late human host was known as Shan, the son of Khong.'

Heptosh sat down in one of the chairs. Eetoo followed his example. Shan also sat down.

This was unlike any bionic Heptosh had ever heard of.

'You are confused, no doubt,' Shan went on. 'Before we succumbed to the final stages of bionic transformation, the human Shan gave himself a bio-media upload. Are you aware of that process?'

Heptosh was aware. It was the only known process of uploading information to the human brain. But it had a downside: anything input into the mind in this way became extremely vivid, like a phobia, or an obsession. It would be easier to jump off a cliff in ignorance of the law of gravity than to unlearn something thus uploaded to the brain, so unless great care is taken in the selection of information, an upload could lead to obsessive behaviour or a neurosis.

'Because the upload so vividly imprinted actual facts onto my brain which Shan had carefully selected, it overrode the programming that was built into the bionic chip. Whereas most bionics are programmed to portray themselves as intelligent living beings, my understanding of the true state is the same as that of my human host before the transformation.'

'So you actually found a creative use for bio-media upload!' commented Heptosh.

'Indeed. Oh! I'm sorry for being such a bad host. I haven't even asked you your names!'

'Ah, yes,' began Heptosh. 'I'm Heptosh, this is my young companion, Eetoo. I'm afraid Eetoo hasn't been able to follow all you've said.'

'Yes. From the Famtizhi area, I see. Their tribal culture is probably their best protection from bionic take-over.'

'How so?'

'Bionics are incapable of cultural adaptation,' explained Shan, 'and therefore would be unable to relate to their values in a way that would persuade them to accept a bionic implant.'

'You seem to understand it quite well,' said Heptosh.

'I was programmed by the bio-media upload to learn as much as I can about bionics, and to pass that information on to humans as soon as the opportunity presents itself, as it has just now. Besides that, I've been doing my original job of maintaining the internal infrastructure of this planet until such time as humans arrive to relieve me. Is that your purpose in coming?'

'I'm only on a fact finding trip' replied Heptosh. 'I'm sure something could be arranged later on, when the sector council has had a chance to review all these facts. My biggest problem right now is getting off this planet. My relocator engine isn't functioning properly.'

'Then take my ship. I have no use for it.'

'You're a lifesaver!' exclaimed Heptosh.

Heptosh told him about Ni Gwah.

'I was told there was another human. I'll send him on his way to the Famtizhi area as soon as my bots find him. I do wish I had something to offer you by way of refreshment. We bionics only consume sunlight.'

'Oh, don't worry about us. We brought plenty of food for ourselves.'

'So,' Shan went on, 'What did you learn of our situation from the refugees?'

'The -- refugees?'

'Yes. We sent seven large transport ships, filled to over-capacity with those not yet infected by a bionic chip, including many orphaned children.'

'Ah -- they did say something about ships of refugees, but no such ships have been seen.'

'Oh!' There was a pause, as the the bionic displayed a remarkable show of uncertainty.

Heptosh spoke: 'But, please tell me about the state of the subterranean city. It appears that the entire city centre has been sealed off.'

'Ah! That was a part of our strategy. All bodies not implanted with the bionic chip, including all the children, were to be evacuated. The rest would stay to prevent the bionic army from gaining access to the Famtizhi area, and wreaking havoc there as they had done here. I was to have seen them off, as the others made the last stand. Our sources told us that they would seek entry to the capitol city via the subterranean portion of the city. They sprang a trap for them, by setting explosives to go off in strategic places that would trap them inside. They could have dug their way out, if they had the time, but, deprived of sunlight, their only source of energy, they couldn't last long enough. The surviving, but infected humans did a mop-up operation, eliminating all the bionics that did find their way into the city, and then went, each to their home, to end their own lives.'

'So, all the bionics are eliminated from the planet -- except for these?'

'There are yet a few bionic communities still functional in the Kalodzu area, but not in large enough numbers to do anything. There are a few isolated human communities as well. Some are well armed and prepared to resist any bionics that approach their villages. Others are so far away they don't know anything of what's happened.'

'I must pay posthumous compliments to your host, Shan, in succeeding to form you into a safe bionic.'

'I'm not one hundred percent safe, I'm afraid. From studying myself, and the others (as Shan programmed me to do), I have been able to discover that there is a control circuit in each of us bionics. By targeting that circuit, I'm able to control the others -- but only when they're close by. Furthermore, I am only able to access a peripheral command level. There is a deeper command level which I have not been able to probe neither in them nor myself. I don't know who holds the command key to that level, but whenever such a person shows up on this planet, he or she will have complete control over me, even to the point of overriding Shan's bio-media upload.

'Now, that brings me to the bit I'm now concerned about,' the bionic Shan continued. 'I'm also not sure if, whoever it is, hasn't already tried to access my circuits on a couple of occasions.'

'How so?'

'I have absolutely no memory of the departure of the refugee ships. There is a gap in my memory lasting from a few hours before launch time to about an hour after. It's a bit on and off at the beginning and end, as though I was going in and out of consciousness. I only know from my fellow bionics that the launch took place, and that I had a part in it. Now, you say he refugees never arrived. That concerns me.'

It concerned Heptosh too.

Shan gave Heptosh yet another computer, containing all of his research into the dynamics of bionic replication and their workings.

Shan's ship was similar to Heptosh's. It sat not far from the office in the space port. Heptosh and Eetoo said their goodbye, and boarded.

Heptosh drove Shan's ship over the mountain range and landed it near his own.

Eetoo had proven helpful, so Heptosh decided to take him along. His property included enough grassland to accommodate a few sheep, so he told Eetoo to herd some into his old ship. Then Eetoo boarded Shan's with Heptosh, along with a few sheep that wouldn't fit in the other craft.

Heptosh expanded the radius of the reverse beam transmitter to include his old ship, and began to simulate linear movement. Once he reached a safe distance, he relocated both ships to the Toki system, and again began to simulate linear movement for their approach to Tok.

This ship of Shan's was every bit as good as his own. As for his own, he'd have to send it to the planet, Ashta, where the Heknosh clan were the only known experts in relocators.

# Part 2 -- The Pupil

## 1

Heptosh summed up what he had said so far: 'Thus, the tragic story of the Kalodzus' ultimate resistance. Again, we don't know what happened to those who attempted to escape. Those who stayed chose early death rather than allow an alien force to take over as them.'

The room was full to near capacity. Besides Varasha and most of her staff from the office of Human Affairs, there were representatives from a few of the human communities. Among the non-humans was Fra the Tzozk, planet administrator for Tok, along with Nueryzh the Utz, representing the Noofrishi sector. He was also Heptosh's next door neighbour and close friend.

Both non-humans sat, or perched, towards the back so their large bodies wouldn't obscure anyone else's view.

A young man sitting near Varasha, had a question: 'Couldn't they have just amputated the limbs that had the implant?'

'I wondered that myself,' answered Heptosh. 'From Shan's notes, I've found that one of the first things that happens when a bionic chip begins producing cells is, it sends extra cells to other vital parts of the body where they simply remain idle, receiving signals from the main bionic chip at various intervals. If they fail to receive that signal, such as would be the case if the limb were amputated, they then begin reproducing. Therefore getting rid of one's arm, doesn't halt the process. Whoever designed the bionic chip cleverly pre-empted that possibility.'

Amanhep, president of the Federation of Indigenous Nephteshis of Noofrish spoke up: 'How soon will the Kalodzu area be available for re-populating?'

Certainly Amanhep's not expecting to move Indigenous Nephteshis to Kalodzu-Famta? Though Heptosh.

Varasha took it on herself to answer: 'We still have to do a complete assessment of all the factors on that planet. There are safety issues we need to determine,' (Heptosh hadn't told anyone but Varasha and Neuryzh about Shan's memory lapse) 'then, we'll need to assess the needs of the various communities in the sector. At the next general department meeting, I'll be proposing the formation of a committee to see to all of that. Then, of course, it has to be approved by the sector council.'

'Committees!' huffed Amanhep. 'The Nefzedi moved to Tok without committee action!'

'That was a Toki administrative decision. The Toki government has the right to invite anyone they choose to settle in their jurisdiction. Does anyone else have a question for Mr. Heptosh?'

Varasha was good in that way, Heptosh observed. The way she cut through bogs of nonsense with her Akkadi feminine sense, one would never guess what an inefficient department she ran – staffed largely by Akkadi men, of course.

One more question – this time, by a staff member: 'Mr. Heptosh, can you tell us why you chose to bring along a native from Kalodzu-Famta?'

'Well, er – ' Heptosh was beginning to wonder that himself. 'He needed some assistance in a way that it seemed rather appropriate that I – er – '

It didn't look as though everyone in the room agreed on what the appropriate thing would have been. They certainly wouldn't swallow a tribal legend about golden tablets.

It was Varasha who came to the rescue: 'I'm sure Heptosh has good personal reasons for his decision. If there are no more questions that relate to the former Kalodzu jurisdiction, we shall adjourn.'

The dome on Neuryzh's head gave a warm glow that indicated he was probably sympathetic. Utzes don't smile or frown. The glow of their cranial dome does for them, what eyes and a mouth do for humans.

'I'll keep everyone informed of any further developments.' Varasha was saying. 'There's coourzt drink, and oat and fig biscuits out in the lobby...'

## 2

landscape dominated by the colour green pasture land   
surrounded by a wood

beyond that, atop a steep slope  
vines and green moss cling to a rock formation

a vast configuration of six sided granite pillars  
towering overhead like a giant's pan pipes

at the top, the granite loses the greenness, giving way to crystal  
the natural rock colour gives in to the colour of the sky

though the grade seems unnaturally steep, the trees don't mind it  
nor do the sheep consider the slope

things aren't as heavy on this planet

If it weren't for the sheep, I think I'd go crazy. I need to look at something I'm used to, and they're it.

At least the sheep are used to it. They were all giddy when we got here from feeling so light. One of them died. They jump a lot higher than they did at home.

I guess the golden tablets aren't on this planet after all. Heptosh says I'll have to learn a lot before I go looking for them -- like how to pilot a ship and all that.

I should forget about finding the tablets and go home. I don't know if the sheep could take suddenly getting heavier though.

I can't take the sheep very far here -- only on Heptosh's land. At least the grass grows fast, so I don't need to take them so far.

Everything I see here belongs to Heptosh. I didn't know you could own pieces of the countryside. At home, we only own the houses we live in.

I hear voices -- like kids playing. I've heard them before. Some people must live on the other side of the woods downhill from here.

I'll go near and look.

I wouldn't dare go this fast down such a steep place back home. Here, even the trees seem to feel lighter. They grow a lot taller, but they're very thin for their height. I still carry my stick though, just in case I need it.

I haven't been this close to the edge of the property yet. It's through some trees. There's a lake there. On the bank near the trees, I see a house. The road runs on the other side of it. There's a big shady tree, and I see some kids sitting about under it. One of them's swinging from a rope with a piece of wood attached. There's also a stone table, and a bench. Then, over on the bank on this side of the house, there's a wooden pier in the shade of another big tree.

I'll go closer and look.

There's a stone wall here, just high enough to keep sheep and goats from climbing over. There's a few trees over on their side as well.

Those kids remind me of home -- at least the smaller kid who isn't wearing anything. He's trying to get something away from the biggest kid. I can't catch what he's saying. The kid who's swinging from the rope looks my age. The kid who's wrestling with the little one looks older. There's a girl with brown hair. She's making a chain out of some of the flowers. She might be my age too.

The kid on the swing sees me.

I'd better go.

He's waving at me. I wave back.

'You! Come!' he's saying.

I can understand that. But I can tell it's not the language they're talking to each other. But he's talking like he doesn't know it as well.

I climb over the wall and start walking to them.

The big kid and the little one look around.

'You -- new boy with Mr. Heptosh?'

I nod.

The kid on the swing is talking: 'We b'n Shammah family. I Shav. This, my brother Rav, and small brother, Nakham.'

The big kid says, 'Nakham, him a little brat! I call him ladybird!'

The kid yells something at him in their language.

'Hey, ladybird! Ladybird!' He starts running with Nakham chasing him.

Shav points at the girl: 'My sister, Tsaphar. Tsaphar! Come!'

The girl looks up and starts coming. She smiles at me. She's pretty.

'She my (something-or-other) sister.'

'Huh?'

'Born in the same womb.'

I guess he means she's his twin. I say the word he said: 'Twin?'

'Yes. She my twin. What you name?' says Shav.

'Eetoo,' I say.

'What family name?'

'Huh?'

'Family. We b'n Shammah. Our great great grandfather, one who first own this land, named Shammah. His children, b'n Shammah. I Shav b'n Shammah, he, Rav b'n Shammah, this, Tsaphar b'n Shammah.'

'We Fa-tzi-zhi, we called by name of first child. My father, Eetoo Paw, my mother, Eetoo Maw -- but they dead now.'

'We Akkadi people. We named after our fathers.' Shav sounds as though he thinks that's the only way to do it.

Tsaphar says, 'They're dead? Oh!' She looks at me like she's sad for me.

'Oh no. They dead a long time now. I big as him.' I point to Nakham.

'Our father died five years ago,' she says.

Suddenly Nakham's screaming. He's holding on to his shoulder. We all go running over.

'Cursed bees!' says Rav. 'So much problem!'

'Bee?' I say.

I look at his shoulder. I pull his hand away. Sure enough, there's a stinger. I start working it out with my fingernail. I have some eucalyptus and camphor oil in a little flask in my pouch. I rub some on him.

'Bees! Too many on Tok now!' says Shav.

Nakham's stopped crying now.

Rav says, 'Nefzedi, they bring bees from Nefzed. They sell honey, but some bees, they get away and build nest in forests. Now, wild bees everywhere!'

'Where's the nest?' I ask.

Tsaphar points to the tree next to the pier. I see the beehive hanging from it.

'We can't swim because of bees there!' says Shav.

These people obviously don't know how to smoke a beehive. I've done that lots of times in Kalodzu-Famta.

'I can smoke it,' I say.

'Huh?' say the two older boys.

'Do you have long pole?'

'Don't disturb them. They very bad!' says Rav.

'No. Smoke. They go to sleep.'

They just look at me. Then Rav says something to Shav, and he goes running towards their house.

I look about. Those dry branches should burn slowly enough. I go get them.

Shav comes running back with a poll. I take it and start tying the branches to the end of the poll with some long grass stalks. Now I need a fire.

I have a metzig torch in my bag. If I take the cover off, that will give me a spark. I light the branches.

I've got a small fire going. I wait till it's smoking.

Now, the beehive. The others follow me -- carefully.

I raise the end of the poll just under the beehive. The smoke is covering the whole hive. I let it soak in the smoke a while.

Then, I put the poll down, tie up my skirt so it won't get in the way, and climb up to the branch.

The kids all gasp as I break off the branch with the hive. They've never seen this before. Nakham runs away.

I jump down with the hive. I take a small stick and scrape the bees off. Then I break off a bit of the comb and eat it. I hold it up for them to try some.

They all look amazed. We start walking back to the tree.

Nakham is peeping out from the back door. Shav shouts something to him. He comes out with a bowl, and I put the honeycomb into it.

So here we are, eating honeycomb. Shav goes back for some bread, and we dip that into the honey.

Now, I'm their friend.

'We can swim now!' says Shav. He throws off his tunic. I start to pull mine off too.

'Stop!' says Rav. 'Not yet.'

He takes Tsaphar by the hand and leads her to the house.

Tsaphar looks at me and smiles as they go.

Rav comes back. Now I can take off my tunic. I guess they didn't want their sister hanging about with a naked stranger. Some Fa-tzi-zhi families are like that. We all jump into the water.

I can't forget the way she smiled at me.

Shav wants to see which one of us can swim the fastest. We swim from the little pier to the tree over yonder. I beat him by a foot. Then Rav wants to race me. He wins. Then, Nakhan wants to race me as well.

Rav starts talking about some girl. 'You see daughter of miller? Her name Zukrah.'

I tell him I haven't met the miller yet.

'She pretty. She'll be mine.'

Shav says, 'But Tash, son of Doctor Taknen love her. She love Tash!'

'Tash not a strong man. I fight Tash for her. She will have me, not him.' He says something in their language.

Nakhan cheers him.

'Tash, he say he intelligent, his family rich...' Shav says.

'Hah! He black-skinned Nefzedi. Nefzedi think they big, they not! All slimy snakes! Zukra, miller's daughter is Akkadi. Strong Akkadi man like me can protect her. We be rich from coourzt growing. Nefzedi, they come only recent, they take...'

Nakhan pipes in: 'Ha ha! Nefzedi -- phttttttttt!'

Shav says something in their language. All I catch is 'Eetoo' and 'Heptosh'.

Suddenly Rav says, 'But Mr. Heptosh, he good man. He okay. Other Nefzedi, they slimy black snakes.'

'Eetoo,' says Shav. 'You love a woman?'

'Er --' No one's ever asked me that before.

Someone's giggling at the bank near the woods.

I look. There's Tsaphar watching us from under a bush.

Nakhan starts jumping and laughing.

'Hoi!' yells Rav.

He gets out of the water, yelling at her in their language. He practically drags her back to the house.

Shav looks at me and grins. 'You like Tsaphar, yes? Maybe you and her...hah?'

I don't know. I can't forget the way she smiled at me though.

We play a little while longer. Then I go back to my sheep.

* * *

Heptosh's carrier differed from Neuryzh's in that he drove his via a control panel. Neuryzh controlled this one from inside his head, so it looked as though both were seated -- or perched -- leisurely as the countryside flew past them. The weather was just right for riding along with the canopy folded down. There was only the tall front of the carrier with the crystal windscreen separating them from the country air. As the perches could be adjusted for sitting, it was comfortable enough for Heptosh.

'I don't know when anything official's going to happen in regards to Kalodzuland,' said Heptosh. 'The Akkadis, more than anyone else, should know human populations need the living space.'

'So, it would seem, do the Indigenous Nephteshis.'

'Hah! I hope Amanhep doesn't seriously hope to move a Nephteshi population there. Their problems are only a matter of some give and take on both sides.'

'As the sector's chief negotiator, I suppose you'd know. But would that not also work for the Akkadis and Nephteshis here on Tok?'

'Part of our problem is, we are truly cramped for space. I don't think the other species on Tok are happy with our continuously moving into spaces reserved for them, especially the Sozk.'

'Yes,' observed Neuryzh, 'they've been a bit touchy on that.'

There was a pause.

'Never-the-less, you've advanced the situation a major step forward,' said Neuryzh, finally. 'It's now on a par with other issues that must be settled. The Human Affairs Department is now responsible to the sector council to see it through.'

'But I'm still in a quandary regarding Shan. I believe he could be useful to us, yet if I drew attention to his memory lapse and aired my suspicion that an outside party could be involved, they'd likely overreact and stop any further talk of reopening that planet.'

'You informed the right people. I've passed the concern on to Diggin, head of Sector Security. He's quite level-headed, as well as resourceful.'

'A matter of time then, I hope.'

Neuryzh responded with an ever so slight glow in his translucent dome -- the Utz equivalent of a smile.

The Utz upper lip is composed of a hard bony material, rather like a bird's beak, with the two ends turned up. While this makes it seem like a perpetual smile, it's impossible to assume any other shape. The top of the bony area which includes the nostrils are set between the two bulgy eyes, so large that they influence the shape of the head below the dome. The deep but mellow nature of the eyes, while adding to the pleasantness of the face, also tends to remain unchanged. That leaves the function of non-verbal facial communication exclusively to the dome.

The skin of Neuryzh's dome was smooth and translucent, but became rough at eye level, except for a tuft of feathers that encircled each ear hole. No one on Tok was ever sure if the bare rough skin on Neuryzh's neck was normal for an Utz, or if was the result of baldness, as there was never another Utz around to compare him to. At about his neckline, the rough skin gave way to fine plumage. What that became, yet further down, no one but the Utz ever knew, as that was covered by a coat that also resembled fine plumage. Like everything else Utz (such as the carrier), this seemed almost an extension of Neuryzh's being, as it changes colour whenever he willed it. The only thing that ever came out of the two slots near the front were clawed hands, resembling those of a bird.

Besides the aforementioned, there is one more unique feature: from below the Utz's ear tuft on either side, hangs a long tube-like appendage, to well below the neck. The Utz are capable of both speaking and hearing through these, thus, carrying on three conversations at once, or singing in trio.

After a pause, Neuryzh said through his mouth, 'Tell me about the young human you've brought home.'

'I don't know if I was wise to. He's totally primitive. He had never seen nor heard of space ships travelling to his planet -- only a vague understanding that his ancestors arrived from somewhere else. Even my metzig torch was new to him. Conventional wisdom says we mustn't disturb their lifestyle by intruding with our higher technology.'

'So, what prompted you to bring him?'

'He's obsessed with a legend regarding some message written on gold tablets. He had dreamt about it, and then an elder of his village apparently had a dream that young Eetoo was to go off in search of them, as they, apparently hold the key to knowledge that will complete their understanding of the way things are.'

'When did he have these dreams?'

'When he was young, but apparently, he only heard of the elder's dream a day before we met.'

'So, he heard his elder's dreams that he is to go in search of something not to be found on his planet, probably not knowing how he was to do that, and the next day, you showed up in your spaceship.'

'That's about the size of it.'

'Remarkable. Can you tell me the nature of the legend?'

'It's associated with an ancient name I've heard in the story of a planet that was destroyed by water. The man, Noka, built a water ship, into which he placed specimens of all life forms to be found on his planet, and was able to repopulate the planet after the water subsided. Then, he gave books to his three sons.'

'Yes. I've heard of that story as well. In fact, it was regarding the planet of humanity's birth, wasn't it?'

They were now approaching the outskirts of their village. The sun was setting behind them.

Neuryzh said, thoughtfully, 'It's remarkable that that story would be resurfacing now, of all times.'

He was quiet after that. It wasn't the sort of quietness that should be interrupted by more questions.

## 3

That mountain next to us sure is steep! I think that the tops must be crystal or something. It looks as though all the mountain tops are that way. When we came in from the sky, I could see shiny crooked lines running all over the planet.

The other evening, before Heptosh left, I could hear, like wind or something howling through the top of it. I think it was wind -- it didn't seem very windy though. But it sounded musical! The top was glowing different colours as the wind blew past it, and it was coming out in different sounds at once, as though someone were playing a giant pan flute through more than one pipe at a time. It looks a bit like panpipes up there.

Heptosh says someone lives there.

He's supposed to get back today. He said it would be about sunset, and he wants me to be at the house when he gets back, so here I am.

This house is a bit like the ones we saw in Kalodzuland. The Difference is that the downstairs part where he keeps horses and machines is open to the sky. On three sides, the upstairs rooms overhang into the middle bit, with windows where they can look down into the stable yard in the middle. On one side, there's a veranda. The downstairs bit under that is closed in, and has a tile floor. You still come into the house through a stable door, and then into the living area through the door of the downstairs room. In there, there are stairs to the upper floor.

Heptosh keeps his -- what do you call it -- his carrier in the stable. That's a bit like the scooter thing we rode in Kalodzuland, except it's bigger, and people can sit beside each other instead of one behind the other. He didn't take it with him this time. He said he was going with his neighbour to the spaceport, someone with a weird name -- 'Noorish' or something. He's gone to talk about Kalodzuland. Maybe some people can go and clean the place up, and other people can go to live there.

I think I see him now. There's a carrier coming up this way. Hardly anyone lives up this way except him and his neighbour, the one he went with.

It is him. I've never met his neighbour yet. That other one must be him.

He's awfully big! I've never seen anyone so big. I can't really make anything out.

Heptosh is getting off. He sees me, he waves, I wave back.

He waves at his neighbour. The carrier goes on to the side of the mountain. It's hard to tell how he's driving it.

I'm not sure exactly where the neighbour's house is. I don't see any houses near here. There's just the side of the mountain that looks as though it's made of those six sided pillars.

He goes up to the mountainside and the tall front of the carrier is flat against the pillars and -- wow! He's going straight up, as though the mountain were lifting it like a plate of food! I don't see anything holding it though.

I'm standing here watching the carrier go straight up.

'He's a nice chap.' It's Heptosh. 'I'll introduce you to him sometime.'

We turn to go into the house. I'm still turning back to see the thing going up, up, up.

'So, what did you do while I was gone -- besides minding your sheep?'

'I meet neighbours.'

'You did, did you? How did you find them?'

'I hear them playing. I go, they ask me in. I swim with them. They have bees sting little boy. I help smoke the bees, give them honey.'

He looks at me a moment, and says, 'The b'n Shammah boys? They're nice neighbours. I wouldn't get too close to them though. The Akkadis are hard to get along with sometimes.'

We go through the big door.

'Let's see what we can make for supper.'

I follow him into the downstairs room. That's his cooking and eating area.

So Heptosh doesn't like that Akkad? I thought they were pretty good to me though. They said Heptosh was a good man -- but they hate other Nefzedis.

Heptosh fixes preserved meat with some carrots on his stove, and puts it on the table. We sit and start eating.

* * *

Heptosh took the seat next to Eetoo.

'Push gently on the control stick'

The carrier lurched forward.

'I said, gently! Now, pull it back.'

'Er -- okay...'

They stopped rather more abruptly than was comfortable.

'Okay, let's start again; this time, a bit slower.'

Eetoo finally managed to get the carrier moving forward at a moderate pace.

'Now, at the road, you'll need to turn the craft to the left.'

Eetoo began turning -- right.

'No -- left! But not just yet...'

Eetoo overcompensated, and the carrier began to spin. Heptosh grabbed the stick.

'Here. Let me steady it first, then try again.'

After a few more tries, Eetoo was steering the carrier down the road.

'How the carrier float -- not on the ground?' asked Eetoo.

'The same way as ships lift off, by means of... -- a little to the left there -- no, not too much -- now to the right -- er...'

The carrier was beginning to swing wildly back and forth so Heptosh again put his hand out to steady it -- too late. The craft was spinning around and round and suddenly stopped with a thump.

They were sitting on their side, Heptosh near the ground and Eetoo hanging by his safety strap. Heptosh unfastened himself, then undid Eetoo's strap and helped him down. They climbed out of the ditch and walked around to view the damage.

'This will be a job for Rov, the tinker,' sighed Heptosh. And it will cost.

The inner working were showing through the broken seam.

'Well, to answer your question then,' said Heptosh, 'see that big wheel inside? It spins around very fast, creating its own gravity. At the same time, those fan blades near the centre force the air through this vent, which gives it thrust. When the body tips in either direction, the force of the air thrust drives it in the direction of the tilt, which it what sent it into the ditch just now.'

They began walking towards the market. Heptosh was still sighing. Eetoo had been silent since landing in the ditch.

'Can ride carrier find golden tablets?' he said suddenly.

Heptosh looked at him. Nothing about his expression showed that he understood the consequences and the expense of what had just happened.

'You have a lot to learn before you go off looking for those tablets -- a lot to learn.'

## 4

The sheep are okay. I think they're used to this place now. They'd have to go through this all over again if we moved back to Kalodzu-Famta.

I can see the top of the mountain from here -- the one the next door neighbour went up. I still don't see a house at the top, just crystal tops to the pillars. Where does he live?

People everywhere are so different.

Why doesn't Heptosh like the Akkadi? I wonder if his neighbour on the top of the mountain likes them or not.

I might visit them again. Maybe I just won't tell Heptosh about it.

Something's bothering the sheep. I'd better -- hold on -- that's Tsaphar! She's got Nakhan with her.

Tsaphar, out here?

'So this is what you do!' she says. 'I didn't know Mr. Heptosh had sheep!'

'They're mine,' I say.

'Where did you get them?'

Her Nephteshi is a lot better than Rav's and Shav's.

'I bring them from Kalodzu-Famta.'

Nakham is chasing one of the lambs. I'd better stop him.

'No! Stop!'

Tsaphar yells something at him in their language -- Akkadi, I guess. He stops.

'You're from Kalodzu-Famta?' she asks me.

'Yes.'

'Wow! What is it like there?'

'It's heavier there. It doesn't rain a lot like it does here, so I take the sheep far away. No ships, no -- er -- metzig torch, no -- ' I can't think of words for the fancy things they have and we don't.

'Oh look! Here's a tamarind tree. Let's get some tamarinds!'

I've never seen this kind of tree on Kalodzu-Famta.

She ties up her skirt and starts climbing. Nakham jumps on to a stump and up to a branch while Tsaphar catches hold of a branch and steps on a knot.

She's a bit taller than me. I think she's beginning to develop into womanhood.

I tie up my skirts and join them.

She shows me how to break the tamarinds open and eat them. They're really sour -- but nice.

'In Kalodzu-Famta, didn't they have some sort of war or something?' she asks.

I don't understand all the words she uses, but she talks slowly enough so I can get most of it.

'They fight bionics. Everyone die.'

'Everyone? You're still here.'

'No, no! Kalodzu people die. I Fa-tzi-zhi. We not know what happen in Kalodzuland. They stop coming.'

'What are bionics?'

'It's people. They put something in the skin and turn into machine. The soul, it die. Everyone, they turn into bionic. Cannot stop. Some, only arm turn bionic but heart not yet bionic, they know it's bad. They destroy finished bionics and kill them self.'

'That's horrible!'

'Heptosh, he go to see. His ship broken. He find me. I take him to Kalodzuland. We see, people, all dead. Bionics all broken. Only few bionics, but leader is good bionic. He give us ship.'

I've had my fill of tamarinds. I think they have too. We're getting down.

Nakham is going after one of the lambs again. Tsaphar is yelling at him.

Really, he's just a kid. I should let him play with the lamb. I go after it and catch it. It comes to me okay. As long as I'm holding it, it won't be scared of Nakham.

Nakham is delighted. So is Tsaphar.

The lamb seems to be warming up to him.

'Is Heptosh good to you?' asks Tsaphar.

'He, good. He bring me here, I need to find golden tablets.'

'Golden tablets?'

'We have writing on clay tablet, they copy from stone tablets. Old Man Too Dha, he keeper of the tablets. He teach me Nephteshi. The stone tablet, they say...' I tell her what the tablet says, the same as I did for Heptosh.

'That's an interesting story! It reminds me a bit of one I've heard from my grandmother. A man with three sons built a boat because the planet would be flooded.'

'Yes, Old Man Noka. He have three sons, I son of Ham-Tep. Old Man Too Dha have dream I am son that must go to find the golden tablets.'

'Wow!'

'I dream about golden tablets when I am a small boy. I dream I find them. Then, Old Man Too Dha tell me he dream I must go, but don't know how to go to other planet. The gods send Heptosh. Heptosh, he help me. He teach me drive carrier. Some day he teach me fly the ship.'

'Mr. Heptosh is very kind to you. I like him.'

Then, she tells me a story. 'My people also travelled a long way. My grandmother told me that our fathers rode animals from the land of their birth to trade in the kingdom of Nephtesh. On the way, they bought a slave boy, and sold him in another city along the way. Later, that slave became a great wise ruler, and shut the door so the Nephteshi could no longer return to that land. But when my people finally arrived in Nephtesh, they were also made slaves. They took us all to different planets. The one where they took my great-grandfather, Shammah to was so bad, they all escaped on a big ship. They made the ship go as fast as they could, but they couldn't make it relocate. It just kept going, like, really fast the regular way...'

'Linear propulsion?' I say.

'Wow! You know so much! Yeah, linear what-you-call-it. But it was so fast, it felt like only several months, but it really took about a thousand years. We were really going nowhere, and we would have starved to death, but the Tzozks found us and brought us to live here. That was about two hundred years ago, and they gave Av Shammah this land.'

'Akkadi don't like Nephteshi and Nefzedi?'

'Hah! You heard my brothers talking!'

'Rav, he hate doctor's son.'

'Yeah. Rav thinks he's big. Akkadi boys are that way. They're all talk, no action. Just wait. He'll lose interest in Zukra and start talking about some different girl. He'll never gather the courage to fight Tash. He'd get in too much trouble if he did. Ima will never let it happen.'

'Who's Ima?'

'That's "Mother" in Akkadi.'

'But Rav tell you what to do -- very strong.'

She sighs, 'Yeah. That's why I came here.'

Aw! I thought she came because of me!

'You're not like them. I can tell. Oh! Another reason I came -- can you teach me how to smoke a beehive?'

'I can. There's a beehive that way. Should wait first. New beehive, not much honey.'

'How long?'

'When beehive 15 days old. I think ten more days, this one lots of honey. Come back then?'

Nakham's having lots of fun with the lamb. They're jumping all over the place together.

Tsaphar has a hard time getting Nakham away.

They're gone.

I can't wait for her to come back.

## 5

Heptosh stood and watched as his pupil pressed the stylus into the pin-bed of the computer. Eetoo had managed to impress four characters so far that the computer could recognise, copied from the slate Heptosh had written for him.

'Gently! You're pressing down too hard.'

Eetoo obeyed. But the angle was wrong, so the computer didn't recognise the character. Eetoo tried to go over it again.

'No, Eetoo, you must delete it before you try it again. Remember how I told you? Press along the frame in the two points that correspond to the location.'

Eetoo tapped on the frame directly below the mistake and to the right. The wrong character got deleted. He went back to the space of the deleted character, but too quickly, so he got that one wrong. This time, it was too late for Heptosh to stop him, and he was pushing down hard on the pins as though to force the correction over the old impression.

Every time he made a mistake, he'd grunt, 'Uegh!'

'Stop! Stop! You're pressing way too hard! Here ...' Heptosh took the stylus and tapped on the two sides.

The pins failed to return to their 'up' position.

'I think you've destroyed some of the pins now. You have to be much more gentle! Take it more slowly. You only have to press the pin down so far, so that the switches on each side will make contact with those on the ones already down. If you press too hard, the sides bulge out so they won't fit back into their original position. Now, start again in this position. Carefully this time.'

Eetoo started again. He got two characters right, then, had to delete another. Again, he got the wrong coordinates, erased the wrong character. He went to rewrite that again, did it wrong, tapped the sides, only to delete another character again.

'Uegh! Uegh! Uegh!'

'You're doing it too fast, Eetoo. Look carefully where you tap -- Eetoo!...'

'Uegh! Uegh!'

Now he was pressing way too hard with the stylus again. Heptosh knew he had destroyed more pins.

Eetoo dropped the stylus and put his hands over his eyes in frustration.

Heptosh felt like doing the same.

'Why don't you take a rest. You've done enough practice for one day.'

## 6

Fa-tzi-zhi shepherd boy in his homespun tunic  
young Akkadi boy, unclad

together they sit on a rock   
surrounded by sheep, green grass, and the wood beyond

Nakham has been coming almost every day. The sheep are starting to warm up to him now. I wonder if he could help me take care of them sometimes? I'll see how he is with leading them into the corral.

Today's the day Tsaphar is supposed to come so I can teach her to smoke a beehive. I expect she'll have to finish her studies first -- probably not long now. I keep looking about for her.

There's a little brook that goes through the wooded area into the lake by their house. I lead the sheep there for a drink sometimes. I'll do that now to show Nakham.

We're there now. There's a small pool here where I sometimes go for a dip. I've already shown Nakham how to go about and make sure none of the sheep get lost in the woods. He's getting good at that.

The sheep drink. Nakham jumps into the pool just upstream. That frightens the sheep a bit. They settle down again.

I wouldn't mind going in myself, but not with all the sheep here. We'd better get them back to the pasture.

Here's Tsaphar.

'Hello, I followed the footprints.'

'Hi. We get sheep back to grass, then we go to beehive.'

We do that. Then, we go and get the poll, the string and other stuff I've prepared and take it along. I tie the branches to the end of the poll. We light the branches.

I'll let Tsaphar do it while I tell her what to do.

She's holding the poll up. I tell her not to get it too close at first, just under the beehive so the smoke goes up all over it.

'Move it here then there -- like that.' I pull the poll back and forth to show her. She's doing okay.

'That's enough now.'

We climb up to the branch where the beehive is hanging. She's a bit scared of it. I egg her on so she takes hold of the branch and breaks it off.

We jump down to the ground, and shake the sleeping bees off with a stick.

'Take it home?' I ask.

'No. Let's eat it here. Let's go to the pool where you watered the sheep.'

We go.

We're sitting about eating the honeycomb. There's a rock with a dent in the top that catches the honey. We pick up the honey with broad leaves rolled up like spoons.

'Don't tell my brothers I came here, okay?'

'Okay.'

'They think I'm visiting my friend, Rasha.'

She starts talking to Nakham. I think she's threatening him if he says anything.

'How do you talk in Akkadi?' I say.

'You want to learn Akkadi?'

'Yes.'

'Well, how about -- er -- shalem. That means "hello".'

'Shalem.'

'Shalem.'

I say it to Nakham. 'Shalem.'

He smiles and says, 'Shalem.'

We all laugh.

'What's "sheep" in Akkadi?' I ask.

One of them's followed us here.

'Bazon,' she says. 'Zeh bazon \-- that means "that's a sheep." If you want to say, "what's that?", you say "ma hazeh?" Say "ma hazeh?" I'll answer you.'

'Ma hazeh?'

'Zeh bazon.'

Now I'm pointing at everything and saying 'Ma hazeh?' and they're giving me the words for this and that. This is fun! We're having a great time.

Tsaphar's enjoying this.

Suddenly she remembers she has to get back.

They go.

## 7

Heptosh thought he had all he needed. He had bought salt and a few spices from one of the stalls, some extra power cells, a few parts for the carrier, a packet of spare hexagon switch-pins for the computer, some fish, fish sauce, other things only available at this market once a week -- what else?

His wife would have insisted he take along a slate with all the items listed. He had always thought his own memory was good enough to do without one. In the years since she passed on, he was beginning to think she had a point, but he still couldn't be bothered.

Coourzt beverage? He could see the stall operated by his neighbours. Rav and Shav were busy at it.

Better to get that from their shop in their own neighbourhood. Better price there, and less to carry home. But he might pause for a drink of one of their more special blends. Their stall was close enough to the green area to facilitate the customers that wanted to enjoy a drink at one of the stone tables.

The tables were of various sizes. Some tall, some low to the ground, some with seats for humans and other similarly shaped beings, some with perches. The perches went with the taller tables, but one or two of these had a combination of perches and seats, Some reachable by steps.

'Friend Heptosh!'

It was Neuryzh, perched at a tall table.

Heptosh ascended the steps to the seat next to him. There was enough room on the seat to set his basket down.

Rav and Shav were within calling distance. 'Rav! Bring me a cup of your manx herb mix!'

Rav gave him an affirmative wave, and went to work.

'Your human system of commerce brings a lot of life to the central town. Brilliant scheme! It gives us other beings incentive to get out once in a while, as we can always be sure of meeting a wide assortment of our acquaintances.' After nearly two centuries of human interaction on Tok, Neuryzh still treated it like a novelty.

Heptosh replied, 'For us humans, I'm never sure if it's a blessing or a curse. For you non-humans, you don't take it so seriously. You could live indefinitely on what you live on, but money and commerce -- for us, it's our life. It's our way up the social ladder.'

'True. I'm amazed at how much power it has over humans.'

Heptosh had had similar conversations about this on other occasions. Non-humans had such extensive memories that they were capable of maintaining a credit debit system inside their heads -- not based on any numerical values whatsoever, as humans thought of them. Humans needed gold and silver coins to count their value on.

'I've learned from you how to step back and get a broader view of things,' Heptosh said, 'but I'm sure you know that when the Toki government started the policy of giving all non-human visitors a gift of 100 gold pieces to spend and enjoy, some of us went bald tearing our hair out!'

'Has it not helped your economy?'

Shav brought a flask of coourzt. Heptosh thanked him.

'It has. I can see that in retrospect. I wish some of our other human communities could gain the same experience. I'm sure that taking things a bit less seriously would help no end in the issue regarding the Indigenous Nephteshi Federation.'

'How is that coming?'

'I've been asked to travel to Grogopti in a couple of weeks to meet with some of the rebel leaders from Imtep.'

'Since when has that been an issue for the Human Affairs Department?'

'Since he planet Imtep broke up into separate nation states co-existing on the same planet, thereby dissolving the planetary government. It's therefore a Human Affairs responsibility.'

From his high seat, Heptosh had a good view of the whole market. From here he could tell the economy was indeed doing well. As though to illustrate the point made earlier, one quarter of the shoppers were non-human. The human portion was an even mixture of dark coloured Nefzedis and the lighter Akkadis.

There was the slender reddish figure Fra the Tzozk in the distance towering over humans heads, holding a basket of his unusual assortment of goods. What would he be planning for his supper today? Salted fish with sugared cherries? Beans soaked in turpentine? He was slowly walking this way. He'd probably stop at the b'n Shammah coourzt stand before joining Heptosh and Neuryzh at their table.

Coourzt was the one consumable that humans and non-humans alike enjoyed. That fact was, no doubt, good for the b'n Shammah family business. They even profited from their sale of guruñdz, only palatable to non-humans.

But Rav didn't look too happy just now. He was shouting something at -- was that the son of Dr. Taknen? He only gave Rav a look and went on. Then Rav shouted again. Heptosh couldn't make out what he was saying. This time, the doctor's son turned, walked up to him and gave him a meaningful push. Shav came and stood with Rav, his fists ready for action.

Another Akkadi looking boy came and stood by them. It looked like trouble.

But there was their mother, Sharai b'n Shammah, making her way through the crowd, followed by her daughter and her youngest son. She simply took Rav by the ear and dragged him back to the stall. Heptosh could tell she was giving him a verbal beating. The son of Dr. Taknen simply turned and moved on.

Neuryzh broke the silence. 'How's the young human from Kalodzu-Famta?'

'He's a slow learner. Very frustrating. I've been trying to teach him the computer. He's never been taught to write, so that's one obstacle. His reading ability consists only of the ancient Hieroglyphics. As for numbers -- '

'Did his culture have no use for writing?'

'He was only taught to read so as to decipher their ancient texts, which are, of course, in Hieroglyphics. Actually, that's the only reason he knows Nephteshi to begin with. Apparently he spent a lot of time reading and memorising the texts, so he was able to pick up the spoken language. And Hieroglyphics don't lend themselves to writing, like our modern Nephteshi alphabet. Other than that, he seems pretty useless for anything but minding his sheep. How he's going to scour the galaxy for those tablets --'

'It will take time.'

'Also, he doesn't take care of things. He leaves dishes lying about, he threw out one of my finest dishes with the rubbish. He doesn't seem to have a sense of the value of things, like the computer, and the carrier. He ran that into the ditch while I was giving him a lesson, and seemed quite oblivious to the damage he caused. When doing lessons on the computer, he constantly presses down too hard on the writing surface. Some of the pins have gone bad, so I had to buy more.'

'Does he seem happy?'

'It's hard to tell what's going on inside his head. He spends a lot of time with his sheep. It's good to get him out of the house, at least, but even then, he's made friends with the neighbours. Namely, the b'n Shammah boys -- those idiots whose antics we've been witnessing for the past five minutes.'

'They brew good coourzt though.'

'That's the only good thing I can say. If it weren't for their mother, they'd be a band of scoundrels.'

'Couldn't that be said of anyone, without the input of a mother?'

'Hah! The Akkadi; if you offend one, you've made enemies of their whole clan! The working class on Nefzed was that way. That's why they moved like a herd towards taking bionic implants. I'd rather Eetoo stayed away from them altogether.'

'But they might be the kind of friends he needs.'

'What he needs is someone to teach him to think for himself, not as part of a herd.'

'Being from a tribal culture, that may be what he's used to already. Would it be wise to try to force him too soon into the mould of the Nefzedi individualist? He might break from too much stress. After all, individualism isn't a natural human trait. Even in cultures where it seems the norm, it requires consistent education to maintain.'

Heptosh thought for a while. 'You could be right.'

'I've heard good reports of Mrs. b'n Shammah. You indicated that he could use tutoring in numbers. Sharai could be a good teacher in the art of commerce.'

'The only complaint I have against against Akkadi women is they're surrounded by Akkadi men.'

'So, send a Famtizhi man among them and see what happens.'

'I'll do just that.'

Fra was approaching. He had ordered his cup from the b'n Shammah coourzt stall, and he stepped to a high bench next to Neuryzh and Heptosh.

A Tzozk's knees bend in the same directions as a human's, so they likewise sit with their bottom resting on a bench. That's about where their resemblance to humans ends, as each limb of their upper body has a shell along the outer side, with soft skin covering the portions that rests against the body. Their backs, shoulders and crowns are likewise of hard reddish shell, resembling that of a crab. However much of the lower body is covered by similar shell, is obscured by the flowing toga that is hung from one shoulder, and wrapped about the waist. Each section of shell that is visible, has a row of spines that looked as though they could be put to good advantage if they were to get into a fight. However, frequent fighting wasn't in the nature of the Tzozk.

'Friend Fra, what's new on the planet today?' said Neuryzh.

'We may be making room for half a dozen Groki in the near future.'

'Groki?' Heptosh failed to completely suppress the horror in his tone of voice.

'There's no tangible reason to forbid them. Galactic protocol states that we must receive them in moderate numbers if there is no foreseeable disruption to our life here.'

Neuryzh added, 'And, who's to say that it must necessarily turn out for the worst?'

'Nevertheless, I'm not happy,' said Fra.

'What's their reason for coming?' asked Heptosh.

'Business interests, they say. That could mean anything. Galactic protocol also requires us to accept that as a reason, lacking any evidence of intent of malice.'

'Of course, the reason for protocol is our tendency to automatically suspect such things, isn't it?' observed Neuryzh.

'The Groki are distant cousins of the Utz,' said Fra. 'What would you expect, Friend Neuryzh?'

'Because the Groki are far more numerous than the Utz -- well just look at me! There can't be room for too many people of my size can there! -- I've known more Groki than I have my fellows. We do tend to live longer, so I have known several generations of Groki. They have changed over the centuries. I've known some remarkably pleasant and outgoing Groki of previous generations. I have no doubt that some might remain, although I have yet to meet them. Again, I'm prevented by galactic protocol from giving in to any cynicism regarding the matter.'

'I think that's about as close to being cynical as I've ever heard you,' said Fra.

A couple Sozks made their way to the table, one with a cup of guruñdz, the other, coourzt. As these reptilians didn't tend to converse in Nephteshi, and their conversation was as likely to be compatible to his human interests as the guruñdz was to his body, Heptosh decided to take his leave.

## 8

the shepherd leads the sheep  
his young companion follows

Now Nakham teaches me new words every time he comes. I've learned to say, 'drink', 'lead', 'walk' and 'run'. I think I know almost as much Akkadi now as he does Nephteshi. Just talking makes us better friends.

Tsaphar comes now and then. She teaches me other words that Nakham doesn't think of. Sometimes we can talk. I can understand them if they talk slowly.

Yesterday was the only day in a long time they both stayed away. Nakham is here now. He said, 'Ha shuk'. I think that's the word Tsaphar told me means 'market', so I guess they must have gone to the big market in town. Usually it's Tsaphar who goes every market day while Nakham stays with me.

We're leading the sheep to the water.

Heptosh says he's been to ask Tsaphar's mother to teach me numbers. I'll be starting in a couple days. I guess that means I'll get to go to their house every day.

I'd kind of like that. I enjoy talking to Tsaphar.

We're coming to the pool.

There's Tsaphar now, sitting there with her head in her hands.

'Shalem!' I say.

'Shalem,' she says back. She doesn't seem her usual self.

The sheep are drinking. Nakham is minding them now. I sit beside Tsaphar.

'You go to market yesterday?'

'Yeah. I had a horrible time. Rav made a fool of himself again. Rav -- he ...' she doesn't finish.

'What Rav do?'

'First, he almost got into a fight with Tash. Then he starts talking to his friend Tsim, then he starts -- Oi! I don't want to talk about it. He's such an idiot! So is Tsim!'

I wonder what that's all about. I don't get a chance to ask.

'Eetoo, tell me more about the tablets your Old Man Too Dha keeps.'

I've told her some of the stories from them already -- such as the story of Red Earth, the first human, and how he and his wife ate a fruit they weren't supposed to eat. This time, I'll tell her song of the seven ages. I say it as I remember it:

In the beginning, Elkhem made space and matter.

But all matter was dense blackness, and formless. And the breath of Elkhem brooded over the the face of the deep blackness.

Elkhem said, "Let there be energy",

And the denseness explode into moving particles, and light filled the universe.

Elkhem then said, "let the light be separated from dark space,"

So the energy filled particles gravitated towards each other and interacted,

And the universe was separated into places where day reigned, and places where night reigned.

Then came the eve of the age, and the second age dawned.

The Elkhem said, let the particles form units and join to become gases in the midst of liquid ...

I finish reciting the whole seven ages, all the way to the present age, which is the age of rest.

'That's a neat song,' Tsaphar says. 'When you tell me those stories, you remind me of my grandmother. She prayed only to the god she called "Yah". All my other relatives and even my father kept all the other gods, but she kept only a small statue of a bull on her altar. She told me some of the same stories about her god that you recite about "Elkhem". I think we still have that bull statue. And "Red Earth", in Akkadi, we have a word that means both "red" and "earth". That's "Adam". She told the stories using the name "Adam".'

'The Fa-tzi-zhi they sometimes worship the spirits,' I say. 'They say people who build Kalodzu-Famta bring spirits from Red Earth and put them to protect, so people from other villages they pray to spirits of Red Earth. Some villages they have priest, but in our village, Old Man Too Dha keep tablets instead. He say we should worship only one god, Elkhem. The seven laws also say. Some villages, they travel to our village on holidays and listen to Old Man Too Dha read.'

'Your Nephteshi is perfect when you tell me the stories, but when we talk about other things, you're hardly better than my brothers.'

'I memorise the stories for many years. I never talk Nephteshi until I meet Heptosh, so I not remember little words to make talking beautiful.'

'You've memorised all the writing on the stone tablets, haven't you.'

'Not all. I know all the stories.'

'When you find the gold tablets, you can tell me the rest of the story.'

'I don't know when I will find them.'

'Just keep believing. I think you will.'

We're quiet for a while.

'Maybe you could teach me Fa-tzi-zhi sometime.'

'I can teach you -- and I take you to to Kalodzu-Famta.'

'Yes. We could live there -- the two of us.'

'Yes -- and ...'

She's looking sad again.

'Oh, I only wish...' She's quiet again.

Suddenly she gets up.

'I'd better go now.'

She's off.

the maiden departs, followed by her young brother  
night falls, morning dawns

We're on our way to Tsaphar's house now for my lessons. Heptosh goes by the main road, not through the woods. It's farther this way, but I guess the flat road is easier than some of the rocks I have to climb over. I'm dressed in some clothes Heptosh gave me. I have to wear a cloth about my middle fastened at the waste, and then, what he calls a toga over my shoulders.

Anyway, here we are. Heptosh knocks at the door. Tsaphar answers.

She still doesn't look happy, but she's sort of glad to see me.

Their courtyard is full of big tubs of something. There's some sort of contraption with a fire burning under a pot, and pipes leading out of it to another pot. There's a pile of branches with black berries over in one corner. There's a big basket next to it with just the berries. It smells like the coourzt drink, but real strong.

They have a side room on the ground floor, the same as Heptosh's house. We go in.

This one isn't a kitchen. It has tables and lots of tablets, slates and some really thin stuff with writing on it. It's so thin you can roll it up like cloth. I've seen some of that at Heptosh's house. There's also a couple of computers.

Tsaphar's mother is there. She looks like a strong woman. If she's going to teach me, I'd better stay on her good side.

'Hello, Eetoo,' she says. 'I heard how you got rid of the beehive by our lake.'

She's being nice to me now. Teachers always are at first.

'Come and sit here near Tsaphar.'

I see a slate there, and some sort of contraption with wires stretched across it, and beads strung on them.

Heptosh goes home and I'm sitting in front of the bead thing. They call it an 'abacus'.

She writes the numbers across the top of the slate, and tells me to copy them. Each time I write a number, I have to slide one bead across the wire and count how many beads there are on that side.

Tsaphar is working quietly at something on a slate. Her mother has gone out somewhere.

I'm saying, '3' as I write it; I slide a bead, and say, '1 - 2 - 3'; write '4', say '4', slide another bead and say, '1 - 2 - 3 - 4', and so on.

Sometimes we take a break.

'Didn't you use numbers in Fa-tzi-zhi?' asks Tsaphar.

'Only up to three for most things,' I say. '"Three" also means "lots" in our language.'

'Wow! Don't you need to count higher sometimes?'

'Sometimes. Then, we say 'hands' and 'fingers', but not very often -- mostly when talking about cycles around the sun, or years. I'm two hands and three fingers in age. Next birthday, I'll be three hand less one finger.'

'How about for counting your sheep?'

'I can recognise each one, so I can always know when one is missing. We also have a word that means "two hands and two fingers" when we trade for things like bread and eggs.'

'Dozen?'

'I guess.'

We get back to work.

I've gone through the numbers a few times, so I'm about half way down the slate.

Shav comes in.

'Hello, Eetoo. You come for lessons, yes?'

'Yes.'

'Good! You come every day, yes?'

'I think so.'

'Good! Go to swim after work. Tsaphar come too, ah? -- er -- if Rav not here.'

'Where's Nakham?' I ask.

'-- er -- outside, maybe.'

'Maybe with your sheep,' says Tsaphar.

'He know I come here?'

'I don't think we told him,' says Tsaphar.

'It's okay, maybe,' I say. 'They know him now.'

'I think you teach Nakham to be shepherd!' says Shav.

'That's okay,' answers Tsaphar. 'We'll teach Eetoo to be coourzt seller!'

We're talking and laughing away. Suddenly Rav comes in with another boy.

Shav and Tsaphar suddenly go all quiet. Tsaphar goes back to her work, looking as though she's concentrating on something. Shav goes off to another part of the room. He talks to them in Akkadi.

Rav sees me. 'Hello Eetoo. This, my good friend, Tsim.'

Tsim looks at me and waves. Then he looks at Tsaphar. He starts to walk towards her.

She suddenly gets up and goes around the table the other way and walks towards the door.

Rav stands in her way. They start yelling at each other in Akkadi.

Their mother comes in. She gives Rav a look. He stands aside and lets Tsaphar pass. Tsaphar stomps out into the courtyard.

Rav and Tsim are quiet after that. Shav goes off somewhere.

Their mum comes over and looks at what I've done. She seems pleased, and tells me to finish the whole slate.

Everything's quiet. I finish. Tsaphar still hasn't come back. Rav and Tsim are still hanging about. Shav is outside working with the coourzt stuff.

Mrs. b'n Shammah says that's enough for the day. Shav is finished as well, but he's not talking a lot.

I'll just go home the back way.

I'm walking through the woods towards the pasture. There's one of my sheep!

What's it doing here? It looks lost.

I call it. It comes to me.

I'm leading it back to the grass area. There's another one!

We get to the grassy place. There's Nakham running about trying to chase the sheep back to the corral. He's got a few in, but the rest of them are still all over the place.

I call the sheep, and they start coming back.

'Ma?' I say to Nakham. I think that's the word for 'What?'

He starts talking away in Akkadi. He's crying. I think he must have tried to lead them to the water, or something, because he said, '(something-something) mayim'. That means 'water'.

We lead the ones there into the corral.

I tell him, 'Let's go,' and we go to look for the rest of them. I can say that much now.

We finally get them all back again, and he's okay again. He goes home.

## 9

Heptosh disembarked onto the open air landing pad and greeted the representatives who stood by to greet him. Among them was Amanhep, their president.

Grogopti was a natural planet lacking the subterranean infrastructure of the man-made ones, so the parts of the city that he could see from this vantage point, summed it all up. It consisted of white ornately carved stone buildings. The biggest one with the dome, not far from the space port, was the senatorial forum.

'Welcome to Memthos,' said Amanhep. That's what the residents had named their planet, but to the sector, it retained the ancient name of 'Grogopti'.

Heptosh made all the appropriate gestures and body language and accompanied them on the walk to the forum.

There was still time to kill, as some of the delegates hadn't arrived yet. Amanhep went to greet some of the other arrivals while one of the representatives took a seat with Heptosh in the inner circle of the great hall. He introduced himself as Sheknan from the planet Raksha.

'I'm sure you are aware of the situation on Imtep,' said Sheknan.

'I understand they've broken up into smaller states. There is still a state of war between some of them and the former planetary government. Those with an ethnic Nephteshi majority have appealed to the Federation of Indigenous Nephteshis of Noofrish. Your federation has accepted them, thereby raising the issue to the sector level; thus, my involvement. Perhaps you can fill me in on the rest.'

'Indeed. How well do you know Lord Staktekus?'

'Only by name. He was the ruler of the planetary administration, was he not?'

'"Ruler" would be the correct word. A ruler in the traditional sense, autocratic, giving no leeway. The Nephteshi populations, knowing that there is a federation in which all Nephteshi populations are treated as equals, where each has a voice in common affairs, decided to be rid of the old fashion imperial ways of Lord Staktekus.'

'So, the federation, though Nephteshi in name, differs in nature from the interstellar empire of the same name,' observed Heptosh.

'We've modelled ourselves after the galactic sector councils.,' agreed Sheknan.

They were interrupted by the arrival of Amanhep, accompanied by some of the new arrivals.

'Mr. Heptosh, I'd like you to meet Thimtep and Nekhesh, both leaders of their break-away states on Imtep.'

Heptosh stood up and greeted them.

Thimtep said, 'I must apologise for our lateness. The facilities for our spacecraft is inadequate, being that the central space port for our planet has been rendered off limits to us.'

'Extremely uncalled for!' said Nekhesh. 'The tyrant, Staktekus still considers himself emperor of the planet. We had to take off from a muddy field!'

'It is, after all, sector protocol that the planetary space port be accessible to all populations of a planet,' said Amanhep. 'That's one of the issues we must address.'

The meeting convened and Heptosh listen to more of their grievances. He agreed to assist in setting up negotiations between some of the rebel leaders and Lord Staktekus. There was a meal afterwards, during which Heptosh engaged in personal chats with various of the delegates, including Amanhep.

He gained a far different impression of Amanhep here than he had from the brief encounters at meetings of the Department of Human Affairs.

'All I want is to see the Nephteshi populations on Imtep being given a chance,' Amanhep said in his ear as Heptosh took his leave. 'I hope you can help us in that.'

## 10

the pupil presses the stylus into the flat clay  
forming wedge upon wedge, wedge next to wedge

wedges pointing up, wedges pointing down  
yet others pointing every which way

forming obscure pictures representing words  
and sounds for phonetic expressions

he makes a mistake, scrapes the clay flat  
and begins again

They say that Akkadis on other planets use the new Nephteshi alphabet now, but the computers were originally made for the wedge-like pictographs, so the Akkadis on Tok still use it.

How long have I been coming here now? I've been doing it every days but market days, and on their once a week rest days. I can count; now she has me adding up whole lots of numbers, and subtracting. Then it's these Akkadi pictographs and phonetic sounds. That seems to help me with speaking it too, because I'm learning new words, and I'm more sure of the sounds.

Sometimes Tsaphar's up and sometimes she's down. She usually sits with me, and we talk, but today, she's quiet. I don't know what's making her moody.

I've finished again for the day. Shav had said he'd go swimming afterwards. I might join him.

I go out through the courtyard. Rav and Tsim are standing about.

Rav calls me over .

'You know Tsim,' he said. 'He engaged to Tsaphar's now. I make promise to him. Tsaphar belong to him, so you not talk to Tsaphar again.'

Tsim says, 'If she talks to you, you just keep quiet. I'm a good fighter. I can kill you with my fingers.' He snaps his fingers close to my face.

They turn and walk out of the courtyard. I watch them until they get to the road.

Tsaphar's going to marry him? Why didn't she tell me this was going on?

I'd better go home. I'll go the back way by the lake.

I'm not feeling good. I'm shaking!

He said he made a promise to Tsim. What about Tsaphar? What did she have to say about it?

In the Fa-tzi-zhi villages, the elders usually decide who marries who, but sometimes the kids have a say themselves. If the girl doesn't get to choose, then neither does the boy. If the boy or girl feel they can't live with the way their parents choose, they don't have to go through with it. They just try again.

Was this all Rav's and Tsim's idea? Tsaphar sure hasn't been happy. She calls both of them idiots!

I'm feeling really down now. I don't know why.

Someone's running behind me. It's Shav. He takes my arm.

'Come! We go swimming.'

I'll go with him.

We take off our clothes and jump in.

I haven't said anything. He notices.

'Tsim, he do big favour for Rav. Rav, he do favour back.'

'But, Tsaphar, she not want it.'

'I know.'

'You want it?'

'I don't know. I'm her twin. She not happy -- I not happy, but I cannot stand in way of Rav.'

'Your mother want it?'

'She say she not have to marry him.'

'Then why Rav say?'

'Rav eldest son. Our father, he die. Way of our fathers: if father die, oldest son can say.'

'But your mother --'

'If Tsaphar stay with Ima, no problem. If no, Tsim take her away, like that. Akkadi community not help, because it's way of our fathers.'

'What can she do? She have to stay with mother until she die?'

'Can you fight?'

'Huh?'

'Way of fathers -- if she not love Tsim, you can fight Tsim.'

'Tsim too big.'

'He good fighter too -- but -- I think Tsaphar love you.'

She loves me.

That's why all this is making me feel so down! I love her too!

I feel like I've lost something, but I only know now what it is I've lost.

## 11

Heptosh wasn't sure if Eetoo was ready for this, but he'd try anyway. After they had departed from the atmosphere of Tok, he sat him down at the controls and gave him basic instructions.

The first lessons in piloting a ship were always in linear propulsion. Logical relocation was an advanced skill. He'd need his maths for that. Whether Eetoo was up to the more basic skills of linear navigation was another question again.

His first try at driving a carrier had got him into the ditch. Here, at least, there were no ditches; nothing to make him panic.

Eetoo was probably doing okay for starters -- he eventually succeeded in orbiting the planet -- but his mind seemed to be somewhere else.

That would be all for now. Heptosh took over the controls and engaged the logical relocator to get them to the planet Imtep. He would officiate at the initial meeting between Amanhep and Lord Staktekus. He had been laying the groundwork for this on previous trips.

Imtep was a man-made planet, similar to Kalodzu-Famta. Eetoo should enjoy the familiarity of the landscape.

Heptosh located the ship within the solar system, and did observations to detect the position of the planets. He got a location on Imtep, and relocated once more to within the moon's orbit. Then he began to simulate linear movement until they touched the atmosphere. They orbited until they were over the central space port. Then, he switched to linear propulsion and began the descent, while signalling the port authority.

He received the all clear signal before he reached critical elevation, so he was free to continue descent.

* * *

Heptosh was neither surprised nor offended that Lord Staktekus and Amanhep weren't among the delegation of bureaucrats that waited to receive them. Neither would want to appear over-eager about the negotiations. In fact, he expected them to arrive fashionably late.

After he introduced Eetoo, one of the attendants offered to take the boy on a tour of the city while the negotiations were on. Heptosh thought that would be good for him. He would see, first hand, what a well maintained planetary infrastructure looked like as opposed to the city-cum-cave they had explored in Kalodzu-land.

The space port was very much like the one they took off from in Kalodzu-Famta, though better equipped. The landscape outside was similar, except it was a bustling city on the ground surface, not a wasteland.

Eetoo and his escort went in one direction while Heptosh followed the retinue to a lift, which descended into the lower subterranean areas. On leaving the lift, they boarded a carrier, which sped them along a wide passage that seemed to serve as a commercial section, then into a dark tunnel.

Heptosh calculated about ten furlongs, then the carrier came out into an open, well lit area, circular, probably three furlongs in diameter, with a high ceiling. Around the perimeter were markets, open air offices and rest areas, lush with plants and shrubs. There were more passages leading off in other directions. The area beyond the markets was occupied by slow moving carriers and scooters, all going in the same direction around the circle. Some of the light shown through an intermittent ring of skylights forming a concentric circle within the wider area. From each skylight there flowed a broad stream of water which fell into a pool in a matching formation on the floor. Each pool was rimmed with vegetation. The pools and skylights formed a ring about a round multi story structure in the middle whose top was embedded in the ceiling, like a pillar. All of the carrier traffic moved in the same direction in a circle around the ring of pools.

Their carrier took a spiral course, moving gradually towards the central ring of pools, took a turn between two of them and then went straight to the centre structure. There, they alighted and went in.

A lift took them up several stories, where they entered a round room lit by local sunlight through a crystal domed ceiling. The walls came up to shoulder level, so Heptosh could see that around the dome, outside, was a giant circular arrangement of pools, islands and covered walkways. He could detect the skylights in areas where the water level came just up to their rims. A formation of fountains shot outward from near the crystal dome towards each pool containing a skylight, probably pumping the water from the pools he saw underground, thus keeping the upper pools at just the right level to maintain the waterfalls.

Heptosh's escorts asked him to sit down in one of the soft seats that formed a circle in the middle of the room. Now, he was alone. He made use of his time by looking over his notes.

Heptosh had been to this planet several times before, first, meeting with a few of the regional rebel leaders accompanied by Amanhep, and then he had gone himself to meet with Lord Staktekus. After a few trips he had finally prevailed on the latter to open a dialogue with Amanhep. That would take place today, in this room.

The coggle horn sounded, indicating the entrance of somebody important. Heptosh turned around, and then arose to greet Lord Staktekus. His retinue remained near the entrance of the lift while His Lordship entered the circle of soft chairs.

Heptosh made the appropriate greeting and took a pose that indicated respect.

'Welcome to Imtep. I trust you find the amenities to your liking. Mr. Amanhep hasn't arrived yet, has he?'

'Apparently not,' Heptosh observed.

'What a pity. I had hoped that he would appreciate what we have to gain.' He went on to sound as though it were he who had envisioned the peace process, rather than the one who had to be convinced.

Heptosh played along, making polite comments, until Lord Staktekus put his head close to his and said, almost in a whisper, 'It's a pity, regarding Mr. Amanhep...'

'I'm sorry. Come again?'

'I understand he is a very ambitious man, that he is consolidating immense power among his Federation of Indigenous Nephteshi Planets.'

'On, no, Sir. I'm sure you have been misinformed.'

'I hope so. I truly hope so. I only wish for peace on this planet, even if we must coexist as separate states, but it's what I've heard so far about Amanhep that causes me to hesitate.'

'Have you ever met him yourself?'

'No.'

'I'm sure that once you get to know him yourself, you find him open and transparent. He, like yourself, only wants peace for his fellow Nephteshis.'

'I hope you're right.'

Again, the coggle horn sounded. Amanhep had arrived.

The two greeted one another, but took seats on opposite sides of the circle, too far apart for normal conversation. It was up to Heptosh to go to one, sit, and talk for a while, and then relay the gist of the understanding to the other. Sometimes they would be pacing back and forth, sometimes standing outside the circle looking out the crystal dome. Heptosh had to keep this up until he finally edged them closer together, within conversing distance.

That was the way of shuttle diplomacy.

* * *

the visiting pupil's eyes widen  
as yet a new sight offers its strangeness and beauty

the guide utters statistics and historical trivia  
but the pupil's eyes tell him more than his ears

I'm glad to see open air again. The underground parts are nicer here than in Kalodzuland, but I'd still rather be outside. The bits above ground look much more built up too, even more than on Tok.

The man is telling me a lot, but I can hardly understand a word he says. I just nod and act agreeable.

We're in a place that has lots of food. There's some sort of meat hanging here, like some sort of sausage or something. I don't like the smell.

The man's talking to the seller and -- Oh no! Now he's handing me a piece!

I'm not sure about this, but I'd better try it.

It's okay, I guess. I wouldn't want to eat much more of it, though.

Now he's asking me something. Maybe he's asking how I liked it. I nod my head and smile.

Oh, the gods! Now he's getting me another piece! But I'm sure I'd offend him if I don't take it.

I eat it quickly.

Well, there's that over with. He's asking me something again. I'd better act like I'm full. I put my hand on my tummy and smile. He understands.

I burp. I'm sure I'll be sick in my stomach.

Now he's getting me a drink from another stall, something bluish. I hope... -- Okay, it looks better than the meat -- smells better.

I try it. It's sort of nice, a bit alcoholic. At least it's settling my stomach.

We're getting back on the carrier again. I hope this will be over soon.

* * *

Heptosh finally took his leave.

The meeting went as one would expect a preliminary session to go. Once he had them speaking directly to one another, Lord Staktekus appeared to respond favourably to Amanhep's candid nature, though he did have pointed questions. They agreed to have more talks. That's all he could do for now.

Heptosh found Eetoo waiting for him at the space port along with the attendant who had shown him around. They walked to the spaceship.

The fact of Eetoo's presence reminded Heptosh he needed to pay a visit to Shan and talk to him further about the possibility of repopulating the former Kalodzu jurisdiction. While they were there, he could give Eetoo practice navigating the ship close to familiar territory.

They lifted off from the space port using linear propulsion, switched to linear simulation and then Heptosh entered the coordinates for Kalodzu-Famta's solar system.

He made sure Eetoo was aware of each step in the process. It would be a long time before he would do it himself, but he needed to familiarise himself.

As they made their descent to the Kalodzu space port, he sent a signal and received one in return.

They descended the rest of the way, and Heptosh aimed the ship for the door in the side of the brick mountain.

He wondered if Shan would recognise his own ship. The Heknosh clan still hadn't completed repairs on his own ship. Complications, they said.

Heptosh and Eetoo stepped out. Shan met them at the ship.

Before they said anything, Shan said in a low tone, 'Mr. Heptosh, I must inform you that, shortly after your previous visit, the bionic control circuit that I told you of, was -- ' he stopped in mid sentence and started again in a louder tone: 'Welcome to Kalodzu-Famta. Please step into the reception area.'

Heptosh had to think fast. 'There's not time for that, I'm afraid. I've only come to deliver a quick message. I've informed the powers-that-be of the situation of Kalodzu-Famta, and discussions are underway. We will inform you of any developments. Thank you. We must be going.'

'I'm sorry, I cannot authorise such a hasty departure. Please step this way.'

'Eetoo, get in, quick!'

Heptosh spun around and got in himself, but the bionic had grabbed Eetoo's arm.

In a move that surprised even Heptosh, Eetoo caught hold of the bionic's other arm and twisted it so that it was forced to release its grip on Eetoo. He then gave a push that sent Shan sprawling on the floor.

Heptosh could just hear Shan saying, 'Good move, Eetoo. Now you must hurry and -- STOP! YOU ARE FORBIDDEN TO...'

Eetoo jumped into the ship. Heptosh shut the door, and quickly entered the coordinates for somewhere outside the solar system. They were gone in a flash.

'How did you do that?' Heptosh queried.

'I learn from Mo Paw. He teach -- er -- fight.'

'Wrestling?'

'I don't know.'

Whatever it was, it looked like an automatic response.

Heptosh entered the coordinates for Tok. This was definitely something the Sector Council needed to be informed about. Whatever it was, was now actively controlling Shan through his most fundamental command level.

But apparently, it hadn't succeeded in reversing the bio-media upload.

## 12

the tops of the crystal peaks, sending their brilliant rainbow colours  
announce that sunrise lies but beyond the planet's curve

the humans in the valley prepare for their journey

Today is market day again. I get to go with the b'n Shammah family to the town to sell coourzt.

Learning to pilot the ship the other day was fun. It gave me an idea. I'll say something to Tsaphar and see what she thinks.

They're in front of the house, piling the things into their carrier. There are about four big tanks of coourzt. I think each one is made a little bit different so people choose which one they want to buy. There's also a dispensing machine, and a big box of cups.

Rav is there. I hope I can get a chance to talk to Tsaphar without him about.

I help Shav carry the last tank onto the carrier. We get on. Mrs. b'n Shammah, Tsaphar and Nakham sit in the front. Mrs. b'n Shammah drives. We big boys sit in the back on the gate that holds all the stuff inside.

Nakham looks handsome in a tunic. This is the first time I've ever seen him wearing anything.

We're off. It's barely light now.

This is the same way we took to get on the spaceship. We turn a different way when we get into town. Today, there are a lot of carriers and scooters also going into town as well. A lot of them look as though they're going in to sell things, like us.

We arrive. Shav says they have this space reserved for them every week. It's by the green area, where people can sit and drink it after they buy it.

We're taking the things off the carrier at their spot. Other people are setting up their stalls for selling. The sun is just coming up. Rav is going to drive the carrier to keep it somewhere else.

This'll be my chance to talk to Tsaphar.

Rav drives off. I have to help Shav move things about. The tanks all go behind the dispenser. The box of cups lies on its side and serves as a counter where people can give us money and we give them the cup of coourzt. There's also a bucket to wash the cups in. Tsaphar and Nakham are going to fetch some water.

I'll go with them.

'Shalem.'

'Hi Eetoo.'

We don't say much until we reach the reservoir on the other side of the green area.

'Did Rav and Tsim talk to you?' she asks.

'Yes. But I know a way.'

'No. Tsim is too big for you. He's a fighter.'

'No. I have different way. Heptosh, he teach me to pilot ship. I take you to Kalodzu-Famta. We live there.'

'But you don't have a ship.'

'But we go. I take Heptosh's ship. Heptosh come and get ship after we go. We live in Kalodzu-Famta. Not need ship.'

'But what about the golden tablets?'

The tablets? I haven't thought about those for a long time. I guess I've sort of given up on that.

'I don't know,' I say. 'I can't find golden tablets. I think I just ...'

'No. I won't let you do it. You have a mission to complete.'

'But -- how?'

'The gods will show you -- the god Elkhem, Yah. You never left your planet, nor even saw a spaceship before, but your teacher had a dream, and suddenly, Mr. Heptosh showed up in his spaceship. It'll happen again. Just wait till the time is right.'

'But -- Tsim. I not let you marry Tsim!'

'I'll never marry Tsim. Even if he forces me, I'll make his life so miserable he'll wish he never saw me.'

'But you not be happy.'

'I know. I'll never be happy. I love you, Eetoo. I do. But you must complete your mission.'

She leans over and kisses me! Then she turns quickly the other way. I think she's crying.

I fill the bucket.

Tsaphar turns around again. 'Hurry, let's get back before Rav gets here -- with Tsim!'

We're back at the coourzt stand, doing our different jobs, pretending each other don't exist. Sure enough, here comes Rav and Tsim.

Tsaphar is staying very close to her mother. Her mother is glaring at Tsim.

'Shalem, Ima b'n Shammah,' says Tsim with a silly smile.

She doesn't answer.

We've got everything set up. People are starting to arrive. Hardly anyone comes to our stand yet. They say we'll get more of our business in middle of the morning when people have done their shopping and need to rest, and then again at noon. Some people will just buy something to drink in the green area, and some will bring along big flasks to fill up and take home.

Some of them are the other creatures that live here. Most of them are bigger than human people.

There's one that looks taller than any man I've ever seen. He's a lot thinner too. He's eyes take up his whole forehead, so there's no room for any hair. The top of his head looks like a crab shell. He's also got shell covering his shoulders and the upper parts of his arms, as though he were a shellfish or something. Each section of shell has a row of spines. The rest of him is covered with a long skirt fastened with a wide leather girdle with lots of pockets.

Shav sees me looking. 'That's Fra. He the president of Tok. And over there,' he points the other way, 'That's your neighbour. He name Neuryzh.'

I see something big that walks like a chicken, but doesn't really look like one apart from its legs, and maybe its mouth. It's wearing a robe of some sort. All I see above that is a dome with eyes half way up it, and something that could be a nose -- or a beak if it were longer. The skin looks a bit scaly, except for top of the dome, which is white, and looks as though you could see through it if there were light on the other side. He's buying something from someone. I see a claw-like hands coming out of the robe, almost like a bird's. The top of the dome looks almost as though it's glowing -- probably reflecting the sun.

There are other creatures too. Some look like Fra, and others look a bit like frogs or lizards. Mostly, they're taller than humans, but some are smaller.

Shav shows me the tanks. 'This tank have guruñdz.'

'Huh?'

'Guruñdz. Some non-human people drink, we sell. Human people, they buy only coourzt. This tank here, plain coourzt; this one, coourzt with manx herb; that one, mint and cocoa-bean; that over there, with raspberry. These here, bottles of wine and whiskey. Some like to mix.'

The creature he called 'Fra' is coming by. He stops at our table.

'What will you have today, sir?' says Shav.

'Nothing right now,' he says. He doesn't sound human at all, but I understand him clearly. 'I thought you would like to know that a transport ship is on its way down with about nine passengers -- new arrivals to Tok. It would be good if you met them with a couple of trays of your coourzt beverage. The planet administration will pay you for what you give them.'

'Yes sir,' Shav says. Fra walks away.

'Ima!' Shav shouts.

Mrs. b'n Shammah comes. Shav starts talking to her in Akkadi, too fast for me to hear.

She calls Rav, and starts telling him things in Akkadi. It looks as though he doesn't want to do whatever it is she's telling him to do. They argue for a while. Shav says something else. I hear him say my name.

They look at me.

'Eetoo,' says Mrs. b'n Shammah. 'Would you like to go to the spaceport with Shav? You will be giving each of the new arrivals a cup of our best coourzt -- special request of the planet administration.'

I'm off with Shav. We're each carrying a tray full of big cups. We take a shortcut. It's really quite close.

I've been to the spaceport twice before this, once when I first came here, and again, just yesterday. It's a giant round building with a big gate. The roof opens up so ships can land on it, and the people get off and go down steps to a big room below. Then, they come out a door through the front room, and that's where we are standing with the coourzt, waiting for them. Some of the other creatures are waiting too. One is carrying a big tray of little bags of something. Fra is also hanging about. Shav and I are standing where we'll be the first ones they meet.

There's someone coming out now.

Shave tells me, 'That's a Sozk.'

It looks a bit like a lizard. Shav holds out his tray. It takes a cup and says something I can't understand. It doesn't even sound like a language.

Another thing comes along. It takes a cup and says, 'Thank you,' in Nephteshi.

Here comes another one that walks like a chicken. It looks like the one I saw today, but smaller -- more the size of a human.

'Look out,' says Shav. 'That's a Groki.'

He holds out his tray as it passes.

It looks at us, and says, 'Humans!' and walks right on without taking a cup.

It takes one of the bags from the other creature though. Now it's talking to Fra.

The others come out. There's another Groki that sort of looks at us funny first, then takes a cup.

Most of them take a cup. They're all out of the landing area now. Some of them are still hanging about, talking to the other creatures.

Shav says we should go around to them all and maybe they'll take seconds.

I see the Groki thing that didn't take a cup when he passed. Maybe he'll take one now.

I go to him, but he looks as though he's ignoring me. He's talking to another creature, making sounds that don't sound like a language at all -- something like: 'Ftttvurreughn ñnrododadedidfrup.'

He's finished talking to that creature, and now he's heading for the big door.

I follow him with the tray.

Just before he goes out the door, he looks at me, and -- there's a flash of light -- from his head!

I'm dizzy! Ooo -- that light's the most horrible thing -- oh, my head! The pain! All sorts of unimaginably evil things flying through my mind -- like I'm dying -- descending into hell! I'm going to vomit!

I fall over. The cups tumble all over the floor.

'Next time, I'll simply zap you dead like a fly!' he says.

Some other creatures come running. One of them says, 'If you please, Mr. Blazz, we do have rules on this planet against molesting the local humans without just cause.'

'Oh, do you really now? "Just cause", you say? I'm sure one will find "just cause" if one looks hard enough; but as you wish --' His voice is fading out. I think he's going out the door.

The creature that spoke to it is bending over me now. I can see it's Fra.

'How are you son? Can you stand up?'

I try to stand up. There are still ugly pictures going through my head that make me want to vomit, or die.

'I'm sorry this happened. You're the new human aren't you? Friend Neuryzh, won't you help this boy?'

There's the other creature I saw, also with the dome head, but much bigger.

I'm terrified of dome heads now.

Fra is saying to Shav, 'The planet will reimburse you for the lost coourzt beverage, and the broken cups...'

This thing -- it's taking me in its claws -- rather gently, actually -- and its dome lights up. But suddenly all the ugly images melt away. It's doing the opposite of what the other one's dome did to me. I feel peaceful!

I can stand up now. It takes me by the hand and we walk out the big door. My head still hurts a bit. I'm a bit dizzy.

'I believe you are my new neighbour, are you not?' he says.

I'm not sure. I guess Shav did say this was the one who lived next to us.

'You live with Friend Heptosh, don't you?' he says.

I nod my head.

'You may have heard of me. My name is Nueryzh. Friend Heptosh has told me about you. I'll take you home.'

We reach the coourzt stall.

Neuryzh tells Mrs. b'n Shammah, 'Friend Eetoo has had an unfortunate experience with one of the new arrivals, a Groki, I believe. If you have no objection, I will take him home. He needs a rest.'

Tsaphar is looking at me, looking worried.

It's okay with Mrs. b'n Shammah.

He takes me slowly to the place where they keep the vehicles. We come to a carrier \-- it's the same one I saw Heptosh come in that other time.

We get in. It starts without Nueryzh doing anything. It seems to drive itself.

'I control this vehicle through mental power,' he explains. 'That's a capacity humans don't have.'

We go along for a while.

'Do you enjoy living on Tok?'

'Yes,' I say.

'What do you like about it?'

'-- er -- I -- it's so different.'

'The landscape is different isn't it.'

'Yes.'

'Your planet, I believe, is one of the man made planets.'

'I guess.'

'I admired the Nephteshi civilisation very much for their achievements. They built many planets scattered all over this galaxy. But Tok is a natural planet. I think the planet where humanity was born was also a natural planet, was it not?'

'I don't know. I don't know where it is.'

'I'm not absolutely sure myself, but I'm sure it's a natural planet with many beautiful and unique features. Planets that give birth always are.'

We're quiet for a while.

'This planet gave birth to the Tzozks. I think you've met Friend Fra. He's the one who helped you after that terrible incident. Even though many kinds of creatures live on this planet, we honour the Tzozks by asking them to make the final decisions. They are quite capable administrators, Fra especially so.'

I feel good when he talks to me like that.

'What else do you like about Tok?'

I don't know what to answer. I think about Tsaphar.

'Do you enjoy the family you were with in the market?'

I nod my head.

'They are good people.'

Good?

'But Rav, he try to make Tsaphar get married,' I say.

'Ahh. And I suppose she doesn't desire it, does she?'

'No.'

'That happens sometimes in an Akkadi family. But perhaps there will be a happy solution.'

After a while, he says, 'Who knows? Perhaps you will be part of the solution.'

Does he really think so? Tsaphar didn't.

'But I must find golden tablets.'

'Yes, you must. That is your mission.'

Now we're getting close to the edge of the mountains where Heptosh's house is. I feel a lot better now.

'Why don't you come up to my abode for a visit?' he says.

'Okay.'

The carrier goes right up to the mountain and starts going straight up the side, the same as I saw it do the other time.

I look down. It's almost like being in the spaceship with Heptosh.

I see the edge of the rock in front of me -- the big vertical beams that look like computer pins, long things with six sides, all stuck together. The higher we go, the smoother the edges are. They were rather rough down below, like granite rock. Here, it's getting more like crystal.

Now, we're almost at the top. I can almost see through the rock. I still don't see a house though.

'Here we are.'

In front of us there's an opening in the crystal rock beams. The carrier slides in.

Neuryzh gets up, and I follow him.

Now, I see. The whole top of the mountain is a house. We go into a sort of cave made of the vertical crystal beams. It's a bit hard for me to walk though.

'I'm afraid this house isn't well suited to humans. You may have to spend time climbing over things.'

He steps gracefully on the pointed tops of the beams like a bird stepping on branches. They're just right for his feet.

It's very bright in here with the sun shining down through the crystal, but it's nice and cool.

'Where do you sleep?' I ask.

'Right here. We Utzes don't lie down to sleep in the way humans do. We perch, like this.'

He's perched, like a bird, on a couple of pointed tops.

'Climb over to there. It's a seat I've built for human visitors.'

I see a seat carved out of the top of a beam. I climb over to it and sit down.

There are things all over the room that are hard for me to tell what they are. A lot of them are made of crystal. There are some big cloth, or skin things, that look as though they must be his clothes. They're hanging over one of the beams.

'I wanted to show you this,' he says. He's holding a big round crystal thing, like a bubble.

'What is it?'

'It is -- now, listen very carefully, your tongue and ears aren't used to Utz words -- it's a borunñnvotzp.'

'Huh?'

'A borunñnvotzp. won't be able to pronounce it correctly with your human tongue. There are even sounds in the word your ears can't hear. It's best if you pronounce the middle part of the word, "nñn", by rubbing your tongue back and forth across the roof of your mouth. Try saying it: borunñnvotzp.'

'Ba-roo-nya-vots,' I say.

'I suppose that's about as close as you'll come. However if you said that in Utz conversation, it would be thought amusing, as what you said means something far different.'

'But, what is it?'

He sets it on the pointed top of one of the beams, and it stays there, balanced.

'You humans have art, sculpture and writing. You've probably seen different kinds of it, as you've now met people from several cultures.'

I have. Heptosh has lots of pictures and statues in his house. The b'n Shammah family do too, but they're a bit different. In my village, we like to decorate the wood about the doors of our houses. We cut the wood with a knife and rub rose petals and coloured rock on it. People decorate their spirit altars like that too. I like to draw pictures in sand, or on a slate.

'Apart from singing, the Utz have only one art form. We spend many years making our borunñnvotzp. I've had this one for a hundred years now. Every once in a while, when I feel creative, I add more to it. '

'But I don't see anything.'

'Only another Utz or a similar creature can fully appreciate a borunñnvotzp, but I can show you parts of it. Look straight at it. I'll direct some light into it.'

He reaches up to the roof and I see there's some bits of the crystal that's on hinges that he can turn this way and that. Suddenly a beam of light goes straight down to the crystal bubble.

I look at it and colours start coming out. There's sound too, music, some like I've never heard before, but some of it is just like what I thought was the wind blowing through the top of the mountain. That must have been him, then. There are pictures but they're moving. There's things dancing out in middle of the room all about the bubble. I've never seen anything like it!

I start to see lots of different creatures, like they're different from each other, and some look as though they're so different, they couldn't possibly appreciate one another, or even be together, but there's something that makes them want to be near each other. There's a big thing, like a monster, being good to something very tiny. Then, suddenly the tiny thing helps the big thing in a way the monster never thought of before -- like I would have never thought the tiny thing could help the big one, but it does, in a real way -- the monster's not just pretending to appreciate it either, but it's really helping. There's lots of things like that. The music makes me think about that too, even though I can't hear any words.

Neuryzh says, 'I'm going to show a story through the borunñnvotzp. I want you to tell me the story as you see it, but I want you to tell me in your native language.'

'In Fa-tzi-zhi?'

'Yes.'

'But you don't know Fa-tzi-zhi!'

'I will when we're finished.'

I start seeing people doing things. I tell him what I see in Fa-tzi-zhi. It's a nice story, about a boy and a girl -- human ones. They go somewhere. I'm telling the story to him. I'm really into it, so I forget that I'm telling him. The boy talks. He's not speaking Fa-tzi-zhi, but somehow I know what he's saying, and what the girl is saying. I'm saying it in Fa-tzi-zhi.

There's a bad thing that he's fighting. He's protecting the girl. The thing is getting him down. It's going to kill him, but he knows he has to protect the girl. Suddenly the girl gets up and does something totally unexpected. That chases the bad thing away.

They start to dance. There's music. No one's singing, but the music means something. I know what it means, and I'm telling Nueryzh what it is in Fa-tzi-zhi. It's beautiful things about people needing each other and helping one another in ways only they can. There's another song about how everything that has life is beautiful and precious.

The boy and girl meet people that only love things they can get. The boy and girl are trying to show people that there's something better than those things, and that's each other. The people don't want to listen. Suddenly, I see the bad thing the boy was fighting before, but it's using the people who won't listen. It's using their desire for power and riches, to fight the boy and girl. They boy and girl are fighting the thing, but at the same time, the song is going on and telling them to be careful not to fight the people, but the bad thing that is using them. They know they have to get something that will help them.

As I'm watching, I feel as though I'm that boy. They have to get something, like golden plates -- the ones I have to find. I look at the girl again.

It's Tsaphar!

I shout. It's like I'm waking up from a dream.

'It - it's me and Tsaphar!'

'Yes. I've been creating the story as you've been watching it. The story of you, Tsaphar and the golden plates is now a part of my borunñnvotzp.'

He's talking -- in Fa-tzi-zhi!

'You -- you talk like a ...'

'Yes. I've been learning your language as you speak it. Utzes have that capacity. Now, you can explain things to me like you couldn't before.'

'Wow!'

'Now, there's just one word I didn't hear. I'm wondering if we have it in our language.'

'What word?'

'In Nephteshi, they say, thank you. How would we say that in Fa-tzi-zhi?'

' -- er -- I don't know!'

'It's a word we need to express how valuable another person is to us. When someone does something for you, you can say in Nephteshi, thank you, or if you're speaking in Akkadi, toda. Perhaps in Fa-tzi-zhi, we can use a substitute word, such as, "you are kind". Practice saying it every time someone does something for you, even a small thing. Saying it will bring you closer to that person.'

'Okay.'

I look at him. He's just looking at me -- oh, I get it!

'You are kind,' I say.`

His head begins to glow a bit. I think that's the way he smiles. 'You, also are kind to show me about yourself. I've also learned many things today -- not only your language.'

I think he means it.

'When you speak to Elkhem, the One who has sent you on your mission, say it to Him also, because He has also been very kind to you.'

The sun is starting to set. The beams from the sun are showing rainbow colours all over the room. It's really beautiful.

I'm thinking about all he's been telling me, and showing me in that 'ber-unya-whatever'.

Then it's time to go home. He takes me down in the carrier, and we go to Heptosh's house.

## 13

Heptosh sat down at the table. Already seated (or perched) were Varasha, head of the Human Affairs Department with a couple of her staff, Diggin the Tzozk, head of Sector Security, along with Neuryzh and Fra as advisers. Takanen, an elderly member of the Nefzedi community was also present as an authority on some of the matters to be discussed.

Varasha opened the meeting: 'Thank you, all of you, for coming. I was disturbed by the report Heptosh gave me, and I thought the rest of the sector should be informed. I'll simply let Heptosh introduce the subject and tell you what he told me. Heptosh?'

Heptosh began relating the details of his meeting with Shan. He referred them to what Shan had said earlier regarding the bionic control circuit, and then related that to Shan's brief comments he had been able to make despite being controlled by the external force.

Varasha again took the floor. 'The question I want us to try to answer is, who could be controlling the bionics on Kalodzu-Famta?'

Diggin said, 'Apart from Kalodzu-Famta, there have been no reports of any bionic activity in our sector. I had only heard of them existing elsewhere.'

'They were quite numerous in the Ziern Sector, I understand,' said Neuryzh.

'I would start by asking the question, what is the source of bionic technology?' said Fra. 'Is it a human invention?'

Varasha said, 'Heptosh, maybe now would be a good time to introduce your friend.'

'Thank you. Mr. Takanen was a historian while in Nefzed. He was also well up on current affairs there at the time of our evacuation.'

'Can you shed any light on the question, Mr. Takanen?' asked Varasha.

'I'll start by telling you what I don't know,' began Takanen. 'I've racked my memory, as well as those of older surviving Nefzedis before they passed on, and I've checked all sources that are available, and there's no hint as who first introduced bionic replication to Nefzed. Several well known people had taken an implant about the same time. One was a senator's wife, another a designer of fashions, there were a couple of storytellers and actors, one a comedian, among others. Of course, none are available to ask, though I'm sure their bionic counterparts are still moving about. If someone wishes to risk their life in returning to Nefzed to ask them, I'm sure that would be helpful. I understand that there were also bionics on some of the other human planets in the sector. Some of them were facing the same problems as we -- namely, that they didn't perceive it as a problem, but as a thing for everyone to do. As to the question of which planet had it first; that, I also don't know.

'I don't think bionics were a human invention,' he went on. 'The designing of synthetic substance that can replicate the functions of living D.N.A. is something far beyond the capacity of any human technology past or present. The fact that the designers were also able to insert additional programming that could alter the mindset of the resulting bionic creature, and at the same time, retain the original human memory, psychology and cultural orientation, is a further mark of something far beyond human ability. The embedded ambition to reproduce itself in other humans to the destruction of the original human's soul, while deceiving us into thinking otherwise, puts it in the realm of something anti human.'

Diggin said, 'The Nephteshi empire was quite advanced though. The building of planets and the discovery of logical relocation reflects some surprisingly high level research and thought.'

Takanen answered, 'I'm as in the dark as anyone as to the origins of the Nephteshi civilisation. However, I have heard it suggested that even Logical Relocation technology didn't originate with us. Whoever designed the system that interprets our digital coordinates into the analogue signals that the reverse beam carries into hyperspace, must have had profound intuition of the dynamics of that dimension. I'm inclined to think that early humans learned of it from a visiting Utz or a Tzozk.'

Fra spoke up: 'The Groki were rather numerous in the Ziern Sector -- a majority, I understand. They're beginning to gain a noticeable presence in our own sector.'

'I wouldn't want to jump to any conclusions regarding the Groki,' said Diggin. 'Knowing their temperament, it would be a disaster in inter-sector relations to bring an accusation without extensive evidence to back it up.'

Varasha decided to sum it all up. 'What we do know is that bionic technology is anti-human in its intent and application. We also know that it was introduced to Kalodzu-Famta. Now, we know that whoever introduced it there is now taking control of some of its creations, probably for malicious intent. The purpose of this meeting is to bring this to the attention of the sector, and to plead for assistance in this matter.'

Diggin responded: 'Plea noted. Thank you also, Mr. Takanen, for your input. I will bring this to the attention of the sector president as well as the appropriate department heads. What the bionics have apparently been designed to do is certainly not in the interest of the sector. However, in the meantime, please do all in your power to glean more information. We will do the same.'

Neuryzh added, 'There are other human populations still living on Kalodzu-Famta, are there not? The Fa-tzi-zhi, for example?'

'You mean the "Famtizhi"?' said Varasha.

'Yes. They call themselves the "Fa-tzi-zhi" as they don't end their syllables in consonants. Should we not make an attempt to ensure their safety against the bionic presence in the Kalodzu area?'

Varasha said, 'Yes. Perhaps, Mr. Heptosh, you could make another trip there sometime to see how things are with the Famtizhi people.'

'I'm not worried about the Fa-tzi-zhi. I'm told that bionics can't adapt to other cultures, so the tribal nature of the Fa-tzi-zhi society is their protection. Also, I'm all scheduled up with trips and negotiating sessions for the next two months.'

'Put it on your calender for the next available time slot, at least.'

So, it was decided.

## 14

sellers extolling the qualities of their wares create a cacophony   
with loud counter offers by prospective buyers

with percussion -- cleavers on chopping blocks  
grinding cartwheels against a rocky road

the melody of loud salutations by long unseen friends  
the harmony of laughing and weeping children blend further with the monotonous drone of gossip

against this background, there is heard the actual singing and piping of a minstrel

then there's the symphony of smell   
pungent spice mixes, fish, both fresh and fermented  
salted and sweetened meats, preserved fruits

and the unmistakable aroma of coourzt berry ...

This is the only chance I get to talk to Tsaphar -- market days. Rav hangs about too much at the house, so Tsaphar has to do her own thing while I'm having my lessons. Sometimes Tsim's there too. Then, she can't leave the house to visit me, or Tsim might be waiting to kidnap her.

Neuryzh thinks we have a future together. I don't know where he gets that idea. I liked the dream he made me though. It's made me think a lot. Ever since looking at his berunya-thing, I find myself thinking more about other people and how they're doing, and not just about my own problems.

Heptosh has been nicer to me since I started saying 'thank you' to him for things. When I said 'Toda' to Ima b'n Shammah she laughed, but she was nicer to me after that.

So, I'm here, helping Shav sell coourzt. I've learned how to pour and mix what the customer asks for. It's sort of fun. We've talked about this and that, but we don't talk too much in case one of them show up.

Now, Rav is here. Tsaphar was saying something to me, but she pretends she was saying it to Shav. We go all quiet.

'Eetoo,' he's calling me. 'Come. We go watch fight.'

A fight?

'Tsim, he a champion. Come and watch.' He's the only one in the family who talks to me only in Nephteshi -- as if I still didn't know a word of Akkadi.

Shav says he can watch the stall himself. I'm off with Rav.

Why does he want me to go watch Tsim fighting?

We walk past a lot of stalls. One is selling power cells and metzig torches, another, parts for some machines, that one's selling hand tools.

Some of the stalls over this way are for people to win prizes for playing games. Someone's trying to throw a ball at some bottles.

That must be the place up ahead. It looks a bit like the wrestling ring they set up for our tournaments back home. There's lots of people crowded about.

There's already a fight going on -- but they're not wrestling the same way we do. They're hitting each other. They're both naked except for a small strip of cloth wrapped about their waist and their groin -- to keep their 'thing' from flopping all over the place.

They're really going at it! One of them is already bleeding at the nose, but the other one is going at him as though he's gone completely wild or something.

The one with the bleeding nose is running out of strength. He can't even concentrate any more. The other punches him in the face.

He's down. A man comes in and checks. Then, he holds the winner's hand up. Everyone's cheering.

'Tsim fight him next week. He win today, then he fight Tsof for championship.'

Some people carry the loser off the ring. The other one, Tsof I guess, walks off real proud looking.

The official looking man is saying something in Akkadi. It's too fast for me to hear, but I catch the names, 'Tsim' and 'Shin'.

'Just watch,' says Rav. 'He just do a "one," and a "two" and punch him out!'

Tsim and the other one named Shin walk into the ring stark naked, both holding a piece of cloth. They stand, facing each other, and they each throw their piece of cloth at the other's feet. They each pick up the one the other threw, and tie it about their waste and their groin.

The official gives the signal and they're going at it.

Tsim is really a good fighter. He's pounding away at him. He uses his fist, and his elbow, now he's kicking. Usually, he punches once with his left hand, and just as the other thinks that was it, he follows it with the right -- must be his 'one, two' punch.

The other one runs at him and buts him with his head.

That was a bad move. Tsim grabs him by his waist and turns him upside down. Now he's got him on the ground and he's kicking him like a wild man. But Shin rolls over and gets up. Now they're on each other's level, going at it again.

There, he did it again, the 'one, two' punch.

There don't seem to be any rules to this. But they're not using any of the moves I learned from Mo Paw. I'm sure if one of them knew some of them, they'd win very quickly -- if they did it fast enough not to get hit, that is. I mean, Tsim's arm is pretty powerful!

They're still going at it. I think they're more evenly matched than the other two.

Finally, it's over. They say Tsim won, but it's hard to tell. We go back to the stall. I'm back with Shav.

'Like the fight?'

'I don't know.'

Rav's gone again.

'I think I know why Rav take you. He want you to see how strong Tsim is. He afraid Tsaphar love you.'

'Why have to fight for a wife? Why Tsaphar not choose herself?'

'The way of the fathers,' says Shav.

'In Fa-tzi-zhi village we not trade woman like animal. When someone want to marry, they ask her first.'

'This not Fa-tzi-zhi village. This civilised planet.'

He doesn't sound very happy. I guess I don't either.

We just work away, selling drinks, not talking much to each other.

* * *

Heptosh was doing a quick one today. He just needed to buy a few things and then go on to a meeting with Amenhep and Lord Staktekus in the pavilion. Negotiations had come a long way, but Lord Staktekus seemed to be holding out on a few key issues. He also held a couple of trumps which, though they wouldn't gain him absolute power, could enable him to make life very difficult for all those sharing his planet.

However, he had been softening, and both Amenhep and Heptosh thought that a bit of hospitality might be in order. Amenhep had brought him on a visit to Tok. They were to meet on the South border of the market area where they would sit in a pavilion overlooking one of the more pleasant parts of the city.

Besides some choice pastries for the affair, Heptosh also needed a few household goods that weren't available at the village. He was in front of a stall which specialised in brushes. He needed a vacuum brush, as well as a bottle brush, good for cleaning the bottoms of wine jars and coourzt flasks. He had found a bottle brush, but vacuum brushes seemed to be in short supply. The one in stock wasn't to his satisfaction.

Perhaps he would try again next week. He paid for the bottle brush.

There was someone watching him -- he didn't know how he knew. Heptosh looked around, but didn't see anyone but people going about their own business.

He began walking slowly towards the South end.

'Mr. Heptosh, chief negotiator of humans, I believe.'

The words stunned him in a way they shouldn't have.

He looked around, and there he was.

Why he hadn't seen him before, was rather puzzling. A Groki body should have stood out quite plainly in midst of a crowd of humans.

'How can I help you?' was the diplomatic response.

'I doubt if you could be of any help at all, human.'

'What do you want of me then?'

'Only looking on with interest.'

People were passing by, taking no notice of the Groki whatsoever. Heptosh realised that the Groki's dome was emitting a low range beam, one that rendered him unnoticeable. That's why Heptosh hadn't spotted him at first. His greeting had also been accompanied by a light of a different sort, which was what had stunned him.

'So, what do you find so interesting?' enquired Heptosh.

'How much energy a human can expend towards lost causes.'

'I'm sorry, come again?'

'Your endeavour to remove your Nefzedi community to Kalodzu-Famta...'

Heptosh started, but couldn't deny that that had been a deep down motivation.

'...your vain attempt to educate a primitive of the same planet, and even now you're on your way to try to stop the humans of Imtep from doing what they do best. Yes, prize specimens of humanity, those.'

They were walking slowly in the direction of the South end, making the right turns as though the Groki knew where he was going. Heptosh was sure he'd been discreet regarding the whole affair.

'How do you learn of these things?'

'Aha! You forget, I'm a Groki; you are but a human. There are ways of knowing things that are lost on you; levels of wisdom that Groki and other species enjoy, which humanity could only dream of when they were in unity -- when they were at one with themselves. You lost that oneness with the fall of your empire. Their Lordships Staktekus and Amenhep dream of such human empires, and fine emperors they would make, indeed. But you would quell the rise of the human species by subjugating them to your Department of Human Affairs.'

'But, Amenhep...'

'Hah! You are so sadly mistaken regarding Amenhep. He's already made a comfortable place for himself on his former Groki planet.'

'Groki planet?'

'Grogopti: a human planet with a Groki name. What does that tell you? It has a history which they cleverly hide from themselves by renaming it "Memthos". History always catches up, you know. And this "president" of the Federation of Indigenous Nephteshis, where every human enjoys equality -- indeed! He'll be Grand Pharaoh of the revived Nephteshi Empire if ever he has his way -- not that humanity has enough days left over for such a rise. And, do you want to know what's really holding them up with the repairs on your ship's relocator? Ah -- but we near your destination. There are your two Pharaohs, waiting for you in the pavilion, and here's Alzuzt the Sozk, waiting for me.'

The reptilian creature greeted the Groki, but largely ignored Heptosh as they walked off in the opposite direction.

That was just as well for Heptosh. He needed to regain his composure before his meeting with the two would-be emperors.

## 15

as the day grows old, fewer people look for bargains  
more seek relaxation

thus the demand for coourzt beverage, served in individual portions   
and the stone tables in the nearby green

It's been busy, but Ima and Tsaphar are helping now. Shav has been in a better mood since lunch time.

Here comes Neuryzh and Fra. They each ask for a drink.

Neuryzh asks Ima, 'Friend Eetoo looks as though he's had a long days work. Can he join us in the green area?'

Ima says it's okay. They take an extra cup for me. Shav waves as I go.

These seats are awfully high. I have to climb steps to get to mine. Neuryzh just steps on to a perch. Fra is tall enough to sit down in a regular bench without climbing.

Another creature comes along with a drink. His face looks like a lizard's. He doesn't talk in Nephteshi like Neuryzh and Fra do. I can't even see him moving his mouth when he talks, only his throat vibrating and moving in and out.

Neuryzh says to me, 'Eetoo, put this next to your ear.' He hands me something -- I don't know what it is, but it hangs from the side of his head. It looks like some sort of tentacle, or what a goat has under its chin, but longer and it's got something at the end. He's got one on either side of his head.

There's sound coming out from it. 'I'll translate for you using one of my extra vocal organs.' It's the sound of Neuryzh talking Fa-tzi-zhi!

But he's still talking to Fra and the other one. To them, he's saying, 'Fttttzzueurinzyghopfppppttq'

Through the vocal thing, I hear, 'What's the news from your half of the planet, Friend Zhunzugt?'

That must be the one with the lizard face. He says, 'Tszjudznu ñuñttttppzt.'

Through the vocal thing, I hear, 'More trouble between the human populations.'

'What is it now?'

'The Akkadi community in Zorrorog City claim that the Nefzedis have reduced their livelihood through their style of dress. They've popularised the flax togas, thereby making the woollen tunics obsolete. One of the Nefzedi, on being blamed for the losses, publicly insulted an Akkadi shepherd. The whole sheep herding community took offence and resorted to violence. Now, the Nefzedi, though they usually don't retaliate collectively, have taken to banding together for common protection.'

'The news has reached here as well,' says Fra. 'Some local Akkadi have been talking, but no one has taken any action yet.'

'I understand the Akkadis in these parts don't raise sheep,' says Zhunzugt.

'I know of one who does,' says Neuryzh.

'Whatever the case, I think it was a mistake to start allowing human populations to ... Oh, I hope you're not translating all this for your human friend?'

'Don't worry about him,' says Neuryzh. 'He's neither Akkadi nor Nefzedi. In fact, he lives with a prominent Nefzedi gentleman and he's training a young Akkadi to be a sheep herder, aren't you?'

'Huh?' I say.

'I've watched you a couple of times from my mountain top home. The young lad seems to be doing well at it.'

Zhunzugt says, 'Perhaps we could use more like him!'

A couple more creatures are walking up to the table. Oh! The gods! One of them is that creature that flashed its dome at me!

Neuryzh says, 'Good day to you. Won't you join us?'

Fra says, 'Greetings, Blazz, and you too, Friend Alzuzt.'

The one he called Alzuzt also has a lizard's face.

I think the one who flashed at me is named Blazz. He looks at me and says something. It must have been bad, because Neuryzh didn't translate it.

'You can speak the Nefteshi language, I trust, Friend Blazz?' says Neuryzh. 'If not, I can offer you a brain to brain download of the language.'

'Oh, my Nefteshi is just about perfect,' he says in Nefteshi. 'I've spent more time than I care to remember among the humans of the Zoozh sector. A troublesome lot they were indeed!'

'Perhaps you two would care for a drink?' says Fra. 'Some coourzt? The stall yonder has some of the best.'

Alzuzt says he wants a coourzt.

'I think I'd prefer guruñdz,' says Blazz. 'Much better for you than coourzt. I'll get one for our human friend as well. How about it young human?'

Fra and Zhunzugt both jump almost out of their skins.

'No!' says Fra. 'That's not for human consumption. Eetoo, don't ever attempt to drink guruñdz. It's toxic to the human system.'

Zhunzugt is also saying something, not looking happy about it.

'That's right,' says Neuryzh, 'not for humans.'

I get the point.

Neuryzh calls to Shav and asks him to bring one coourzt and one guruñdz.

But Blazz goes on in Nephteshi, 'But one must admit that guruñdz has its uses. Besides being a tasty beverage for Groki and other like species, it's really quite effective as a pesticide. I'm sure it would be useful in resolving some of the problems on Tok.'

Fra is saying something to him, but Neuryzh doesn't translate it.

'Oh no!' answers Blazz. 'I wouldn't think of leaving our human friend out of the conversation! That would be bad etiquette! But you know, it's a fact: Wherever humans have gone, rats, cockroaches and other vermin have always followed. Those three species seem to be adaptable to every sort of climate and condition.'

Shav brings two cups. He won't go near Blazz, but hands them up to me. I set them in middle of the table. I'm not afraid of him now -- not the way these others are protecting me.

'Oh! You're too kind!' says Blazz. Then he goes on: 'Moreover, it's a known fact that cockroaches are as much lower in intelligence than rats as rats are to humans and humans are to Groki and Sozks. Isn't that so Alzuzt?'

Alzuzt says something. Neuryzh doesn't translate it.

Fra speaks up: 'And so, Mr. Blazz, where exactly do you draw the line between what's an intelligent creature, and what's vermin -- if in fact there is to be a line drawn?'

'I should think that would be obvious!'

'Perhaps, to someone as much more intelligent than the Groki as the Groki is to the human, the answer might not be so obvious, Mr. Blazz.'

'Thus spoken by the administrator of the planet! Mr. Fra, I've heard of some of the problems resulting from the human infestation.'

Alzuzt and Zhunzugt both say something. It looks as though they agree with Blazz. Neuryzh doesn't translate it.

Fra says, 'Yes, we may have our problems, but we also boast some fine specimens of humanity.'

'Good fine humans. Yes. I know. I've seen some seemingly peace loving human communities in my time. The problem is, they invariably give birth to a generation of bad ones. A happy stable community now; in one short celestial age what have you? The happier they are, the more spoiled their brats, who will grow into the monsters of tomorrow. '

Fra gives off a loud sigh that sounds almost human. Blazz looks around at everyone like he's pleased with himself -- I guess; his face doesn't show expressions. Fra starts to say something, but Blazz gets in first:

'There is one exception: primitive tribes -- societies such as our young specimen here once belonged to, but has left -- who teach their young to be afraid of their own shadows and reject anything foreign. They'll remain docile indefinitely, even remaining compatible with the natural environment, as long as they don't succumb to outside influences, as again, our present specimen has. As for you, young human, you've learned too much of the universe outside your natural habitat to ever be happy there again. I know. I've had plenty of experience with humans. But, your time is coming.'

'Time?' I say.

'Yes, young human. Your time is coming. And, Mr. Fra, when that time does comes, nothing your administration can do will be of any help in preserving the human menace. It would be contrary to galactic protocol!'

Things are a bit quiet now. Neuryzh tries to say something to get a conversation going again, but it doesn't get very far. Fra also tries. One by one, people finish their drink and go.

I see the b'n Shammah family packing up all their things to go.

Ima say I can go with Neuryzh.

the shadows are long - the sun is low

the young human pupil and his utz mentor   
make their way through what's left of the market

here, they wait while sellers move a large object into a waiting carrier   
there, they make a detour

the utz flashes his dome to passers-by  
they return the greeting as humans do

they reach the parking lot  
carts and carriers in countless rows

the utz's carrier, as though with a mind of its own  
glides towards them and stops to let them on

they board - they're off

I ask Neuryzh, 'What was he talking about? Why did he say our time is coming?'

'Every species in the universe has a home where they were birthed. The law of the universe is that every species has the right to exist so long as their home planet remains habitable. Now, what Blazz was referring to -- there is something I heard a long time ago. I began pondering it again just recently...'

He's quiet for a long time.

'What?' I say finally.

'The home planet of humanity has a time limit. The Groki understanding is that the planet will be destroyed some time soon. If that happens, humans will no longer have the right to exist. At least, anyone who wishes to be the final executioner, must not be prevented, by universal law, from doing so. My understanding is that the Groki intend to be that executioner. They have a profound sense of justice, and their experience of humanity has been a most unpleasant one. However -- '

He's gone quiet again.

'However, what?'

'However, the Groki understanding may not be complete. There are other answers to be found. I think it all has to do with your mission.'

***

I'm telling Heptosh about what Blazz said.

'That's the same Groki who flashed his dome at you at the space port, isn't it?'

'Yes.'

'And he just spoke all that in plain Nephteshi, at the table, with no regard for your feelings?'

'Yes.'

'I tell you. This galaxy would be a much more pleasant place but for the Groki.' He walks to the window, sighing. Then he says, 'Of course, we humans may have had something to do with that as well.'

'What we do?'

'We were a terrible and cruel race of people. We made slaves of other peoples, we looted planets, we even had weapons that worked against the Groki, which we used on them. We used logical relocation to remove minerals and topsoil from their planets to add to ours. We were an empire of pirates we were. The Nefzedi weren't quite a bad as the Nephteshi. We were a nation to the South of their original kingdom on Red Earth, but we were allied to them and supported them in return for favoured status. They gave us our own planet. But the Akkadi were their slaves. I think the Famtizhi were also intended as slaves. Your people were kept on Kalodzu-Famta so as to be preserved and moved later to a place where you would be forced to work. I read the history of the planet in one of the computers we brought from the Kalodzu area.'

'What happen? Why they not take us away?'

'The empire collapsed about that time. Kalodzu-Famta was one of the first planets to break away. The Kalodzus were good. They set aside a whole portion of their planet for your people to live after the ways of your fathers -- raising sheep and gathering food from the land. But the Nephteshis and the Nefzedis were a different story.'

'Then why are you good?'

'Me? Am I good?'

'Oh yes!'

'If I am, it's because I had teachers like my father, and Neuryzh and Fra.'

'Neuryzh, he teach me too.'

'So I hear. I also hear you have your heart set on young Tsaphar b'n Shammah!'

'-- er -- I love her, but Rav, he say she must marry Tsim.'

'I've heard that as well.'

'So -- I can not marry.'

'Not even if you challenge Tsim to a fight?'

'Ooi! No! He too big! I see him fight!'

'Is he as strong as a bionic?'

'I don't know.'

'You remember Shan. He's a bionic. His muscles and flesh have turned into synthetic metal -- much stronger than human muscle. I'm sure Shan is much stronger than Tsim.'

'He fight Tsim?'

'No! You fought Shan! Remember? I saw you twist his arm behind his back, then you pushed him down. I'm sure if you got Tsim in a the right type of hold, you could break his neck!'

'But -- he not do holds?'

'Wrestling isn't an Akkadi art. They box with their fists. If you move fast enough, you can get him before the first punch.'

'I don't know.'

'Well -- you love Tsaphar; Tsaphar loves you; think about it. I won't tell you what to do. By the way, I must say you're learning and skill have improved a lot over the last couple of months.'

'Thank you.'

I don't know if I can fight Tsim. I don't even know if I want to go through that just because a woman isn't allowed to choose for herself. That would be me choosing instead of her.

I've got to think about that.

## 16

Heptosh thought it would be good to take Eetoo along. The invitation was normally extended to the whole village on the third or fourth night of the celebrations, and it would be good for Eetoo to experience an Akkadi wedding -- at least one night of it. Also, he was sure he would gain some enjoyment from it himself.

The bride was from the family of Akhan the village elder, and the groom was the son of Rov, the local tinker. He wasn't just any tinker. Rov could assemble a computer from spare parts, he could sort out anything that could go wrong with levitation motors used in carriers, he could even repair a spaceship \-- everything short of the reverse beam transmitter (for that, one would need the services of the Heknosh clan, of the Indigenous Nephteshis, who kept the art a secret within their clan. After so many months, they still weren't finished repairing Heptosh's). All things considered, the celebration promised to be a sumptuous affair.

Heptosh and Eetoo went on foot. The music was already playing as they arrived. A calf was roasting on an open fire off to one side, where other giant pots and tables laden with delicacies waited to be emptied into serving dishes and carried to the eating area.

One of the attendants led them into the courtyard. It had been emptied out and covered with carpets and cushions. The carrier, horse cart and boxes of things were temporarily stored outside and covered with a tarpaulin.

Heptosh knew better than to show up too early, so they were arriving along with the bulk of the guests. They found a couple of cushions and sat down in front of a log fitted with legs -- it was a perch for Neuryzh and any other creature who might need it. They were beginning to bring in some hors devours and wine.

The bride and groom came in, accompanied by immediate family members, and took their seats at the far end of the courtyard. The flute players, the harpists and the drummer reeled their tunes in the corner next to them. The head of the house, the village elder, loudly announced both in Akkadi and Nephteshi that it was time to enjoy and be merry.

The people began enjoying themselves and being merry.

The b'n Shammah family arrived. The two ladies and the youngest boy sat down next to the mother of the bride. The two older boys looked about for their friends. Heptosh noticed Tsaphar scanning the room until she spotted him and Eetoo. She smiled slightly, and waited for Eetoo to notice her.

Heptosh nudged Eetoo and pointed in the direction of Tsaphar. Tsaphar smiled as soon as Eetoo returned her gaze, but motioned meaningfully with her hand towards Rav, whom Heptosh noticed was sitting with some other boys, one of them, no doubt, Tsim.

Their eyes will be the only parts of them that meet tonight, thought Heptosh.

Tsaphar's twin was still wandering about looking for friends. Presently, he came and sat next to Eetoo.

The food was good. The first course was crackers with a paste made of zun-bean and floggle-oil. The roast calf with sour plum sauce would be one of the later courses, when the heavier items would be brought out. Heptosh thought he also caught the scent of scalded trilobite, probably imported from the planet Zosh.

Shav and Eetoo were conversing casually, mostly in their broken Nephteshi, but sometimes in Akkadi. During the second course, the youngest b'n Shammah boy ran over and sat down next to Eetoo.

In middle of the third course, of crispy fried pigeon wings with sweet lacier-berry sauce, Neuryzh arrived. People all over the room greeted him loudly. He nodded his head and made his dome glow warmly in response. He took his perch behind Heptosh and the boys.

Though his head was much higher than Heptosh's, they could converse easily in the noisy courtyard by means of one of Neuryzh's vocal tubes. With this, he could both speak and hear Heptosh, even as he looked about the room, greeting the other party guests.

'Eetoo told me about the confrontation with the Groki on market day -- when was it?,' Heptosh had been so busy he hadn't seen him in many weeks.

'Two or three weeks ago, but I wouldn't have called it a confrontation. We were having a drink together after all, though his etiquette was rather wanting. But I would say that overall, it was a learning experience for the human. He actually handled himself quite well.'

'No etiquette at all, I would say.'

'I hope he may pick some up as time goes on.'

'The Groki, or Eetoo?'

'The Groki, of course. Eetoo performed wonderfully. He even served him his drink. Speaking of Eetoo, I thought it might do good for his navigation skills, to explore the galaxy.'

'Explore the galaxy?'

'And perhaps some of the others as well. (Oh, I say! These bird wings are good!) I've been cooped up on this sector for several years and I need to get away and just look at the galaxy from a distance, even if it's only for a day's excursion. I thought I might take him with me.'

'That would be fine with me.'

'Perhaps in the next week or two. You know, it's been at least ninety years since I've seen another Utz.'

'Ninety years?'

'And I've been working on the same borunñnvotzp for at least 100.'

'I suppose that's a long time.'

'I'm afraid it's going to get ingrown on me if I keep it too long. I think I'm already more attached to it than what's healthy.'

'That's right, you have to give them away, don't you -- to another Utz?'

'Preferably an Utz. Groki are also capable of receiving .'

'Oh no! Not a Groki, certainly! That would be a horrible waste! Please look for another Utz!'

'I can try. We are rather far between, and Utzes, when we move, often don't leave a forwarding address. The only way I could ever pinpoint anyone's location with any precision is if they sent a mating call. That only happens probably three times a century, and if that happened, common courtesy would dictate that I not respond to it, as I'm not in need of a mate.'

'One would think you don't care for one another.'

'On the contrary. When we visit, it's not just for a fortnight. We've been known to spend up to 20 years on a single visit. And if, during that time, one of us gives the other a borunñnvotzp \-- well -- that, in itself is the highest form of interaction that can possibly happen between Utzes.'

'Does the other one give a barunuv-blablabla -- er -- one of those things in return?'

'Not necessarily. A one-way exchange is enough to deeply enhance a relationship. If the other has a borunñnvotzp, it's likely not mature yet. The receiving Utz usually adds some of the images and ideas from the one he/she receives, to theirs, and later gives it to a third Utz. Thus, my range of influence goes on and on as long as borunñnvotzp are given to yet more Utzes. But it becomes a two way exchange when the receiver spends time with the giver and talks about the images and ideas he/she received. That provides good therapy for the giver.'

'Therapy?'

'Oh, yes. Giving away something one has been pouring oneself into for so many years can potentially lead to depression. That's why there's such a great temptation to keep one's borunñnvotzp indefinitely. It seems as though we've lost something, though we really haven't. The concepts and images we've expressed in the borunñnvotzp become a fundamental part of our consciousness. Later, when we're once again capable of creating, the same ideas appear, but on a much more fundamental level.'

Heptosh had finished his wings, so he shifted to give Neuryzh eye contact. But he found Neuryzh was simultaneously having a conversation with the father of the groom who was standing behind the perch. Multitasking is no problem for an Utz, so Heptosh said the next natural thing:

'So, giving it away ends up being a growing experience.'

'Exactly.'

'So, next week, or the week after, you'll give Eetoo a tour of the galaxy. Perhaps you'll meet another Utz in the process.'

'I don't have high hopes. Travel to many sectors is restricted, even to non-humans.'

The song that the musicians had been playing was finished, and Mr. Akhan, the father of the bride got up and signalled for silence.

'As the next course is being prepared, we'll have dance music! Grab someone's hand, and dance!' He began shaking his fist in the air to set the beat for the musicians. 'Come on!'

He grabbed a couple of ladies' hands and pulled them up to the middle area, and began dancing,

Several of the younger people stood up immediately and made it into a circle in the middle area. Rav and his friends were among them.

Some left the circle to grab a friend by the hand and pull them in.

Heptosh noticed that Tsaphar had positioned herself behind her mother so it would be hard for anyone to pull her into the dance circle.

The music was getting faster and faster, so were the dancers.

Everyone who wasn't dancing was clapping to the beat, some were singing, generally the noise was rather loud.

It wasn't the music Heptosh had grown up with, but he enjoyed it none-the-less. The excitement produced by the beat of the drums and flute and harp was contagious. Heptosh was also clapping.

At the climax all the dancers jumped in the air as everyone shouted, 'Hey!' Heptosh shouted along with everyone.

There were other noises as well -- some screaming near the door, someone shouting. Some people ran outside.

Heptosh's glance fell on the corner where Mrs. b'n Shammah sat.

Tsaphar was gone.

a cacophony of voices takes over from the music   
the dancing follows a new rhythm

Shav pokes me in the rib. 'Hoi! Tsim run away with Tsaphar!'

We get up and run for the door. There are other boys standing about.

It's dark outside. I look -- I can see them, just barely. Someone's running, carrying a girl over his shoulders. She's screaming and hitting his back, but he's got her firmly.

I run after him. Shav is behind me.

He's pretty fast, but Tsaphar's heavy enough to slow him down, so I catch up. Tsaphar sees me, and hold out her hands.

I catch her arms in mine. That slows him down enough so I can kick him in the rear.

He falls over backwards. Now Tsaphar's in my arms.

He gets up quick though. I don't know any moves I can do while I'm holding a girl.

He's coming at us now, shouting something. I don't know what, it's in Akkadi.

Some other big kids have come up from behind. They must be his friends.

They're standing about looking at me. Some of them have sticks. Shav is somewhere behind them. This doesn't look good at all!

They're starting to move in on us.

Tsim tries to grab Tsaphar away but she's holding tightly to me.

Suddenly there's a bright flash.

They all turn and look. Some of them run away. Tsim lets go of Tsaphar and hides his eyes.

It's Neuryzh. His dome is still glowing, but a different colour than I've seen before. This one doesn't remind me of a smile.

He says something in Akkadi. It sounds something like, one marriage is enough for one night.

Everybody goes back. Tsim stands there a while, looking at him. Then he backs up, turns about and runs down the road.

Shav is still there, behind Neuryzh. We walk back to the house and join the party again.

Ima b'n Shammah and Heptosh are at the door.

So is Rav. Tsaphar gives him a look, and he keeps quiet.

Ima says, 'Eetoo, you're a very brave boy.'

'He is, indeed' says Neuryzh.

We all go to sit together near the perch. Tsaphar sits next to me.

I can hear Neuryzh again, but it's through his little tentacle thing next to my ear: 'I don't think your fight is over yet, Eetoo, but the rest you must do yourself.'

Just a few people are dancing now. They've brought out something that looks a bit like lobster, but more in the shape of a giant bug. People are eating it as though they really like it. They dip it into some sauce. I'll try a bit.

* * *

Heptosh heard a knock at the door. It was Mrs. b'n Shammah.

'Good day. What brings you here?'

'It's to do with the episode last night. The boy Tsim and my son, unfortunately, have friends among the unsavoury element of this village, and -- well, I don't think it is safe for Eetoo to continue coming for his lessons. In fact, if we're not careful, they may try to turn this into a feud between our two communities.'

'I'm sorry to hear this.'

'So am I. Just between you and me, I would much rather have Eetoo as a son-in-law than that rogue. But I'm afraid, that could only happen the traditional way -- you know -- but I'm afraid Tsim would be too much for him.'

'Yes.'

'I must hurry, before I'm seen here.'

She turned and walked quickly away.

## 17

the shepherd walks at the head of his herd  
his apprentice minds the strays

Nakham's the only one not put off by all this mess. He keeps right on coming -- as happy as ever. I hope he stays happy. He helps me forget my troubles.

Today he brought me a messages from Tsaphar. She loves me, and I love her.

So, we're both miserable.

I'm sure I would have been happier had I never come to this planet. I love a girl I can't have, all the Akkadi boys in town want my hide, and then I've met creatures that want to step on us like cockroaches.

Are we really no better than cockroaches and rats? That Groki said that, and no one really answered him. Then Heptosh said the same thing. I mean, like, even where there are good people, the kids all grow up to be bad, and all that.

But the Fa-tzi-zhi have stayed pretty good. The Groki was right about that too. There are some bad ones, such as Zhue and Nyu, but most of them are pretty good. Even they will probably turn out okay when they've grown up. Their parents weren't bad, nor any of our grandparents. Bad stuff happens sometimes, but it all gets settled in the way of the fathers.

I guess that's what he meant. We stick to the ways of the fathers because we don't have much to make us go out and do bad stuff. We just have our sheep, our houses and the land. There's plenty to eat, and wool to make clothes with, and dirt to make bricks with. No one comes about selling metzig torches, computers and fancy food from other planets. If we try out new things, people like Uncle Zhue Paw get upset and they call a village council meeting. As long as everybody sticks to the ways of the fathers, we're happy, our parents help us find a wife so we don't get hung up loving someone we can't have.

I'm sure I would have been happier if I had stayed. But the Groki's right again. I wouldn't be happy if I went back. I'd not fit in -- thinking too much about Tsaphar, wanting to visit the big market and drink coourzt. I'd also probably worry about what he said, about the time of humans being almost over.

I've got this mission to do, to get the golden tablets. I still don't have any idea how I'm going to do that.

\-- Well, Neuryzh is going to take me off somewhere in his ship. Maybe he'll help me find them.

Nakham wants to lead the sheep to the water now. I guess it is about time.

I talk to him in Akkadi. 'Tomorrow, I go away one day. You come help sheep? Yes?'

'Sure. I'll take them to the water for you.'

'Thank you. Tell Tsaphar I love her.'

'I'll tell her.

He makes me wish I had a brother.

## 18

the break of day at the space port  
the first rays of the sun touch the roof

the utz and his pupil prepare to board  
a small translucent vessel

Neuryzh's ship is a lot different than Heptosh's. It's as though it's made of jelly or something. At first it's as hard as metal on the outside, but as soon as Neuryzh wants it to, it sucks me in.

I'm sitting in here as though I'm suspended in jelly. I can see all about us. In fact, I can see even better than from outside.

I don't see any controls like on Heptosh's ship, though. I suppose he runs it from inside his head like he does his carrier.

I've brought the computer along, like Neuryzh asked me to.

'Every thing's ready,' he says.

The roof of the port opens up like a flower bud, and suddenly, we're going up. I don't feel any lift like I do on Heptosh's ship.

'Are we already -- er -- simulating linear movement?' I ask. I say it in Nephteshi, because we don't have those words in Fa-tzi-zhi.

'No. This ship doesn't work that way. I'll explain it to you. Friend Heptosh told you about atoms, did he not?'

'Yes.'

'Humans have discovered the realm of hyperspace, in which location coordinates of each atom can be altered. That's what helps logical relocation. Now, there are also other coordinates in the same realm that program the laws of physics in other ways.'

'How?'

'Each atom is programmed to both produce gravity and to respond to the gravitational force of other atoms. This gravity provides weight that varies with the size of each atom, and, of course, makes for collective weight in a group of atoms or molecules. This, in turn, is responsible for forward momentum and centrifugal force. Humans have discovered how to reprogram an atoms location, and thus move their ships about by changing their location in the universe, but reprogramming the gravity of an atom is far more complicated. I don't think humans will ever develop that capability. Our ships have been doing that since long before humans were even birthed -- that and other properties of atoms as well.

'I'll demonstrate.'

Suddenly, I see stars flying past us faster than I ever have.

'Look. Over there is your own solar system.'

Wow! And all the stars are moving into the position I'm used to seeing them on Kalodzu-Famta!

'You recognise the night sky as you used to see it, yes?'

'Yes!'

'There's your planet straight ahead of us. We'll go down close to the ground. I can make this ship transflective, so it will only reflect what's on the other side. To the people below, we'll look like the blue sky above us.'

Now, we're zooming towards the planet. It's getting bigger and bigger, but suddenly we're slowing down.

'Let's see. Your village was close to the central Kalodzu spaceport, wasn't it?'

'No! It was a whole day's journey!'

'I mean, compared to other parts of the globe. I'm sure it would take you many months to walk some places. Now, there's the space port. Do you recognise it?'

I see the side of the brick mountain, and there's the other smaller square pointed mountain where we went underground. I think we're almost over the market, where I first met Heptosh.

'Down there! I kept my sheep there sometimes!'

'Now which way is your village?'

'I see the path -- that way. Oh! There's someone leading their sheep!'

'I'll magnify the image.'

Now it looks like we're really close.

'I think that's Ngowa!'

'Good. Let's follow the path -- do you recognise that house?'

'Yes. That's the old hut half way between the old market and the village -- but someone's there, coming out to meet Ngowa -- that's Venerable Too Dha! Why is he staying out at the old hut?'

I'd so much love to visit him. I'm sure Venerable Too Dha would enjoy it, but Ngowa is there, and he might be frightened of Neuryzh.

We go further.

'That's my village!'

I can't believe it! I wish we could get down and stay a while, but we can't.

We look about the place for a while and then go up again.

'Now, let's explore some other parts of the universe.'

'Where is the planet Nephtesh?'

'I don't know. I know which sector it's in, but to look for it would require a planet by planet search. I'm sure the council for their sector wouldn't allow it. The Noonz Sector has a Groki majority.'

'Then how will I find the golden tablets?'

'That's something that Elkhem will have to show you Himself.'

'Oh.'

The sky is changing to a different shape, so we must be getting far from Kalodzu-Famta now.

He goes on: 'What I can tell you is that Nephtesh is not the birthplace of humanity.'

'Where is it then?'

'Nobody knows. Their birth and life were hidden from all the species in the universe. Now, the Nephteshis, though they had gained great knowledge, lacked wisdom. They would have compromised the secret of their birth-planet's location, but a wise ruler who remained on that planet closed the door so that not even the Nephteshis could return. That door will only be opened for the one who is to go to seek the golden tablets.'

'What kind of door?'

'A tele-gate. It uses logical relocation, the same technology as your ships. They work in pairs. One gate sends anyone who walks through it to a specific location in the universe, where the other gate is. Because planets are always moving around their suns while their suns move in their orbit around the centre of the galaxy, their location constantly changes. For that reason, both sides of the tele-gate must be synced and the exact coordinates of the destination side must be returned to the entry side before the relocator will work. That's what unlocks the tele-gate. When both sides are open, one can walk either way. It becomes simply a door between two places, very far off, but seemingly in the next room. The wise ruler on the human planet both removed the record of his planet's location from Nephtesh, and locked the gate from his side so it wouldn't return the coordinates to the other side. No one has been able to return since.'

Now, I don't see many more stars in front of us. They're all behind us.

'We're coming out of the galaxy now. One of the reasons for this trip is so I can step out and look back on the galaxy. I find that doing that helps to remind me of how tiny I am, how small our galaxy really is, and how big the universe is, and perhaps a small fraction of a vision of how big Elkhem is. I also hope to get a general picture of where Utzes are to be found. I'm feeling quite lonely after ninety years.'

We've turned, so our faces are towards the galaxy. But we're still backing up real fast, so the whole thing is getting smaller and smaller.

It looks like a spot of porridge that landed on a potter's wheel. There are also bits further away from the main galaxy that look like splatters from the same spot, and some that look like small galaxies in themselves.

'Now, we'll start going faster than we have yet.'

I can see the galaxy turning slowly around. We're going over the top of it -- now we're looking at it from the side -- and then the bottom. Well, I guess it doesn't have a top and a bottom, only two sides.

We move back close enough so that the galaxy takes up the whole view on that side of us. It looks big, yet, I don't think I'll ever even imagine how big it really is. The middle of it is very bright, almost blinding if you look at it, but it lights things up inside the ship.

We stop there.

'I'm going to do what I came for,' he says. 'The light and sounds may be too much for you, so you'd better wear this. It will dampen it for you, but you can still sense it.

He takes something out of his bag -- it looks like a crystal bowl. I can just see it by the light of the galaxy. The crystal is almost black. He puts it over my head.

The middle part of the galaxy looks less blinding now. I can look straight at it.

'What are you going to do?' I ask.

'Sing,' he says.

He's quiet for a little while. I can see his silhouette against the galaxy.

Suddenly, his dome lights up, and noises start coming out. They're the same sounds I've heard coming from the top of the mountain when I thought the wind was blowing through it, like a giant pan flute. It really is him singing then. It's very loud. I guess, without this bowl over my head, it would be louder. And his dome is about as bright as my eyes can take it.

His two tentacles go straight up, and now there are three sounds coming out at once, in harmony. It's really very beautiful, sort of like what I heard in the crystal bubble thing, but much more intense. There are extremely high tones, almost too high for my ears to hear, and also very low ones.

He keeps it up, just going on and on. I'm really enjoying this.

There's a bright point on the galaxy -- very fine, but I can see it because it's brighter than the rest. It's changing colours, almost like Neuryzh's dome. Beautiful! There are sounds too, harmonising with Neuryzh's singing, as though the music were coming from the point. More of them pop up, one by one. Each one has a different sound. Now they're coming from all over the galaxy. A couple are even coming from some of the smaller galaxies nearby.

Neuryzh pauses. The music is still coming from the different spots on the galaxy. It's very beautiful.

Neuryzh starts talking to me now. 'The material in this ship is designed to receive signals from other Utzes. Signals of this sort travel at the speed of thought. I've been leading out in a song, and now Utzes all over the galaxy are joining in. This is one way I can tell how many of us there still are, but the real reason is to stay in communication with one another, and with the one who birthed us all.'

We listen quietly for a while. Then, Neuryzh starts in again. It sounds like thousands of different instruments all together, harmonising in a way I could never have imagined before.

This is glorious! It's making me think about how beautiful the stars and galaxies are, and how wise and wonderful the the Maker of it all is. If I could just stay here like this forever, I'd be eternally happy!

I think this has been going on for two hours now. It's dying down. Neuryzh has stopped, and just a few of the others are still at it. They're stopping, one by one.

There's one spot where it looks like several colours shining at once.

Neuryzh points to it. 'That's the planet Zonch, which gave birth to the Utz species. There are about five very young Utzes there, and a very old one, their instructor. The youngest is no more than fifty years old.'

Finally, he takes off my crystal bowl.

'Can you go to visit them, now you know where they all live?' I ask.

'I know the general areas where most of them are. It would still take me a long time to find them. This galaxy is becoming more and more restricted.'

'What about Zonch?'

'I may visit there sometime. If there's time, we could stop on our way home, so you could come along, perhaps. However, I'm hoping to meet someone to whom I could give my borunñnvotzp. I didn't feel that any of those who joined the song was hungry for one right now. Let's try another galaxy.'

Suddenly, we're moving faster than ever. The galaxy is shrinking as fast as our planet did before. I see other points of light that could have passed for stars, but I know they're galaxies. We seem to be swerving around, because the points of light aren't coming at us in a straight line.

There's one place where they seem to be appearing from behind something I can't see, like a dark cloud.

'We have to avoid dark matter,' says Neuryzh.

'Huh?'

'Something that's of a different nature than what makes up our stars and planets, and isn't conducive to life as we know it.'

I think I see places where there's more of the dark stuff.

'That galaxy there -- hmmm.'

I see one point of light getting bigger and bigger.

'What?' I say.

'I didn't think it was inhabited. Yet, I think I sense -- humans!'

'Huh?'

'Humans. Probably the only intelligent creatures there. Other creatures don't bother with this galaxy because it's thought to not be inhabited. Let's go and look.'

'You can sense humans from so far away?'

'The same way as Utzes hear one another's song, though not as distinct. My sense is especially acute right now because of our song; otherwise, I would never have noticed.'

It's looking more like a galaxy now.

'It was very resourceful of humans to find this galaxy. It's not visible from ours because of the dark matter. Yet, it has the right energy composition to support the same kind of life as our own galaxy.'

It's getting bigger and bigger.

'You might want to record the coordinates of this galaxy in your computer. I'll give you more as we find some inhabited planets.'

He gives me some numbers, and I write them in the computer.

'But won't it take too long to find the planets?'

'There are no Groki here to hold us up.'

We're slowing down as we enter the galaxy. Then, we turn this way and that.

I see something fuzzy up ahead. It's getting bigger and bigger.

'A human community in the vicinity of a nebula,' says Neuryzh.

It's getting bigger -- a hazy place with bright spots here and there.

'A star, yes. A glass cloud, but I don't see any planets. There's an especially dense ring of gas circling the star along with a few asteroids, that's quite normal. The only question is, where could the humans be? Let me see. The gas cloud is composed of nitrogen, oxygen, carbon dioxide -- breathable air, and in quantities dense enough to support life! I also see clouds of water vapour. Now, don't tell me ... -- now let me magnify this image. Why look!'

I look.

There's somebody flying using some sort of contraption. It's got a thing in front like a big cartwheel with flaps instead of spokes, spinning around and round. He's peddling away at a pulley to make it spin and push the air back. There's two more people hanging on the back with their hands. It looks like it could be his wife and kid.

'What do they find to eat?' I say.

'Let's look. There -- over that way.'

There's an asteroid, and there's some sort of plant growing about it. Someone's picking something from it. On the other side of the asteroid, I see a round thing sticking out with a hole. It must be a house or something.

There's another flying thing. This one looks as though someone's made wings, almost like a butterfly's, but he's pulling it in and out with his arms like a fish does with its fins.

The people have hardly any clothes on. I suppose it's hard to find anything here to make clothes with.

'This certainly illustrates what Friend Blazz said, that humans are adaptable to almost every condition.'

There are animals. We see a flock of something -- birds?

No. More like squids with feathers. Weird!

We look at some other groups of people in the gas ring.

'I don't recognise the language,' says Neuryzh. 'Their lifestyle looks basic, and they've obviously been here a long time. I'm sure they've lost the ability to stand up and walk in situations with gravity. I wonder if they remember how they came to be here? Are they even aware that other people groups live on solid planets with gravity? In any case, it wouldn't do to make contact with them just yet, until we learn a lot more about them.'

He tells me the coordinates for this star. I write them down, and we go on.

'Perhaps, some day, I'll come and sit a while here and try to decipher their language. Now we're coming to a part where the gasses are too dense for humans, but -- what is this I sense over there...?'

It looks a bit more dense up ahead, almost like bright daylight.

'Ah! If I'm not mistaken ...'

We've stopped moving.

'... this is the home of a fjoounz.'

'A -- what?'

'A fjoounz is a highly intelligent life form. One must never approach a fjoounz, nor attempt to communicate with one. If one has a year or two of spare time, one could wait in a place such as this, and the fjoounz might initiate the communication. I'd like to do that someday.'

'What does it look like?'

'I'll see if I can get an image. I'll have to use a quiet, non-intrusive means to obtain it, so it might not be clear. Even then, if we gaze too long, it'll sense our presence as though we were invading its privacy.'

Everything in that direction starts to change to a purplish colour, and then things that are far away suddenly look close up, things like asteroids covered with foliage, weird animals, then ...

'There it is,' Neuryzh whispers through his tube. 'Now, don't talk. Relax your mind. Don't think any loud thoughts. I'll bring it up just a bit clearer.'

I can barely see something that reminds me of a jellyfish, or a squid, round in the front with very long tentacles hanging out the back -- just sitting there, tentacles furling in the breeze.

After about three seconds, it goes hazy. Objects start looking far away again, and normal sky colour returns.

'Those creatures have existed almost since the birth of the universe. They remember the formation of galaxies and stars.'

'That old?' I say.

'Yes. Actually, it's not accurate to call them "they". They don't reproduce in the same way as other species. One, when it grows big and sufficiently healthy, simply splits into two. Each one goes off to live its own life, but they both retain the memory of the original. Thus, they all remember the day that they, as the original fjoounz, were birthed billions of years ago, and the lives of all the split-offs that led to their own. They travel the universe, stretching their fore-membrane to cover their whole body, and propelling themselves in a way similar to this ship -- they imparted to my fathers the means of building these ships. Their task, at the beginning, was to distribute and plant the seeds of life throughout the universe.'

'Wow!'

'Someday, I may return to that spot and wait for the fjoounz to communicate with me, if it will.'

We leave the nebula, and have our lunch.

Now we're coming to a star with normal planets going around it. Neuryzh thinks there are people here living on one of these.

We come in closer and Neuryzh magnifies the image.

We don't see the ground yet. We just see lots of things sticking up, mostly with bulbs on top or wide flat things, like flowers.

We look closer. They're not flowers; they're gardens. I see trees and paths, and even houses on them. The bulb looking things look like buildings. Some have crystal walls so we can see into them. I see gardens inside some of them too. Others only have floors on top of each other. The whole planet is covered with them.

There are also little things flying back and forth. I guess they must be carriers. There's a whole line of them following each other like ants. Some of them are veering off and landing on the flat garden things, and I see one going to a bulb. A door opens up on the side and the carrier goes right in.

Neuryzh magnifies it some more. We can see people in the garden places. One of them is tending the plants. He must be a farmer. Inside the bulbs the people are dressed really fine, with jewellery and all.

All the gardens and stuff are perched on top of things that look like flower stems. The whole planet looks like a garden. We go about for a while along the surface. The whole planet is covered with the buildings. The sky above them is blue and has white clouds, like on our other planets, but underneath, it's sort of brown and grey. We can't see what's down there -- wait -- there's a place where there's no buildings. The air is clearer underneath. It's an ocean. We cross it, it's a big one, but there's the same dense grey mist on the other shore, with flower buildings sticking out of it. All the land space is used up, I guess.

Neuryzh takes the ship a bit lower.

'It sounds as though they're speaking Nephteshi,' he says.

Suddenly, I see other ships coming up from somewhere, and surrounding us.

They're sending some sort of blinking light at us.

'They're guiding us to a forced landing.'

'Do we land then?'

'We're very far from home. They probably believe they are the only intelligent beings in their galaxy, so it's doubtful that they answer to any galactic protocol. However, they've put up a thernguin net, which prevents even my ship from escaping in that direction. But I can still go down, which they probably don't anticipate. I'll set the matter programming so we can pass through solid objects. Here we go...'

We start going down into the brown mist.

'Back hole at the centre -- I'd better not to attempt that.'

We turn before we reach the surface, and start whizzing along.

We're going too fast for me to make anything out. Everything's grey and brown.

Now, we're going up again. We go past the flower tops and off into space again. Nothing's chasing us now.

'That was the most advanced human civilisation I've seen yet.'

'Very beautiful place,' I remark.

'You didn't see much of the bottom, I suppose.'

'No. We went too fast.'

'Not so beautiful there.'

'You said this planet has a black hole?'

'Yes. The usual method of atomic reprogramming doesn't work on black holes.'

'Why?'

'A black hole has no atoms intact. It's a collapsed residue of all particles that once made up the atoms in that range, so there is no nuclei through which to access the hyperspace dimension. Now, the black hole, itself offers other possibilities, but my ship isn't equipped to handle that.'

'Why do some planet have black holes?'

'That's a technology humans used centuries ago. They take a black hole the same weight as a small planet, they bombard it with raw zotite, more than it can consume, so it begins to crystallise. Now, zotite is a highly unstable material in its raw form, but the hardest material in the universe when it is crystallised. They keep bombarding it until the zotite stops crystallising. Then, after removing the excess zotite, they begin building the infrastructure of the planet, first by placing large slabs of rock in many layers as a base foundation, and then more rock with space in between for underground passages and rooms. Some parts, they build higher, so as to facilitate mountains, plains and oceans. On top of that, they lay the sand and topsoil.'

He gives me the coordinates of the planet we just got away from, and I write them down in the computer.

We're leaving the galaxy now.

'Just time for one more stop...'

* * *

crystal mountain peaks surround the shallow canyon  
round, smooth and bulbous - except where pieces have broken off

the canyon floor is strewn with broken crystal boulders   
with other rocks and topsoil around about

deeper valleys are visible not far away - sinking below the tree line  
so that lush forests are seen below

the young of two very different species meet...

So, this is a baby Utz. Cute -- sort of. I'd say it's about half my size, and looks much more like a bird than Neuryzh, probably because it's not wearing anything and he's got feathers all the way up to his dome. His arms are a lot like wings, except for the claws at the end -- no good for flying.

He's got a chunk of crystal he's playing with. He twitches a lot when he's playing -- reminds me of a baby parrot. And he talks, non-stop...

'Look what I can do! See? When I hold it like this to the sun, it separates the photons according to their wave pattern! Look! Someday I'm going to make a borunñnvotzp'

He's made a rainbow on the flat bit of white rock.

'That's beautiful!' I say.

'How do you know "beautiful"? You don't even detect particle movement! Hey, do you know how many hydrogen atoms there are in this galaxy? There's -- hey! Wait a minute -- this language he transferred to me for talking to you, just saying that number would take all morning!' -- now he's using another small crystal to deflect some of the light from the first beam to make other patters -- 'Anyway, in our language we'd just say "Ffffttzshdrdrnuit". Did you know? No two galaxies in the universe contain the same number of hydrogen atoms. You can use that information to identify a galaxy...'

Now Neuryzh and the old Utz are coming back.

Suddenly, the baby Utz starts talking to the old teacher in their own language.

'Ahh,' says the old teacher. 'Perhaps it's time for a lesson about humanity. Zoonyuzh, go call the others.

He jumps up and starts hopping away. He reminds me of a little bird hopping, jumping up on to rocks and over crevices, making a noise like a pan flute -- like Neuryzh's but only the high notes. He sounds more like a bird.

Just from knowing Neuryzh, I never really noticed how much like birds Utz's are, until I met these younger ones. I think they're just a highly intelligent species of bird.

Here they come -- oh the gods! They're doing it again! Flashing their domes at each other! It gives me -- sometimes a tickly feeling -- sometimes ... ha ha -- aaaah! Too much!

'Tzzzgrrrtdsldlsojvniugggh!!!' shouts the teacher.

They stop. He flashes me with a softer glow. Now I feel better.

Neuryzh translates for me, 'He's told them not to use their domes in the presence of humans until they've learned to focus more accurately.'

'All right, now gather around. I'll conduct this session in Fa-tzi-zhi for the benefit of our human guest. Now, a while ago, Zoonyuzh asked me a question that I wish to answer in the presence of all of you. Maybe, our new friend, Eetoo can also tell us some things. Zoonyuzh, please repeat your question in Fa-tzi-zhi.'

'How can Eetoo know about beauty? He can't even detect sub-atomic particles, let alone interpret broad sequences as a unified whole!'

'Okay,' he thinks a bit. 'Eetoo, maybe you can tell us. What is beauty, to you?'

'Er -- ' I don't know how to answer. 'Things are just beautiful, that's all.'

'I'll project an image. There...'

In middle of nowhere, there's a mass of colour -- beautiful, but it's just a big splosh of colours.

'Is that beautiful to you?'

'Yes,' all the Utzs answer.

'Yes,' I say.

'So, Eetoo, what is beautiful about it?'

'Er -- I don't know. It's just -- well -- beautiful.'

'What if I remove some of the aspects. How about this?

'No. That's not beautiful at all.'

'The zhozon wave frequencies aren't a multiple of the ptdrokll waves,' says the biggest Utz student.

'That's right, Pzotttr. How about this?'

'No,' we say.

'But when I project them all together...'

'Yes. That's beautiful!' we all agree.

'Now, Eetoo, you look at it for a while, and try to pick out what about it makes it beautiful.'

After a while, he says, 'Have you found what's beautiful about it yet?'

'When I try to figure it out, it doesn't look that beautiful anymore,' I say.

'Exactly. While the Utz relies on his observation of particles and wave patterns, along with the other principles of physics in order to realise beauty, the human brain has a special sense that works independently of his analytical capacity. In fact, the human mind approaches beauty from the opposite direction from that of an Utz, or a Groki, or certain other species. That's why, when Eetoo tries to analyse the source of beauty and truth, that function stops working, and he no longer sees the beauty of it. Most humans haven't fully developed their unique sense, but it has the potential to make humanity superior in intelligence to all other species. What prevents humans from reaching that potential is the tendency to try to analyse things and make logical comparisons, just as Eetoo did a while ago -- when he lost the sense of the beauty of the image.

'In fact, the failure to reach that potential, has to do with the first human.'

'Red Earth?' I say.

'Why, yes. I believe his name had that meaning. He was placed in a large habitat that contained every type of plant life, and every kind of animal that was to inhabit his planet. In this habitat, there originally dwelt three creatures. One was the mother of all feathered creatures, another, the father of all four footed mammals, and the third, the reptilian.'

'Could the feathered creature fly?' asks one of the Utzes.

'It could fly, yes. It lives for seven celestial ages, and then dies, but is hatched again from its own ashes.'

'I wish we could fly,' Zoonyuzh says.

'What did the mammalian creature look like?'

'It was hooved, and had a single horn.'

'The reptilian?'

'It's the reptilian that this story concerns. It was long, slender, and had seven heads. Now, the other two creatures had a fuller understanding of things. They fully recognised that the human had a superior sense of beauty and truth that didn't rely on the ability to logically compare, nor a sense of superiority or inferiority. Whether the reptilian recognised this, is uncertain. Perhaps he simply underestimated the ability the human did have, or he begrudged the human of that ability. Some say that his actions were calculated to undermine the human's unique strengths, and to gain an advantage. I once had a long conversation with a fjoonzh who had met the creature. This fjoonzh was of the opinion that the reptilian, in fact, had dark motives that were carefully concealed beneath a façade of purity and innocence.

'Whatever the case, the reptilian cultivated a friendship with the female human, and convinced her that having the inherent capacity to make logical comparisons and to analyse what's superior and what's inferior, would give her an advantage over all other creatures. To gain this ability, she was to partake of the fruit of a special tree, a one-of-a-kind, that grew only in the habitat. The fruit contained molecules that would react with human DNA and bring a change to the human system, and to the way the brain worked. The changes would be hereditary. Both the male and female human partook of the fruit, so the unique human sense has been impaired ever since by the desire to logically analyse and compare everything, along with an obsession with superiority.

'So, humanity's inherent weakness is that they are prevented from ultimate beauty by trying to approach it from the wrong direction, not relying solely on the unique sense that the species was born with.'

I've never heard the story in that way before. Maybe it's in the golden tablets.

Anyway, Neuryzh says it's time for us to go. We say goodbye, and we're off, back to Tok.

* * *

Heptosh stood at the door of his house and heaved a sigh. The sun was setting, and he expected Eetoo would arrive with Neuryzh any time now.

Blazz the Groki did, indeed, have the goods on Amanhep -- not that he had shared it in good will, of course. As though on cue, Amanhep suddenly showed his true colours. As soon as Lord Staktekus began to give ground during negotiations, Amanhep took it with a vengeance -- on his own behalf, not for his fellow Nephteshis on Imtep, as far as Heptosh could tell. Now, it was Amanhep who was the trouble spot. Lord Staktekus had warned him about that prospect, but Heptosh, gullible soul that he was, rather than take warning, had actually convinced him otherwise.

Now, the situation was a bigger mess than ever. On one hand, Lord Staktekus now regarded Heptosh as a deceiver, and on the other, Amanhep was refusing to budge from his high ground. There would probably be war on Imtep.

Heptosh had failed. If it weren't for Neuryzh reassuring him and glowing his dome for him, he'd be depressed. Also, there were other things he could switch his attention to, such as reopening Kalodzu-Famta.

Even that was hitting snags. Regarding the question of who was controlling Shan, Diggin, the head of Sector Security, would only say, 'We're putting the question to various parties, but the issue appears to have reached a sensitive phase.' He wouldn't elaborate.

At least, Heptosh would make the trip to visit Eetoo's mentor, Too Dha. That might give them some fresh inspiration.

He could see Neuryzh's carrier coming up the road now. It stopped in front of the path to the house.

He was glad to see Eetoo.

## 19

sparring partners in the back pasture, unclad  
a large man, a small one, making cautious moves

the larger lunges with his fist, a move that should have floored the smaller  
but for the latter's quick movements in turning the action against itself

it's the larger who picks himself up, congratulating the younger  
all the while, the shepherd's young apprentice watches with glee

Heptosh is still sure I can beat Tsim. I told him I'd need to practice, so here we are. He says he used to do boxing before, but with Nefzedi rules. He says Akkadi boxing isn't much different, only no rules.

Nakham is sitting on the rock, acting as though he were watching a real fight, cheering me every time I get Heptosh in a hold.

I've tried about five different holds now, and I'm practising those ones because they're the best for doing someone who's using their fist, or their feet.

At first, I think he wasn't trying hard to hit me, just letting me try my holds. Now, he's trying a lot harder. He's got his fists wrapped up in cloth though. He's also tried his feet, even though Nefzedi rules don't allow kicking.

Tsim would probably start out using his fist, and do kicking later on if he needed to. I should get him into a hold before that though.

'I'm tired out,' says Heptosh. 'We'll do this again tomorrow -- provided I'm not too sore. Maybe every day until we make our next trip to Kalodzu-Famta.'

He puts his loincloth back on and walks back to the house.

Nakham comes running. 'Do it to me! Do it to me!'

I do a few moves with him, get him in some holds, then I throw him up in the air so he lands on my shoulders. He loves it. Then I race him to the pool at the stream and we jump in.

I sit and relax in the water while Nakham keeps jumping in from the rock and getting out again.

I don't want to just fight for her and win her as though she were a prize that anyone could win. I might have an idea though.

In that story in Neuryzh's bubble thing, the girl did something that stopped the monster.

Let me think...

## 20

Heptosh navigated the craft at a low level to avoid detection, and looked for a landing spot deep inside the canyon.

He was still using the ship Shan had given him. The craftsmen of the Heknosh clan still weren't finished repairing his. The last time he enquired, someone insinuated it might be irreparable. Others that he knew, had also been waiting a long time for their ships. In fact, he couldn't remember any ships being repaired and sent back in the last two months.

Though he tried to subdue negative thoughts, there was that nagging worry brought on by that comment Blazz made. There had been no communication from the central planet of the Association for a while now, nor from Imtep, even in response to the department's enquiries. It was even getting more and more difficult to obtain permission to land on Ashta, the home planet of the Heknoshis.

Heptosh brought their present ship down near the canyon wall. Eetoo helped Heptosh cut branches from nearby trees for a camouflage. Then they walked out of the canyon and down the path towards the village. His bag was packed with all the things they might possibly need, though it made it awkward to carry.

Eetoo had said that he spotted Too Dha staying at an old cottage halfway between the old abandoned market and their village. He was puzzled as to why, but Heptosh thought it was handy, as they could meet with him without causing excitement among the other villagers.

The walk through familiar country was probably just what Eetoo needed.

After travelling half the morning, they saw the cottage a little way off the road.

'This is it,' said Eetoo.

As they approached the cottage, someone peeped out carefully. Then, there emerged an man with a long white beard and equally long white hair growing out of the back of his otherwise bald head.

He began talking in excited tones to Eetoo in their language. Eetoo responded in tones of joy and respect. All Heptosh could pick up were his own name, and the word, 'Nephteshi'.

The old man looked at him for a moment, and said, 'I greet you. I thank the one god, Elkhem that He sent you to enable my son on an important mission. I thank you for being his teacher.' He took Heptosh's two hands in his, bowed low until his forehead was on Heptosh's palms.

'Come inside,' he said, still holding Heptosh's hands. 'We will talk. It is better if people don't see us.'

They went inside and sat on a rug.

As soon as they sat down, the old man said, 'Something evil has happened in the village. I had to flee for my life, and now I live here.'

'What happened?' asked Heptosh.

'A boy that used to live in the village, Ni Gwah, Eetoo knew him: he fell into the whirlpool and we never found his body. He has returned -- or rather a likeness of him. His skin has changed into a deathly grey colour. It is not like skin at all, but he has superhuman strength.'

Eetoo exclaimed something in Famtizhi. They spoke back and forth. All Heptosh understood was Eetoo's use of the Nephteshi word, 'bionic'. Then the old man turned to Heptosh once again:

'The young people in the village believe he has turned into a god, and he promises to help them, also, become gods. I looked into its eyes, and I see no living soul. I warned the villagers that this was not the same Ni Gwah that they once knew. Some have listened and refuse to follow him, but the rest have threatened to kill me if I won't keep silent, both because I say there is only one god we must worship, and that this likeness of Ni Gwah brings death, not godhood.'

'Did he tell you of anything that went on in the land of the Kalodzus?'

'Kalodzuland?'

'We found him there, a day after I first met Eetoo, but he had not yet turned into a bionic. There were bionics there, and because we had to escape quickly, we were forced to leave him behind.' Heptosh didn't want to go into the whole story of Shan. 'We thought Ni Gwah had escaped, but it looks as though the bionics found him again and gave him the implant.'

'What "implant"?'

'It's a very small piece of machinery that goes under the skin either in the hand or the forehead. It becomes like a living cell that reproduces itself replacing the natural cells until the whole body slowly becomes bionic.'

'An "implant"! That's what he promises to give all the young people.'

'Then, he must be stopped. Has he begun implanting them yet?'

'I think not. He says he must wait until the implants produced by his own body mature before he remove them, so he planned to go somewhere to fetch more. According to Ngowa he hasn't gone yet.'

'Can we go there now?' asked Heptosh.

'They will kill me as soon as they see me. They will be immediately suspicious of you, as a stranger. Eetoo could go. They would welcome him happily, but I don't know how Eetoo could stop Ni Gwah.'

Heptosh opened his bag and took out his voltage shooter.

'With this,' he said. 'If you attach a power cell of this size and aim for the middle of the chest, you can destroy a bionic. It's not of powerful enough voltage to kill a human, but some of the information suggests that there is a circuit in the chest area that is sensitive to electrical voltage. It will explode and kill the bionic.'

'Voltage?' said the old man.

'Power that makes machines work. This is also used to start a fire. It comes from a power cell like this.'

'Ah, what they used to use with the metzig torch the Kalodzus used to sell us at the market.'

Eetoo said, 'You know about metzig torches? But I never see one before Heptosh show me.'

'You were very young when the Kalodzus stopped coming. But now, Eetoo, you have a difficult task to do. Do you love your old village?'

'Yes.'

'Then you must take this machine of Heptosh's, and use it to stop the bionic before it spreads its evil.'

They spoke back and forth in Famtizhi. It sounded like Eetoo was doubtful, but Too Dha was encouraging him in a way only he could.

Heptosh added some more: 'When you see him, you must remember, it isn't really Ni Gwah. It's not even a human being, so you won't be killing anyone. Ni Gwah is already dead. You will be bringing honour to the memory of the real Ni Gwah by destroying his imposter. Ni Gwah would want it that way.'

Eetoo finally felt ready to go. Heptosh showed him how to use the voltage shooter, and he was off.

## 21

the native son approaches his old home  
the very rocks call out to greet him

Wow! The old smells, the trees, the pond -- makes me wish I were here to stay!

But I can't.

I have to be strong for this. I'm don't know what I'm going to do when I see Ni Gwah. I just have to remember, it's not really him, I guess. I hope he won't seem too real.

There's the village. It looks the same as ever. There's cousin Zhue with his sheep. I never thought I'd feel like this, but it's nice to see him.

'Hoi! Eetoo!' It's Moo. 'Where have you been?'

There's other people now.

'Eetoo's back!' 'Look! It's Eetoo!' 'Eetoo! You're back!' Doo Bweh the baker is running out. There's Ae Maw, and Da. There's Nyu as well, and Gla. Zhue is running over here now.

There's Uncle Zhue Paw. 'Eetoo! You must have gone far this time!'

I didn't know people cared for me so much.

Now they're all around asking me this and that, as though they thought of nothing but me all this time.

It is good to be back. Maybe I shouldn't have ever left.

'Eetoo! Did you know Ni Gwah is still alive?' That was Da.

That's right. I'd better not forget why I'm here.

'Yeah! Ni Gwah's been asking about you,' says Nyu.

I'm sure it would be okay if I just sat with the lot of them and had a good time for a little while. They'll probably fix a big feed in my honour. I can smell home cooked food now!

Maybe I'll just...

'Why! It's Eetoo! I was wondering when you'd come!'

It's Ni Gwah! He looks -- he's a bionic, but he looks like himself.

But he isn't himself.

I'd really love to sit and talk to him and the others.

But Ni Gwah's dead. I was the last one who saw him alive.

I'm just standing there, not moving.

But I have to do it. If I don't do it now, it'll be harder later.

But I can't

'Come, sit down Eetoo! I have a lot to tell you.'

'He's a god!' whispers Nyu.

A god! It's not Ni Gwah, but a false god.

I take the shooter out of the bag. I aim it at him.

When I pull this switch, he'll -- should I?

'Eetoo! What are you doing? Answer me!'

I wish he wouldn't talk that way. It sounds too much like Ni Gwah.

This isn't strong enough to kill a human. If he's really human, he won't die.

I pull the switch. Two lightning bolts shoot out and hit him in the chest.

'Wa! Eetoo! What's that?' he says.

His chest starts smoking, and sparks are coming out. His chest explodes and he falls over.

'Eetoo's killed Ni Gwah!' someone shouts.'

Now, everyone's shouting at the same time: 'How did he?' 'But Ni Gwah's a god!' 'He's dead!'

They're mostly gathered about Ni Gwah, but now Cousin Zhue looks up. 'Eetoo has killed our god! Should he not die?'

'Yes!' says someone else.

Now they want my blood -- almost all the guys in the village!

What have I done? It's as though I'm suddenly a criminal!

Doo Bweh the baker is closer to me. He's coming at me to grab me.

I shoot him with the shooter at a lower setting.

'Aaaah!' He steps back, but the others are facing me.

I can tell this is getting low. I send some lightning at them at an even lower setting, to drive them back, then I turn and run.

I'm doing all sorts of things that only a desperate criminal would do!

Most of them are between me and the way I came, so I have to run the other way. I'll cut across the field later.

They're chasing me.

I'm running up the main path through the village that goes up the hill. If I don't turn off soon it'll be hard for me to go off towards Venerable's house, but they're too close for that. Someone's already running off that way to catch me coming back. One of them is calling for Ju Paw who lives at the end. He sticks his head out just as I'm running past him.

There's nothing for it but to go up the mountain.

There I was, happy because they were all glad to see me. Now, they all want to kill me!

I'm normally a good runner, but I'm not used to the gravity here anymore. At least the mountains aren't so steep.

Was I really right to shoot the thing at Ni Gwah? Should I have followed my heart? What was my heart saying?

If I go up, there's a couple of ways to get down again, but it looks like some of them are going another way around to meet me.

What am I going to do?

I'm in the mountains now.

If I don't turn down one of the other paths, I'll be trapped. I'm going to be trapped anyway.

Up this way there's only the waterfall, and then the ... -- wait. I have an idea...

## 22

I, Neuryzh had been concerned for quite some time concerning my borunñnvotzp. I had been building it for about two and a half celestial ages -- that would be roughly equal to 100 human years as that species counts time. That is a long time to be working on one borunñnvotzp.

When an Utz completes a borunñnvotzp, one gives it to a friend. At the dawn of the universe, when Utzes generally lived within a single stellar cluster, there was no problem in finding a fellow Utz. Even when we began to spread out over the galaxy, and to other galaxies, we usually met an Utz at least once every celestial age.

Now and then, we'd share the experience with a Groki. In those days, many of them also indulged in the art form. Though the Utz and the Groki are sub-species of the same root, a Groki life cycle is much shorter, their gestation period being only one celestial age. Thus, they have multiplied rapidly and have filled this galaxy and one or two others. They are not hard to find at all. However, they reached a stage in their cultural development where they no longer considered it important to give away their borunñnvotzp. Those who had nurtured one to maturity began to succumb to the temptation to hold on to it. It's the giving away of a borunñnvotzp that constitutes the climax of the experience, so when they stopped giving them away, that rather defeated the purpose in starting one -- although some would bequeath theirs to an heir at their death, so with some it has remained a generational thing. In my opinion, the lack of giving of the borunñnvotzp been one of the causes of their becoming a generally self-centred and, to some, an unattractive species.

As I said, I had my borunñnvotzp about two and a half celestial ages, and I felt that I was in danger of becoming overly protective of it. I had not met another Utz for at least two celestial ages.

Some Groki had just moved to our planet of Tok. I, rather half seriously, mentioned to my human friend, Heptosh, that the Groki were the only candidates I had found so far for my borunñnvotzp. He expressed his revulsion to the idea. Later, I mentioned the predicament to Friend Fra, and he was equally opposed to it.

I laid the idea aside for a while, and took a trip about the galaxy to see if and where Utzes could be found. I took a young human companion with me. Utzes were certainly about. They've neither increased nor decreased in number. If one keeps oneself out of trouble, an Utz can go on living forever. This makes up for our extremely slow reproduction cycle. However, they lived in places that could be impossible to find -- especially with travel restrictions the way they are in most sectors.

I suppose if one of them sent out a mating call, I could have pinpointed their location with enough accuracy as would have allowed me to go straight to them and avoid Groki local detection. However, since I wasn't in need of a mate at the moment, I would have been interfering with the fulfilling of someone's needs of a different sort. Besides, there had been only three mating calls made in this galaxy in the last 100 years. I did make a stop-by in Zonch, our birth planet, where all five young Utzes were being raised and trained, but there, they're either too young or too old for a borunñnvotzp the likes of mine.

That left me with only the Groki option.

I had got to know the Groki, Blazz, on a surface level. I found him to be pleasant, and open to conversation -- as long as I avoided the subject of humans. He had had experiences common to most Groki, which caused him to be negative towards that species. That is only natural as Groki and Humans share so many traits in common. Creatures that are too much alike do tend to find one another repulsive. If I remember, I may have had similar attitudes when I was a youth.

It occurred to me that the theme of my borunñnvotzp could be just what may help him break into a new stage of his development. There was also the risk that he might not take it as seriously as I felt it deserved. The giving of a borunñnvotzp requires a level of trust, and great risk of post-borunñnvotzp depression. In that case, his lack of seriousness over the matter could be devastating. The longer one goes without giving it away, the greater the risk.

But I had to give away my borunñnvotzp.

I weighed the potential good that could come of it against the potential harm. I decided to take the risk. I paid him a visit at a cave he had been occupying since he arrived on Tok.

He invited me in.

I must say he had decorated his cave splendidly. Since Groki left off creating the borunñnvotzp they have taken up other art forms, such as that of the Junxzts, the carving of rocks, and the Vingle art of creative robotic devices. Friend Blazz is really quite an artist in the robotic field, and he had also done some rock sculpting since he arrived. The entrance to one of the passages was beautifully done

We talked a bit about various of his art pieces.

One of his robotic pieces was an object that remained suspended in an empty corner of his dwelling, and continuously changed colour and shape. Sometimes it split into a hundreds of tiny balls that shot outward, went into an orbit, and then returned to their common centre.

I stood and admired the graceful movement of the device while Blazz prepared his holograph frame to show me yet another work of art.

The holograph frame showed a story he had created -- undoubtedly from Groki history, particularly concentrating on aspects of their relations with humans. There were pirate raids on Groki ships, human invasions of Groki planets, humans torturing their captive Grokis; in all I saw a totally different picture of humanity than I had from most local sources. I must admit that his depiction of humans' physical appearance rather exaggerated some of their more hideous features -- nothing of the cute loveable creatures I have come to know. He also highlighted their weaker side, showing them as being individually weak and vulnerable, but as a collective whole, a major thorn in the side of the peace loving Groki community. In fact, the production graphically conveyed the impression of a galactic empire of cockroaches.

Though I knew it was the typical Groki experience of humanity, I couldn't help but think something was missing.

'There's something about the human species that makes them different from the rest of us,' I began.

'That's for certain!'

'I don't mean in the obvious way. I can't help feel that there's a special reason they were birthed -- something of the Supreme One which He bequeathed to that species -- though perhaps they, as a whole, have yet to even realise it themselves.'

'They'd better realise it soon. They won't be around much longer, will they!' He retorted.

'I suppose --' I thought it better to lay off that subject.

After a pause, I asked him, 'Have you ever received a borunñnvotzp?'

'I never have,' was Blazz's reply. 'One of my elder relatives used to make one, which he left to my father at his death. Though he appreciated it very much, he never made one himself. I had seen some of the images from it before my father received it, and that's where I got some of the ideas for the holograph. My great uncle had fought in some of the human wars.'

'I have one I've been working on for quite some time,' I ventured. 'Would you honour me by being the recipient?'

'Hmmm! I've always wondered would the experience was like.'

'When will you have a few days free?'

'The day after tomorrow.'

'Then, please come to my home on that day. Any time would be fine with me.'

'I will.'

So, it was agreed, and so he came.

Blazz took a perch on a couple of my posts. I got out my borunñnvotzp and held it a while. This would be my very last time to hold it.

His demeanour certainly wasn't giving me any confidence. This is a thing an Utz always takes seriously and with deep respect, understanding what a sacrifice the giver is making in presenting it. He was treating it as a lark.

I had come this far. I had made him a promise. This was my only chance to do what I had felt the need for, for a long time.

I thought again of the potential good that could come of it, and handed it to him.

He held it. 'What's the procedure for taking it in again?'

'Not complicated. Set your dome to receiving mode, and then, simply smash it into your forehead.'

He dome turned black, for light absorption, and he said, 'Here goes.'

He smashed it.

There went my borunñnvotzp .

He sat a while.

'And then, what?'

'It should start coming. Images should start rising up from your innermost being.'

He sat.

One doesn't have to be told it's a time for silence, and neither, apparently, did he. It's when images sounds and ideas begin flowing around and around in the mind of the receiver.

For me, it was simply a time of waiting quietly and observing the effect on the receiver. The loss of something that had been the centre of my aesthetic consciousness wouldn't normally begin to hit me until later that night. By then, in a normal exchange, he would begin talking about the images and ideas, thereby providing therapy for the giver.

I was preparing myself for the prospect that, given his disposition, that might not happen. I certainly didn't expect what happened next.

I suppose it has to do with the length of time I had been building the borunñnvotzp, his relative age and his cranial capacity compared to that of an Utz. Also the fact that my borunñnvotzp contained concepts that were opposite to his perceptions. It was as though a new reality were suddenly superimposed over his own consciousness.

About evening time, he lost his composure.

I cannot describe it in human words. An Utz, a Tzozk or some other like species would understand it. If I explained it to a human, I could only say it's the equivalent of weeping, sometimes quite hysterically.

So, it was I, who had to give him therapy.

## 23

Heptosh and Too Dha spent all afternoon talking about things that interested them both: Eetoo's life then and now, the history of the Fa-ti-zhi people -- Too Dha was particularly interested to hear of Eetoo's love interest and the resulting dilemma.

A few hours before sundown, a man came running to the hut. Too Dha identified him as Ngowa.

He began talking excitedly to Too Dha.

Too Dha looked dismayed. He explained in Nephteshi, 'He says, Eetoo killed Ni Gwah, and all the villagers tried to catch him to kill him for murdering a god. Eetoo ran up the hill, but when he was cornered, he stood at the edge of the whirlpool and shouted, "That wasn't Ni Gwah. Ni Gwah was dead already! I have saved your lives from becoming phantoms like him!" And then he jumped into the whirlpool.'

'The whirlpool!' exclaimed Heptosh. 'The same whirlpool Ni Gwah fell into?'

'Yes. I'm afraid so,' said Too Dha, sadly.

'Then I know where to find him. Come with me!'

Too Dha and Ngowa followed Heptosh at a brisk pace back to the old market and into the canyon. They uncovered the spaceship, Heptosh opened the door and they got in.

Ngowa's reactions were similar to Eetoo's when he rode for the first time.

Heptosh lifted off and they rose slowly up to the height of the mountain range and went along straddling the ridge. The tops of the mountains were giant square blocks standing on their ends. They looked like tall cliffs from the Famtizhi side, actually more natural looking than the six sided crystalar formation that formed the mountain ranges on Tok. The latter were, in fact, natural.

At the foot of the cliffs on the right, Too Dha recognised the land, as it all sloped down towards Famtizhi territory. Soon, they could see the village in the distance. Further ahead again,they were directly opposite to the location of the whirlpool.

Heptosh stopped there and examined the landscape to his left by the last light of the day. Then he manoeuvred carefully down the slope and began looking into each valley and canyon. Finally, using the night vision faculty, he found one where a waterfall came down from the mouth of a cave into a pool -- the one in which he once swam with Eetoo and Ni Gwah.

They descended.

There wasn't any flat ground wide enough to land a ship, so he had to hover over the pool. From there, they could see into the cave. He shone the landing light towards it.

A wet head appeared in the entrance, Eetoo's.

Eetoo climbed down to the pool. Heptosh brought the ship as low as he dared. He had to keep his hand on the controls so as to keep the ship steady. He opened the door and told Too Dha to throw the rope out. Eetoo grabbed the rope as Too Dha and Ngowa pulled him up and Heptosh kept the ship from tipping over.

Finally, Eetoo was inside. He began to describe a harrowing ride down a water chute and a drop into an underground lake. Had he not been an expert swimmer like Ni Gwah, he would certainly have drowned.

Heptosh navigated the ship back the way they came, and landed near Too Dha's hut.

Before he got out, Too Dha spoke to Eetoo at length. Then the two got off. Heptosh and Eetoo departed for Tok.

'You tell him about Tsaphar?' Eetoo asked.

'Yes -- he was asking me all about you.'

'He say I must win her hand, and bring her to Kalodzu-Famta to meet him.'

'Well, you know what you must do then,' said Heptosh.

## 24

the shepherd's apprentice leads the sheep to water  
the shepherd lost in a reverie

It's suddenly hit me that I've made enemies of two groups now, my whole village, and all the boys of the Akkadi community -- almost everyone I know! Do I have any friends?

I even feel like I've killed my best friend, but Heptosh and Venerable Too Dha both say I did the right thing.

If I did so right, why do I feel so bad?

On top of all that I keep thinking what a horrible species humans are, and how other species would be happier without us about. No matter what we do, we just can't become indefinitely good and live okay with other species. Even if we're good, our kids grow up bad. Probably all because we can't get our sense of beauty, like that old Utz said.

There's nothing pleasant I can think about -- apart from Tsaphar.

So, I'm in love with someone who's been promised to someone else. That's a pleasant thought?

As usual, Nakham is here, and acting as though the whole world's rosy. Just wait till he gets to be my age.

We've finished watering the sheep, we race to the stream, I throw off my tunic, we jump in. We're splashing about and jumping off the rock. I come up after a jump and look up.

The gods! There's Tsaphar! Er -- it's okay, my body's under water.

'Shalem,' she says. 'That was a nice jump.'

'er -- Shalem.' She saw me, then!

'You look startled. Aren't you pleased to see me?'

'I am,' I assure her.

She lets her frock slip from her shoulders and steps into the water. She has on a simple linen cloth wrapped under her left arm with the two top corners tied over her right shoulder.

'Should you do this?' I say.

'It might be our last chance to see each other.'

She swims about, takes and underwater dive, comes up on the other end. On the second time, I follow her. We come up.

'You went to your home planet yesterday.'

'Nakham told you?'

'Yes. Did you visit your village?'

I start telling her the story of what happened.

We get out of the water and go to sit on the rock together. Nakham wedges himself between us, as though it were his job to keep us apart.

I finish the story: 'Now all the villagers call me murderer and god-killer. Only Old Man Too Dha say I do the right thing. Heptosh, he even proud of me. But I not feel good. And now, all the Akkadi boys, they hate me too.'

'That's right, they do. There's only one way you can ever come near our house again without them killing you. That's if you come to bring a challenge.'

We're quiet for a while.

'You've been practising at fighting with Mr. Heptosh,' she says.

'Nakham tell you that too?'

'Yes. I warned him not to tell Rav, though. Are you thinking of trying to fight Tsim?'

'I think of a plan.'

'I'd try to talk you out of it, but I'm so desperate now. Tsim is coming to the house at noon in three days with a band of his friends from the village to demand I be given to him. I can't stand to think of my life with Tsim. I'd rather die. But I don't know how you could ever defeat him.'

She stops talking for a while. She's starting to cry. I put my hand out and touch her shoulder. It's all I can do with Nakham separating us.

She starts talking again. 'But I'll tell you anyway, how it's done -- the way of our Fathers. You challenge him officially by bringing a groin cloth and throwing it at Tsim's feet when he comes to the house. The fight must take place in front of the house of the bride, where you come out and throw the cloth at him. If you do that, the boys can't touch you. They must let you fight and accept the outcome.'

'That the way of the fathers?'

'Yes, and I hate it. Akkadi populations on other planets don't do it anymore \-- we're so behind.'

'Why a woman not choose herself?'

'I don't know. But even if he beats you to a pulp, at least the boys in town won't have you on their death list any more. You could start coming for lessons again.'

'I have a plan.'

'What?'

I jump back in. So does she. We come up at the same time. We're looking at each other.

Nakham surfaces, between us again.

'Oi! Nakham! You're too much!' says Tsaphar.

'Do you remember smoking beehive?' I ask.

'Yes.'

'Can you do it again?'

'I think so.'

I look at her. 'I come to your house in three days.'

'I won't say anything. It's more than I can hope for.' She's getting teary-eyed again. 'Just in case I never see you again, I want to tell you, I think you did the right thing in destroying the bionic copy of your friend. Also, I'll pray to Elkhem every day that you find the golden plates.'

We get out. Tsaphar puts on her frock and pulls off her wet undergarment from underneath. I put on the tunic.

She kisses me on the cheek and starts walking off towards her house.

## 25

Heptosh was listening to Eetoo's account of his conversation with Tsaphar, when he heard a knock at the door. It was Neuryzh.

'Can you and Eetoo accompany me to my abode? There is someone there who needs to speak with you.'

'Yes. I'll call Eetoo.'

The three walked to the carrier at the side of the mountain.

As they ascended to Neuryzh's mountaintop home, Neuryzh said, 'I hope you will forgive me. I disregarded your advice, and that of Friend Fra. I presented my borunñnvotzp to Blazz.'

'The risk was yours to take,' said Heptosh.

'But the effect it has had on him is profound. I've been sitting with him for two days. I think that talking to you will be therapeutic for him. In fact, he has asked for you two, Eetoo, especially.'

They stepped into the crystal cave. Blazz was perched quietly on a pillar. He turned his head to them as they entered.

'Ahh, Friend Eetoo, the human. This time, I'll not attempt to frighten you. In fact, I -- er -- am glad you chose to come. And Heptosh, chief negotiator, I now regard you with more than slight interest.'

Heptosh noticed a new seat had been carved next to the other seat he usually sat in on his visits. Neuryzh helped both humans to their seats.

Then, he said, 'As soon as you are ready, Friend Blazz, you may begin. Take your time, if you need to collect your thoughts.'

Blazz took his time. 'Before I begin, I wish to beg of Friend Eetoo, to forgive me for the very bad things I did and said. Flashing my dome at you was uncalled for. It reflected the hate I had in my heart. I also said things during our drink at the market that I'm sure frightened you badly. Can you forgive me?'

Eetoo nodded timidly.

Blazz went on: 'As Friend Neuryzh has probably told you, I have just had the rare experience of a borunñnvotzp. It has opened my mind to some factors that we Groki, as a species, had forgotten.

'As you know, the Utz and the Groki are two species of the the same genus -- brothers, if you will. Where the Utz take things very slow, their life cycles being rather long, and they take their time in letting things settle in, we Groki take things quickly -- too quickly, as it would seem. We tended to rush, and in the process, we neglected things we should have regarded as important. That left us quite unprepared for certain events, such as the arrival of humans.

'I must be truthful. The Nephteshi empire was a bad experience for us. When the humans first ventured into space, they probably didn't know other species existed. When they first met members of other species, they no doubt felt intimidated, and treated them as a threat.

'I understand that on their home planet, they tended to conquer and hold any other group of humans that they could. They maintained that habit towards the intelligent species that they met. It seems, the species they came across the most, as they expanded their domain, were the Groki. We Groki were caught unprepared. From their newly built planets they pirated our ships, they invaded some of our planets; some, they cleared of Groki and other life and resettled them with humans. Interstellar travel became a nightmare for the Groki.

'As time went on, the Groki began to develop strategies to counter the human menace. One of these, I understand, is of current interest to you: implants of bionic cells.'

'So the Groki are responsible!' exclaimed Heptosh.

'Yes. We invented them. I understand they devastated your home planet. That's why I also hoped you would come today as well. I, as a Groki, wish to apologise to you, a Nefzedi, for the destruction of your nation.'

Heptosh was silent.

Finally, he said, 'I can forgive you. For the moment, I'm not sure about the entire Groki species. I think I can understand the reasons. I understood, even before now, that humans were very brutal in our time. However, Nefzed, surely wasn't a threat?'

Blazz answered, 'The ones who actually introduced bionic implants to Nefzed were most likely the bionics themselves. We had left off all activity with bionics apart from monitoring their movements from time to time. The bionic cell has simply done what it was programmed to do, spread itself to every corner of the universe where it can find humanity.

'However,' he went on, 'the strategies that we carried out were effective. The Nephteshi empire collapsed. We began to act on a further strategy of eliminating the human race from all corners of the galaxy, even intending to pursue them to another galaxy they had begun to colonise, but suddenly a message arrived, loud and clear, from the most Supreme Being, the one you call Elkhem. He made it known to us that humanity, as do all other species, has the right to exist in the universe as long as the planet of their birth is still habitable. We also understood from that message that the time allowed for humanity had been limited to a certain period. I understand that period is nearly over.'

Neuryzh added, 'This, however, isn't the first time the human planet was marked for destruction. I understand that once before, their time was extended as the result of the ratification of some sort of agreement between one of the clans of the human species, and the Supreme One. It's possible, something like that is about to happen again. I think Eetoo's mission has something to do with that.'

'I can only hope you're right,' said Blazz, and took a deep breath. 'Now I have another confession to make. The Groki community has been anticipating the end of the time allowed for humanity. A group of us have recently settled in this sector for that purpose. Some of my colleagues are the ones responsible for what has been happening to the bionics on Kalodzu-Famta. However, as I know the access code to the bionic command circuit, I'm prepared to assist you in securing that planet.'

'That would be of great help, indeed,' said Heptosh.

'I found the report on your bionic friend interesting. Is it so, that he had received some sort of brain to brain download that prevented his bionic brain from accepting the programming?'

'A "bio-media upload" actually.'

Neuryzh interjected, 'That's not at all like our brain to brain transfer. It's data that is written in a format that is transferable to the human brain, but it's done in a rather crude way. The knowledge becomes indelibly part of the human consciousness at a fundamental level, not as simple data that can be used or discarded at will. It's that fact alone that made it possible to override the programming.'

'I see. In that case, if I simply close off the central command circuit, he could remain as a valuable tool. His bionic brain would have the capacity to pass commands on to other bionics, alter their programming and even close off their control circuits. I can pass to him the information on how to do all that when I close off his circuit.'

'A big help, indeed,' said Heptosh. 'One more question that is of interest to us. Do you know the location of the planet Nephtesh?'

'That information would be of value to Eetoo's mission,' said Neuryzh.

'I'm afraid I don't, said Blazz. 'The fall of the Nephteshi empire was a bit before my time. I know of some who would know, but I don't know who I could ask who wouldn't immediately be suspicious of my reasons for asking. You see, it's not in a sector I've ever had much to do with, and locations of various planets are usually on a need-to-know basis. Groki are like that. But I understand that they started a colony in the Zuyun Galaxy, which carried on as a branch of the Nephteshi Empire. They might know.'

'Ah!' said Neuryzh. 'The very galaxy I explored with Friend Eetoo. The planet we found may have been a major hub. You kept the coordinates in your computer, did you not, Eetoo?'

'Yes, I did.'

'Of course, how open they would be to us, remains to be seen.'

Heptosh had one more thing to say. 'Friend Blazz, I, a Nefzedi, who were close allies to the Nephteshis, think I should apologise to you for the way we treated the Groki. I have understood, for some time, that our actions were unjust. It has occurred to me, since we began this conversation, that an apology is in order.'

With that, they departed.

## 26

the pupil and his guardian walk to the place of challenge  
not knowing what the day will hold

I had that dream again last night, the same one I had those other times.

It's weird! The first time I had it, I didn't know anything about any part of it. The second time, I knew about the golden tablets from the writings, and I knew they were the same as in the first dream. I still didn't know who my friend was who was with me. Last night, I had exactly the same dream, no changes at all from the other times, except I knew that the girl who was with me was Tsaphar!

That makes me feel a bit better.

So, today is the day. I've got a groin cloth Heptosh used when he was young, wrapped about my hand. I've double checked that everything in the clearing near the beehive is ready.

It feels good to have Heptosh with me. I'm glad someone believes in me.

The house is shut. It's almost noon, so they've probably shut it to keep Tsim out. I think I have to come out from inside the house to challenge him, so we knock loudly.

When they know it's us, they open up.

Shav is upstairs looking out the window for Tsim and his gang.Ima and Tsaphar are trying to talk me out of it. They're sure Tsim will absolutely kill me.

Heptosh tells them he's practised wrestling with me, and he thinks I have a good chance.

They say Rav probably won't come with them because if there's trouble, it would be awkward for him to decide whose side he should be on.

I tell Tsaphar about my dream.

Shav shouts, 'They're coming!'

This is it! Oh! Elkhem! Help me!

They open the door, and I walk out. The rest of them are standing at the door.

Tsim and the boys look at me. They look as though they're ready to tear me apart.

Sure enough, Rav isn't there.

I hold up the groin cloth. They're suddenly quiet.

I throw the groin cloth at Tsim's feet.

'Okay, then,' he says.

He throws off his cloths. I throw off mine.

He puts on the groin cloth. I don't have a groin cloth to put on. I'm just standing there -- nothing.

'Pssst! Eetoo!' It's Shav, calling from the upstairs window. 'Here!'

He throws a groin cloth down to me. I put it on.

Tsim looks like he's not taking this very seriously though. He probably thinks I'm easy takings.

He's got his fists up. I'm ready. He's probably wondering why I don't have my fists clenched.

He throws one -- a test punch, I can tell, but I'd better strike while I can.

I grab his arm, and twist it while I put my right foot around his leg and and trip him. He's down -- but he slips out.

He back on his feet again, but now he looks more serious.

I can tell he's tensing up to get me good on the next punch.

He lunges, but I dodge him -- he does it again -- ooh! He got me in the side of my face! I stagger a bit but I recover.

I should have seen that -- the one-two punch. He did that a few times in the market.

He's coming again -- there it is, the one-two punch. I dodge the first one and -- perfect! I got him in an even more secure hold! I twist and force him to the ground.

I've got him so he can't reach me with his other hand. I hold him that way until he knows he can't get out. Then I start to twist his arm so he thinks I'm going to break it.

It takes a while, but finally he knows he's not going to get me off of him.

'All right!' he says.

'We not finished,' I say. I've still got his arm. 'We do this fight different way, okay?' I'm talking in Akkadi.

'What?'

'I give you chance to fight again, but you fight, not me, but Tsaphar!'

'Huh?'

'But you don't hit with hands.'

'How then?'

'You fight with bees.'

'With bees?'

'Yes. With bees. You try to take all the honey from the beehive. If you can't, then Tsaphar try it. If she can, but you cannot, she can choose her own husband.'

He's quiet for a while. I'm still holding his arm.

He shouts, 'No one can take honey from a beehive! The bees kill!'

'Will do, or no?' I twist his arm some more.

'Okay! Okay! Will do!'

I let him go.

Everyone's standing there, looking at me. Tsaphar's looking happy for the first time in a long time. I smile at her. She smiles back.

We all walk round the house, out to the back, over the fence, and into the woods. I think I'm turning blue where Tsim punched me. At least now, I'm wearing more than that skimpy groin cloth.

Shav walks up beside me. 'Eetoo, I don't want to fight. I just threw you the cloth for you to use because you don't have one -- that's okay?'

'Yeah -- okay.'

Oh! I get it! He threw me the groin cloth, and now he's afraid I thought that meant a challenge. 'No, no!' I assure him. 'I not think you fight! Thank you for the cloth!'

He looks relieved.

I lead them to the beehive in a small clearing. It's just right for the honey.

I can see the pole, the string, some dry branches and a metzig torch under a bush where I put them earlier today.

I point to the beehive. All the boys are looking at it.

I go to Tsaphar. She's standing with her mother, Heptosh and Shav. I point to the stuff under the bush. She smiles, and we watch Tsim walking about, looking up at the beehive.

He picks up a rock.

We all back up into the woods.

He's holding the rock, looking up. He thinks better.

He finds a stick. He's climbing up the tree.

This hive's on a rather thick branch, so at least he can't try to break it down.

He's in the tree, trying to get up the nerve to hit the beehive with the stick.

The stick's already closer to the hive than the bees like it. A couple of them come out and sting him.

'Ow!' he cries, and jump down.

He keeps this up for about an hour. He gets a few more stings.

He finally gives up.

'If Tsaphar can take all the honey out of that beehive without getting stung, Eetoo can have her.'

I say, 'No. If she win, she pick her own husband.'

Rav just now arrives. He finds out what's happened, and says to Tsaphar, 'You won't get the honey out. Eetoo made it look easy, but I tried it with the smoke. It's not as easy as it looks.'

I nod to Tsaphar.

She goes to the bush I pointed her to, takes the poll, ties the dry branches to the end of the poll, lights the branches, and waits till it's smoking just right like I showed her. I don't have to say anything to her. She takes it to the beehive, raises it up to a safe distance from the hive, just close enough for the smoke to cover it. She keeps it there, making sure the smoke goes evenly all over it.

When it's time, she puts the poll down, takes a stick, climbs the tree and goes at the beehive.

All the boys suddenly run into the woods. They look back in time to see her scraping the bees off, and they're falling on to the grass.

Next, she grabs the honeycomb in her hand, breaks it off the tree, and jumps to the ground.

Victory!

* * *

We're walking back to the house. Tsaphar's carrying the honeycomb.

'Why did you do it this way? Why did you say "No" when he said you can have her if I get the honey?' she asks.

'I don't want you to marry me because I win you like you were some wall ornament. I want you to choose me because you love me.'

She kisses me on the cheek. 'I do choose you! I love you more than ever!' She starts nursing my bruise.

Heptosh and I stay at the house for a special dinner Ima fixes for us. We have the honeycomb as well.

They ask a few more people to come, and we have a good time. Rav is very quiet.

Even though I'm legally a man, they don't really consider me old enough to get married. We're engaged now anyway!

## 27

the pupil works at his sums  
his betrothed, at a computer, records transactions

family members come in and out  
they relax, they engage in light conversation

they're hard at work again

Here comes Rav again. This time Tsim is with him.

'Shalem, shalem,' he says to all of us.

'Shalem,' Tsaphar says. She's more friendly with him now.

'Eetoo, teach me some more of your moves afterwards, okay?'

'Yeah, okay.' My Akkadi has improved so much, even he speaks it to me now.

Rav says, 'If you change your mind about fighting in the market, we'll put money down on you, won't we, Tsim?'

'We sure will!'

'Naaa,' I say.

'Ima,' says Rav. 'We're off to meet Elder Akhan's younger daughter.'

'Good luck to you then,' says Ima.

They're off.

I'm confused. 'But I thought...'

Tsaphar explains, 'Tsim decided to keep his end of the bargain, even though you wrecked his plans to have me, so he's introducing Rav to Shalma anyway.'

'Oh.'

I get back to work. I still have a page of sums to do, and then I have to read another one of their legends from their book, and do some writing. By the time I'm finished, I guess, Tsim will be back and I'll have to teach him some more wrestling moves.

Then there's tomorrow. Market days are a lot of fun now, since Tsaphar and I are free to talk and go places together. But I can't wait till next week. We're taking Tsaphar along to Kalodzu-Famta, when we go with Blazz.

I don't know if the people in the village are still upset with me or not. I still feel bad about that.

Whatever.

But I'm looking forward to having Tsaphar meet Venerable Too Dha.

## 28

Heptosh drove to the spaceport in the carrier with Eetoo and Tsaphar. Blazz arrived with Neuryzh, who saw them off.

'The last time a Groki was ever in one of these,' commented Blazz, 'was undoubtedly an unpleasant experience.'

'I hope all future experiences between Groki and Human can be happy ones,' answered Heptosh.

'I hope so too.'

They took off the usual way. Then, Heptosh flicked the reverse beam transmitter for the Kalodzu-Famta solar system.

'Speedy things, aren't they!' said Blazz.

Heptosh found the planet, and simulated linear movement towards it.

The approach to a planet was always the time consuming part of a journey.

To kill time, Heptosh said, 'Friend Blazz, you couldn't have been any more right regarding Amanhep.'

'Has he begun to show his colours?'

'Yes. Since gaining the upper hand in negotiations, he has consolidated his own power within the Indigenous Nephteshi Alliance, and is using every resource they have to build himself up. They've even restricted their knowledge of relocation technology to the repair of their own ships.'

'I understood that was in their plans. Have they begun to expand yet?'

'They've subdued Imtep. A couple of other planetary governments report that they're being pressured to come under their jurisdiction. The Department of Human Affairs has all but forgotten about the Kalodzu-Famta project in their preoccupation with Amanhep's new empire. I'm only free to make this trip whenever I wish because they currently can't find the opportunity to send a negotiator.'

'My sources tell me they've also attempted to annex human planets in a few other sectors as well.'

Heptosh began plotting a course for landing.

'Let's visit Mr. Too Dha first.'

Heptosh consulted his computer clock to check where the Famtizhi area would be in it's rotational course. He had timed the trip to fall during daylight hours.

'As long as there's no recognised government controlling the space port, we can land wherever we choose.'

Things looked sufficiently quiet on the ground, so he landed the ship behind Too Dha's hut.

Heptosh and Eetoo got off first, and met Too Dha. They told him Tsaphar was inside the ship along with a non-human.

Too Dha had never met a non-human, so they thought best to mentally prepare him.

Tsaphar got out first, and Eetoo introduced her to his Venerable Too Dha. Too Dha assured her in Nephteshi that he was, indeed, deeply moved to meet the future wife of one who was like a son to him. He commented on how beautiful she was. They embraced.

After that, Blazz emerged. He softened things by immediately greeting Too Dha in Famtizhi, which he had received as a brain to brain download from Neuryzh.

After that, they decided to take Too Dha along to visit Shan.

They all got in and lifted off.

Heptosh signalled the port for landing. The answer appeared to be from Shan, himself.

He navigated the ship through the entrance to the port, and landed. Shan was outside, waiting.

Heptosh pulled the lever to open the door, and Blazz got out first.

He simply stood at the door of the spaceship, and silently sent signals to Shan, who stood quietly receiving them. Then, Shan turned around as Blazz approached him and began doing something to the back of his neck.

After that, Shan turned around. Blazz signalled for the others to come out.

'Before shutting your control circuit, I uploaded all the information you'll need to do to other bionics, exactly as I've done to you. You can also disable them completely, if you choose, by sending the appropriate signal. You should be able to hear any signals sent by the Groki, but they'll no longer have involuntary access to your control circuit.'

'Thank you, very much,' said Shan.

'Now,' continued Blazz, 'how many other bionics are there on the planet?'

'Thirteen active bionics, including myself, and 1,976,243 in hibernation, sealed off from any energy source in the downtown section of the subterranean city.'

'Good. We can deal with them as ...'

'Sir! I'm receiving a signal. The Groki operatives suspect an intrusion and are approaching the planet!'

'Then quickly! Please upload me a map of the subterranean structure.'

After a short pause, Shan said, 'There.'

'Good. Where can I find a means of transportation I can use in the underground area?'

'That way.' Shan pointed.

'Good. Heptosh, take Shan with you and get as far from this planet as possible. I'll try to get Friend Too Dha back to his home through the underground passages. I'll deal with the other bionics as I meet them.'

'But --'

'Hurry! Keep Shan with you. He'll be an extremely valuable tool. Now go! Friend Too Dha, come!'

Heptosh obeyed. He, Shan, Eetoo and Tsaphar got back into the ship and they took off through the port door.

Some ships appeared in the sky above.

Heptosh engaged the relocator for a far away spot. They were gone.

Again, ships appeared.

'Don't tell me they're able to read my reverse beam signals!'

He entered a new set of coordinates, and they were away again.

Again the ships appeared. He could detect a thernguin net beginning to form between them.

As long as he kept moving, he could evade any such device. He kept inputting coordinates and flickering.

He sought Shan's assistance.

As Heptosh continued flickering, Shan connected Heptosh's computer to the relocator and entered a series of random locations. Heptosh initiated the input from the computer, which altered their location about four times in quick succession -- faster than the Groki could reappear and read their reverse beam signals.

They lost the Groki ships, but they were now looking at their galaxy from a distance.

To be on the safe side, Heptosh decided to contact the Toki space port, using the twin particle communicator.

An answer returned almost immediately: 'Please stay where you are until further notice. The Inter-sector Groki Alliance has issued an alert, identifying your ship as a rogue. According to galactic protocol, we have to explain your business on Kalodzu-Famta and clear up any misunderstanding before allowing you back. The sector council is in the process of doing this, but it may take a while. We will contact you as soon as it is clear.'

They waited a while. They had some lunch.

Tsaphar didn't seem hungry. Heptosh thought he could guess why. She and Eetoo were talking in low tones, but it didn't look as though Eetoo's short answers were building her confidence.

Heptosh gave it a try: 'It'll only be a matter of time, Tsaphar. We were on a valid mission on behalf of our sector, and the sector council won't let it rest until they see it through.'

Tsaphar seemed a bit happier.

A few hours later, Heptosh sent another message.

The answer came: 'There are complications. The Groki Alliance insist you have been interfering with one of their projects. We are also making inquiries as to what project they could possibly have in our sector, and why we weren't informed. They are making things difficult by insinuating that our sector council is responsible for Amanhep's Indigenous Nephteshi Federation's expansion to some human planets in one of their sectors. They raised the question of you being somehow working for them, which we assured them, you're not, but they require further verification. We may need to send a legate to their central planet.'

'This may take a long time,' said Heptosh. 'I hope we have enough food and water.'

'How about landing on a disused planet?' said Shan.

'It would take a long time to find one.'

They sat a while. They had another meal.

Then Heptosh said, 'Eetoo, do you still have the coordinates to the Zuyun galaxy?'

'Yes,' said Eetoo. He opened his computer and found them.

Heptosh entered them and flickered the relocator. The galaxy appeared before them.

'Where was that planet you found? Friend Neuryzh says they spoke Nephteshi. I wonder how hospitable they will be to us?'

'But Neuryzh wouldn't land there! Is it safe?'

'Neuryzh was piloting a non-human ship. They would have seen him as a threat. If we approach the space port using the proper protocol, they ought to allow us to land and take off again.'

Eetoo gave him the coordinates. They flickered, and were immediately inside the galaxy, not far from a star. They located a great blue and brown planet and navigated towards it.

Heptosh turned on the port beacon locator, and found the main planetary port. He then navigated to a position directly above it and flashed the standard request for landing permission -- one he knew had been in use for hundreds of years on human planets.

He got one in return: 'Please identify yourselves.'

He signalled back: 'We are Nephteshi speaking humans from the Milky Way Galaxy.' That was the ancient human name for their home galaxy.

They returned: 'Please stand by. Your request is being processed.'

They waited.

Three ships came up from the surface and hovered about them. Heptosh kept their ship still.

Permission came, specifying that they follow the escort. They slowly descended, the other three keeping pace with them.

Bulbous looking buildings and garden platforms atop stems, as Eetoo had described them, began coming into view. The ground wasn't visible, only a brownish grey mist.

The landing beacon was coming from one of the platforms, on which stood a few other ships. They landed there.

They got out. Standing about them were half a dozen men in exotic looking costumes. The front three, dressed in some sort of uniform, were armed with distance weapons. The unarmed men looked more dignified.

'We are unarmed,' said Heptosh. He held his hands out.

'Welcome to planet Thevsos,' said the most dignified looking man, in a barely intelligible accent.

'Thank you,' said Heptosh.

'Please follow us this way,' said the man.

They followed the three dignified looking men to an indentation in the middle of the round platform. The three armed men came behind.

'Everything you see about you is but a reflection of the glory of our great emperor, Pharaoh Thakniathep the Fifth.'

In the middle of the platform, they stepped down onto a circular floor panel with a post sticking up the middle. One of the men pressed a button on the post, and the whole floor began to descend.

Another level came into view, and the round panel on which they stood continued to floor level. It was a large round room with doors leading off into other rooms. Here and there, were tables and seats.

The escort led them through one of the doors, into a room with crystal panels lining the far wall -- windows to the world outside. There were padded seats arranged in a circle with a table in the middle.

'Please sit down,' said the leader of the group.

They all sat down. The leader introduced himself as Vengus.

'The style and state of development of your ship confirms the origin you claim. However, please tell us, being from the other galaxy, how did you find the location of Thevsos?'

Heptosh thought it better to be evasively honest. 'A non-human being who is friendly to humans knew of your location. He gave us the coordinates.'

'The only ship from outside our galaxy we've seen for the last four hundred years was a non-human ship that appeared above our atmosphere close to three months ago. Would you know anything about that?'

'The only thing I can say,' said Heptosh, 'Is that your presence in this galaxy is also known by a group that is decidedly unfriendly towards humanity, and we have reason to believe, may soon arrive here in large numbers for malevolent purposes.'

'Who would they be?'

'The Groki Alliance.'

'Ah, the legendary Groki,' said Vengus.

One of the other dignified gentlemen motioned towards Shan. 'This man's skin looks quite abnormal. Is he, indeed, a human?'

'He is a bionic,' said Heptosh. 'We should also warn you about bionic implants, as they have also been used against humanity in our galaxy. Our friend, Shan, however, has been rendered 100% safe, due to the fact that we have gained access to the code key that alters some of the more dangerous properties. Perhaps, it would be best to allow Shan to speak for himself.'

Shan explained bionic technology to them and they listened intently. One of them took notes on a computer pad.

As Shan spoke, Heptosh explained quietly to Eetoo and Tsaphar what had gone on, as they weren't used to the accent.

When Shan had finished, Heptosh said, 'Another reason for our visit is, we need to find the location of the planet Nephtesh, in our galaxy. As you probably know, the Nephteshi empire no longer exists and certain information has been lost. We need to investigate some things on the home planet. Could you help us?'

Vengus answered, 'I will see what I can do. I would like to forward our gratefulness for the valuable information you have brought us. In the meantime, please make yourselves comfortable. The toilet facilities are through that door.' He pointed to one of the side rooms. 'Some food will be brought to you soon. Please enjoy the hospitality of our great emperor, Pharaoh Thakniathep the Fifth'

At that, the three gentlemen left the room.

A few minutes later, some attendants brought in trays of exotic food. The three humans refreshed themselves and dined.

## 29

the young adventurer and his espoused behold with wonder  
their eyes absorb scenes that exceed the mind

This is quite a place. It makes me feel better about humanity.

I'm sure that humans living in a place like this must be a good thing for everyone. There are no other species living in this galaxy, so I'm sure they're not hurting anyone.

Tsaphar thinks so too. Seeing all this has made her forget the mess we're in.

If I blur my eyes, this looks like a flower garden. The posts that hold up these buildings are green, and the buildings, themselves, look like flowers and seed pods. The sky is blue, with clouds, and the brown mist down below looks like soil.

'It's impossible to see the ground from here,' Tsaphar says.

'I saw it with Neuryzh, but we went too fast, I can't see anything,' I say. 'Neuryzh say it's not beautiful.'

'I wonder what it is?'

'Maybe dirt and rocks or something.'

There are several lines of carriers, like trails of ants. These carriers fly pretty high above the ground, not like the ones at home. Now and then, one of them leaves the line and goes to one of the buildings.

* * *

Heptosh looked up just as the door opened again. It was, Vengus, followed by an attendant carrying folded up garments. Vengus said, 'You four have been invited to be the guests of His Majesty, Pharaoh Thakniathep the Fifth. This is indeed a great honour. Please change into these clothes, as it will be a formal occasion.'

Heptosh repeated the invitation and instruction for Eetoo and Tsaphar.

The attendant distributed the garments to each one. They changed.

'Please come this way,' Vengus instructed.

The four followed him out the door.

'We'll go to the palace via this tele-gate.'

He led them across the central room to what looked like a full length mirror set in an unusually thick frame.

'Follow me, please,' said Vengus, and he stepped in. The mirror surface vibrated as he stepped through, sending out ripples as though it were water.'

Eetoo exclaimed, 'Hah?'

Vengus had disappeared. He wasn't even on the other side of the frame.

'It's okay,' said Heptosh. 'It uses relocation technology. You go ahead. We'll follow.'

Eetoo touched the surface with his finger first. Then, he stepped carefully through. Tsaphar followed, and then Heptosh, and finally Shan.

They found themselves in a room completely different from the one they left -- not like the interior of a flower at all. It was a wide corridor floored and panelled with marble slabs and lined with pillars with gold trim of an ancient style. On one wall, were window frames, but the exterior was black and spotted with stars. There was no ground outside, only stars.

This was not the planet they landed on -- not a planet at all, as far as Heptosh could tell.

'Step this way, please,' said Vengus.

They followed him down the corridor. It felt as though they were walking down hill. Then, they came to a seam in the floor structure. The floor ahead of them slanted upward. They stepped across and now it felt like walking uphill. The section of floor was straight, but the further they went, the less steep their path seemed, until after the middle of the floor section, where it turned again into a downhill slant.

Further ahead, there was yet another section of floor, again slanting upward, after that, another, until they disappeared beyond the ceiling, as though they were inside a giant wheel.

They came to a door.

'This way, please,' said Vengus.

Here was another corridor. This one led off perpendicularly, but not far from the end where they entered, was circular panel in the floor with a railing around it. Vengus led them through an opening, and pressed a button on the rail. They began going up through a round hole in the ceiling.

Now, they were in a large room ornately decorated with murals and sculptures. Hieroglyphics carved into parts of the wall near the doors proclaimed the greatness of the present dynasty. Dozens of dignified looking gentlemen and ladies stood or sat about the room.

'We will wait here until we are called,' said Vengus. 'Meanwhile, make your acquaintance with some of the gentlemen.'

He immediately introduced them to a man dressed from the neck to the waist in nothing but gems linked by their gold settings, and from the waist down in a thick silk sarong.

'Please greet Lord Attanothep, ruler of the fourth sector.'

'Very pleased, indeed, to make your acquaintance,' said Heptosh.

'All to the glory of our gracious emperor, Pharaoh Thakniathep the Fifth,' responded the lord. 'I understand you have travelled from a far galaxy to bask in his presence.'

'Er -- well...'

'It is a great honour, indeed, which His Majesty has bestowed on you, in granting you an audience so quickly! Please, come and meet some of the others.'

The lord introduced them to various ones, who all seemed to be equally enamoured by their king.

To one gentleman, Heptosh commented, 'I have never seen such fond respect for a leader.'

'The Teknesh Dynasty has made this galaxy the envy of the gods. All of His Majesty's subjects owe Him a debt of gratitude that could not be paid in seven lifetimes.'

One man seemed to be different from the rest. Vengus introduced him as Thonoktep the historian.

'Greetings to you,' was his brief reply.

'Please give our guests the history of this palace, in its brief form,' said Vengus.

'Yes Sir. This palace is a rotating cylinder, built in the third year of the reign of Pharaoh Nukesh the second. It has its own orbit in the galaxy, just as the stars do, and receives its energy from the galaxy's centre. This is said to be because the Pharaohs of the Teknesh Dynasty are to be compared only to the stars themselves. The structure of the cylinder consists of ...'

On and on he went, until Heptosh was quite lost.

Finally, Vengus said, 'Mr. Thonoktep, you may stop now. Our names are being called.'

Thonoktep ended his talk in mid-sentence as Vengus led them towards a large carved wooden door at the far end.

Shan said quietly to Heptosh, 'The man, Thonoktep, appears to have had a major bio-media upload.'

'You can tell?'

'He's so full of facts that he's nothing but a walking encyclopaedia. There's not room enough in his memory to so much as process the knowledge he has, so he's only capable of spewing out factual information -- perhaps a few calculations.'

They reached the big door. 'The throne hall,' Vengus said.

It was huge, and not like a room at all, but the inside of some sort of machine. It was cylindrical shaped, and the floors were straight sections set into the side of the cylinder. They were carpeted with a multicolour design. The far wall was an eighteen-sided polygon consisting of a crystal window into the universe. As it faced the galaxy's centre, it lit the entire room. A blinding patch of light shone in the middle of the outside sky, gradually dimming at the edges into the familiar milky trail that had inspired the ancient name for their own galaxy. The image of the star studded trail visibly rotated within the giant window frame, sections of which were separated by columns, one per section of floor, giving the impression of spokes in a giant wheel. Going from the middle of the window, where the columns joined it, was something like a giant stone axle running the length of the cylinder.

The court herald announced their arrival.

Seated facing each other in straight rows in the section of the floor before them, were the nobles, advisers and people in waiting. Straight ahead, standing before an elevated golden chair, with his back to the great window was an old man dressed in clothes of the same style they had been seeing.

'Welcome to the Teknesh kingdom. You are the first visitors we've had here in the four hundred years since the fall of our allies in the home galaxy.'

After they all bowed politely, the king asked of each of them their names and other details about themselves. Heptosh spoke for Eetoo and Tsaphar, and repeated some of his questions for them.

After that, the King invited them to follow him across the floor and over some more floor panels until they had reached one that was almost at a right angle to the one on which the throne sat. Some dignitaries accompanied them, including Vengus and the historian. Here, there were couches, cushions and tables set up for a feast.

They followed the King's example, sat down and ate.

As they dined, the King and various of his advisers told them of the history of their empire within this galaxy. The historian did his share in some of the more detailed explanations. He would stop abruptly, sometimes in mid sentence, when either the king or one of the aids said, 'That's enough, Mr. Historian.'

Apart from the story of one or two rebellions that had to be put down, it mostly told of the development of various technologies, advances in science, and automated processes that improved the quality of life for all. In effect, they had created a paradise -- all to the glory of the Teknesh Dynasty, of course.

Heptosh, again, translated everything into Milky-Way Nephteshi for Eetoo and Tsaphar.

The meal was finished and the group was escorted back to the tele-gate.

Some of the others, including the historian, accompanied them.

Heptosh nudged Shan. 'Ask the encyclopaedia man if he knows the coordinates for the planet Neptesh.'

Shan was walking next to the historian. His reply was immediate.

'The location of Neptesh in the year of its fall:...' (a long list of numbers) '... and moving in the direction of...' (another list) '...at the rate of speed that stars travel, given the movement of the galaxy in the direction of ...' (more numbers) '... the central star of the system should be located at precisely...' (another list).

'Did you catch all that?' asked Heptosh.

'Yes, all recorded.' Shan tapped his head.

They were now in the corridor along the edge of the cylinder.

'Where is this palace located?' Heptosh asked Vengus.

'That is a state secret. No one knows, save a select group of the king's advisers.'

'How many planets are there in the empire?'

'About fifty-two planets in the Teknesh galaxy. Every fifty years or so, we build a new one.'

They went through the tele-gate and arrived at a different place than before. It was an eight sided room. Four facing sides each consisted of a tele-gate, and between these, crystal covered windows made up the other four sides, showing a vast landscape all about. It was a mountainous, well forested area, but there were no doors leading outside. The room itself had some comfortable chairs.

Vengus led them to the tele-gate on the side facing them. Now, they appeared to be entering into the front door of a residence.

He told them, 'These will be your quarters while you are here. Please make yourselves comfortable. The robot attendant will show you where everything is. If you need anything, please press this button, and you will receive what you need.'

Vengus took a small box and pressed a button on its face. Immediately, a contraption glided into the room and a voice spoke in a Teknesh accent: 'What may I do for you?'

'This is technology that has been developed for the people of the Teknesh kingdom, thanks to the graciousness of our Great Pharaohs.'

Heptosh said to Vengus, 'Thank you very much for your kindness. I think we should be on our way first thing tomorrow.'

'So soon?'

'Yes. We were given the information we needed by your competent historian. I think we can proceed with that.'

Vengus looked perplexed. 'I'll inform the appropriate authority,' he said, finally.

He stepped through the mirror surface.

Shan spoke softly to Heptosh, 'I, too, can read relocator signals. This planet we've been brought to is quite some distance from the one where our ship landed.'

The automated attendant showed them about the building. It had various rooms for eating, sleeping, lounging and doing toilet. Large windows opened into green hills, tree covered mountains and a winding river -- obviously not the planet Thevsos.

They found their clothes and other belongings that they had left in the waiting room on Thevsos.

Heptosh wondered if they had intentionally chosen a spot to bring them where the sun was just setting. It had been a long tiring day.

## 30

crystal window offering a panoramic view of the wooded landscape  
enter: yawning young adventurer

That was the most comfortable bed I've ever slept in. -- Wow, what a view! This place would be great for raising sheep.

It's heavier here than on the planet with the flower city. Tsaphar feels it too.

Here she is. 'Have you tried the bath yet?'

'No.'

'You should! The water is warm, and it flows all about like a waterfall. Just ask the machine thing. It'll show you.'

I find the box with the button and press it. It comes, and I ask it to show me the bathing room.

It doesn't seem to understand me. Tsaphar yells, 'Bath!'

It takes me to a room with a big pool, and water swishing all over the place. It tells me to sit in the corner with the round seat. I take off my clothes and sit down. Tsaphar's right.

I'm sure that if Blazz had seen this galaxy, he'd never have thought humans were like rats and cockroaches.

There's just -- well -- the way they go all gogglie-eyed every time they talk about the emperor.

* * *

Heptosh stood up to greet the gentlemen who appeared through the tele-gate.

'Greetings from the royal court,' said the first one.

'We extend ours, likewise,' said Heptosh, with a bow.

'It pleases His Majesty to extend to you the invitation to join the royal staff as the royal advisor on current affairs of the Milky Way Galaxy. You and your friends will be given a handsome living allowance, and a residence on the planet of your choice.'

'I'm deeply moved by the King's offer,' answered Heptosh, 'But the fact is, we have pressing business in our own galaxy.'

'Unfortunately,' said the second gentleman, 'it's been deemed contrary to the interests of the court to allow you to return. To do so would compromise the security of our galaxy. As it is, no one apart from a select few know the location of the Milky Way Galaxy, and as far as we know, up to now, no one on the Milky Way Galaxy has known the location of ours. We simply can't run the risk of letting you return.'

'We're not the only ones who know,' said Heptosh. 'Others will, no doubt, be following to find out what happened to us if we fail to return.'

'We will deal with that prospect when it arises. Any action we take at that time will be calculated to discourage any further entry into our galaxy. In the meantime, until you give an answer to the royal court, you and your companions will be quartered on this planet.'

The first gentleman said, 'Ixos, the governor of this planet has invited you to lunch at his residence. Please have yourselves ready by noon. Good day to you.'

With that, they disappeared through the tele-gate.

Heptosh sank back into his seat.

Soon, Tsaphar and Eetoo came in. Heptosh told them of the message from the royal court.

Both looked pale.

'We can't go back then?' said Eetoo.

'Not unless we think of something.'

Shan spoke up. 'I can try to see which of the gates may take us close to Thevsos. If we can get there, we could try to get the ship.'

'I'm sure they have the place closely guarded.'

'That is the same ship I gave to you on your first visit to Kalodzuland, is it not?'

'Yes, it is.'

'Then, I'm capable of controlling it from a short distance. If we can simply be somewhere close by, I can make the ship come to us.'

'An idea,' acknowledged Heptosh. 'See what you can do when the time comes.'

* * *

the same window, same breathtaking scenery  
but the joy is gone

'Why did you bring me here?' Tsaphar's saying.

We're sitting together in a soft chair looking out the window.

'I didn't know it was like this.'

'They say it's a paradise, it looks like a paradise, but it feels like hell now. The people here are so -- I don't know! I hate it.'

'Me too,' I say.

'Everything's to the glory of that -- that bastard!'

'Why everybody say nothing but good -- as though they worship him?'

'I wish I was at home. Even your planet would be better than this. But that's in another galaxy now. They're going to keep us here -- in this...' She starts crying.

I put my arms around her.

She's better after a while.

## 31

Heptosh heard the bell and realised that it was probably someone there to fetch them for their lunch engagement. He called the others.

They had on the clothes they had been given the previous day. Their old ones, along with their other belongings were stashed in Eetoo's shepherd bag, which they decided to take along in case they saw their chance to escape.

They gathered in the room with the tele-gate, and an attendant led them through. They found themselves, again in the eight sided room they had come through the day before. The attendant adjusted some levers at the top of the gate frame, and led them back the same way.

This time, they were in a different place altogether. The most prominent aspect was the giant crystal window on their right that showed a very different landscape than Heptosh had ever seen before. Giant creeping vines hung from extremely high cliffs on one side, and a waterfall poured down another section, feeding a river that ran to a sea, visible on the side opposite the cliffs. There were trees -- extremely large ones, but after a second look, it was evident that a few of these were the leafy outcropping of the giant vines. From looking at the shadows, it was either the dawn of the day, or sunset.

A second feature, less prominent than the first, was the elderly gentleman who stood to greet them.

'Welcome to Nevthese,' he said.

He was neatly dressed in white, with far less ornamentation than everyone else they'd met so far.

'Thank you,' said Heptosh. 'Where are we?'

'Nevthese is a natural planet with native vegetation and wildlife, totally uninhabited by human or any other intelligent life, save for this building at which you've arrived. Come, I'll show you around.'

They were in a corridor running along one wall of a round building. The crystal panel on the right composed the outside wall. More of the planet came into view as they followed their host. For a while, all they could see were the rock cliffs, but soon spaces between these showed them the sea again. These were, in fact, giant pillars of rock that seemed to go endlessly up and up until they got lost in the cloud cover. More breathtaking landscape followed.

'My name is Ixos, by the way. I understand you come from the galaxy of humanity's birth?'

'Indeed, we do. My name's Heptosh, these are Friends Eetoo and Tsaphar, and the robotic gentleman is Mr. Shan.'

They came to some steps that descended into a much bigger room, both taller and wider but still panelled on the right side by the view. A table was set for a meal.

They sat down, and robots began bringing various exotic dishes to the table that the guests had never seen nor tasted before. Heptosh thought meat was from some animal he was sure didn't exist in the Milky Way galaxy.

'This is quite a place you have here,' Heptosh commented.

'It's not mine. Besides my duties as governor of the planet where they've put you up, I'm also the game-keeper for this resort planet. The emperor sometimes comes on hunting trips, and so do many other lords and dignitaries. Some simply come to view the wildlife and enjoy the scenery.'

'Lots of good hunting?'

'Oh yes! I could take you all on an expedition sometime. Now, this landmass is safe for humans, but on one of the other continents, you'll find some very large carnivores that could eat a human in a single gulp. Some of the more seasoned hunters prefer to go there. A few have never returned. I never go myself. Those who do are required to bring their own transport. Fortunately, our emperors have been sensible enough to stick with this continent, or we'd be going through them like defective robots!'

The conversation went to other aspects of the planet, some facts and trivia about this and that.

Heptosh was enjoying the conversation more than any since arriving in this galaxy. Suddenly, he realised why.

As soon as the attendant was off to supervise the robots, Heptosh ventured, 'Mr. Ixos, out of curiosity, why is it you don't append every statement with something about the glory of the emperor, or the dynasty? In fact, you're the first one we've met here who refers to him as a human being!'

'Hah! You've noticed that? I'll let you in on a little secret: they never got around to giving me my bio-media upload.'

'Bio-media upload?' gasped Heptosh.

'I suspected as much,' said Shan.

'I'm, what you call, "safe". I have no ambitions, and I'd prefer to take things as they are and enjoy life. Those people who have had it become so -- what shall I say -- obsessed ... er -- I understand you're slated to become the advisor on intergalactic relations?'

'So, they've informed me.'

'Then you're due for one yourself, I'm afraid, and I've already said enough that I would have to do a lot of explaining to cover up, should you suddenly think too much about this conversation after they've instilled unquestioned loyalty in you.'

'I don't intend to accept an upload,' said Heptosh.

'I'm afraid your intentions may not mean very much in this galaxy. Everything, as you've heard, is to the glory of the great Teknesh Dynasty. Your only hope would be to return to your own galaxy.'

'They've said they won't allow that.'

'That's to be expected. Have they impounded your ship?'

'I don't know. We left it at the spaceport on Thevsos.'

'They probably haven't done anything to it yet. Spaceports are hardly used anymore, since they've expanded the network of tele-gates. All they have to do is simply not tell you how to get there. Trying to find it yourself can be quite complicated.'

'It might be worth a try.'

'They'd catch up with you long before you found it -- that is, if you didn't know that the tele-gate to use is the door directly on your right once you arrive on our planet.'

'Simply go through that one then?'

'Oh no! There's far more to it than that! You'd have to know the three digits to enter into the panel at the top of the gate. That, I could never tell you as it would be an act of disloyalty to our great emperor!'

The attendant was returning, accompanied by the robots bringing the next course.

'So ...'

'Oh!' said Ixos, suddenly directing their attention out the window. 'Look at that flock of birds. They always fly together in that number, no more, no less.'

Heptosh counted seven giant white birds.

The attendant apparently didn't know that either, so he went to the window to get a closer look.

'Once you arrive at the main tele-gate centre of our planet, you'll find, besides the gates -- I forget, now, how many windows?'

'Err --'

'Now, whatever that number is,' he said hurriedly, 'you can simply double it to get the shape of the room. My chief architect designed it himself.'

He glanced over at his attendant, still at the window, and said in a lower tone, 'Now, I haven't told you anything but assorted facts about some of the birds of this planet, and the shape of the tele-gate centre on our own planet. I can only warn you that if you're caught trying to gain access to the spaceport building of Thevsos, which you could probably only succeed in doing about an hour from now anyway, they would most definitely take you straight to the bio-media upload centre.' His tone got lower and lower, as the attendant began to return to the table. 'If worse comes to worst, you could try to escape to the ground level of that planet. You won't find it pleasant, but you could easily evade them there -- and personally,' he almost whispered, 'I'd prefer life down there to an upload. When you see it, just remember, I know what I'm talking about!'

The conversation went on to other interesting facts about the planet of Nevthese.

Exactly one hour later, they had had their fill and they got up to leave.

'I'll see you to the tele-gate here. Go through it and wait. My attendant will join you in about half an hour, so simply relax and enjoy the scenery through the windows of the tele-gate centre.' As they moved away from where the attendant was supervising the cleaning up, he added, 'While you wait, you may reflect on the number of birds you saw, how many windows there are and the shape of the room, and he'll soon be there to escort you to your abode. Remember -- it's the door on the right.'

They stepped through into the tele-gate centre.

'Seven birds, four windows, eight sides,' remembered Heptosh.

Shan went to the door on the right and adjusted the levers at the top to seven, four and eight. They stepped through.

They arrived in the lobby of the space port. Only one or two people were doing their duties in various parts of the room. The set of desks facing the tele-gate were unattended. So was the counter adjoining the lift. Apparently it was the time of day they didn't expect anyone, as Ixos probably foresaw.

'Do you have any idea how to get out of here?' Heptosh asked Shan.

'No. Perhaps we could see where the lift goes.'

They went to the lift, which was now a round hole in the floor surrounded by a railing.

Shan fiddled with the button box.

'Access to the landing pad appears to be restricted. I can only send it down, though this doesn't appear to go all the way to the ground. However, we could, perhaps find a carrier port.'

He manipulated the box until a round floor panel rose up to meet them. They got onto it, and started down.

'Sirs!' called someone as they descended past floor level.

Heptosh looked and caught a glimpse of a man in an official costume, running towards the lift.

The floor they came to looked like a carrier port. They were parked in rows throughout the big room. These were completely enclosed, not like the ones on Tok.

Shan was looking carefully about.

'The door is there,' he said.

They began walking down the row of carriers.

At that moment a gate opened. A carrier entered, made it's way to an empty spot and stopped. The door slid open and some people got out. The door shut again, as the passengers walked to the lift and went up.

'Can we try one of these?' Heptosh wondered out loud.

'This one looks most suitable,' said Shan.

He manipulated the side of the door with his fingers until it slid open.

They got in, and Shan went to the control box. After some fiddling around, the carrier lifted up to drive position. They could see all about them through the windows.

'Stop! In the name of the King!' someone was shouting from the direction of the lift. There came men dressed in official uniforms.

Shan spun the carrier about and drove it towards the big door.

'Let me see -- here.' Whatever he did seemed to work, as the big door opened.

Behind them, uniformed men were running. Some were getting onto another carrier.

As soon as they exited, the craft sunk down, and suddenly swooped up again.

The other carrier was giving chase. A few others materialised from somewhere.

Shan sped the carrier as fast as it would go. Then, he began to descend. They sunk into the brown mist.

The pursuing carriers were hovering overhead. Below, things began to come into view.

It was a vast city.

## 32

shadows morph into substance  
a world forms itself out of the brown grey depths

masses of four and five storey buildings, as far as the eye can see  
grudgingly give way to narrow streets

all the same colour as the clouded atmosphere  
which filters out what beauty could have otherwise been

laundry hangs out of every window  
drab clothing from every railing -  soaking up more of the same colour

while down below, the narrow streets churn with mule carts, people, children  
skin and clothing the same brown grey

So this is what I missed when Neuryzh drove through here so fast. He was right. It's the opposite of beautiful.

There are people down here. Thousands! I don't see how it's possible for so many to live so close together, but they're doing it. Some of them look like they're working. Others are just standing or sitting about.

'Some paradise this is!' I hear Heptosh saying.

They dash out of the way when we come down. Shan's driving this at ground level now, like the carriers back home.

They think the soldiers have lost us now.

Wait -- one of them looks like they've spotted us.

Heptosh thinks we can get away from them better on foot. Shan stops it. We get out.

Whew! The smell!

A lot of people crowd about. They're looking at the carrier, not at us.

A couple of them look as though they're going to take it from us by force.

Heptosh says, 'You can have it.' That seems to do it.

Shan forces a way for us through the crowd. He's very strong.

We walk away quickly and look back from behind a building.

I don't know how they breathe down here!

Another carrier has landed nearby. Some soldiers are getting out.

The people about our carrier are throwing things at them.

I guess the people down here don't like the ones upstairs.

We don't wait to see the rest of it. We just walk as fast as we can down some of the small streets.

This place is filthy! The ground and all the buildings are the same colour as the air, brownish grey!

Some kids are playing in the dirt. They look like rats, not people. Rats and cockroaches! Humans! I get the picture now.

Heptosh says if we can find a place wide enough, and it looks quiet enough, we'll get Shan to bring the ship.

There's still a carrier passing overhead every now and then. Every time they do, people look up and curse. There's plenty of places to hide here, though. But there's one right above us.

We wait under a canopy in front of a shop. A lady is looking at us.

She says something. It's in Akkadi -- sort of.

Tsaphar is talking to her now.

Tsaphar turns to Heptosh. 'She asks if we're the ones the imperial troops are after. She wants us to go inside.'

We go in. It looks like an eating place here. Her name's Tasha.

'We don't have any money,' Heptosh says.

'It's okay,' says Tsaphar. 'She wants to help us. They hate the empire.'

Tasha sets us down at a table.

'How did all these people come to be here?' Heptosh asks.

She talks Akkadi. Tsaphar translates: 'They all came as slaves and workers. In the early days, there was lots of work to do, building, mining, performing services, and as personal servants. Then, over the years, they slowly replaced them with machines and things, until now there's hardly any work for common workers to do. There are some factories down here that some of them can work in, but most of them use mechanical hands instead of human ones.'

'How does everyone live then?'

She asks Tasha, and she answers. I can sort of understand her, but I pick up what I miss from Tsaphar.

'We have our own economy now. We raise some animals and vegetables, but that's not enough. Each of these pillars,' she points to one of the giant stems nearby, 'has a sewage and rubbish disposal outlet, and some of the people near each one run it through a refinery to extract nourishing edibles from it. We also do the same with our own wastes. Our forefathers would have thought it disgusting, but we've been reduced to this, and now we don't think anything of it.'

Tasha gets up to get us something. I think she sees the look on our face.

'Don't worry,' she says. 'I have some turnips from my sisters garden.'

'Why is she good to us, if they hate the people upstairs?' Heptosh asks Tsaphar.

'I told her we came from the home galaxy of the Akkadis.'

'But it's different from the Akkadi you talk,' I say.

'I also studied Modern Akkadi. It's still a bit different, but I can still understand her.'

Tasha comes back with boiled turnips. It's sitting on a dish as though it were a roast lamb or something.

'We're actually fortunate in this neighbourhood,' she says. 'In others, people are starving to death, and in some places, they process the dead in the same way we do human wastes. There's lots of feuds. In the next community, people are killed every day. This one's more peaceful now.'

'Why the air dirty here?' I ask in Akkadi. It's all I can think of. It's making me dizzy.

'The factories,' she says. 'This planet is the manufacturing hub for the whole galaxy. All the things you see they use up there, they make down here. All space is used up, either by the factories, or our living needs. Even then, they still crowd us together still more when they need new factories. There's less and less space to grow anything. Just a few of our people work in the factories, but mostly, they use machines. In some factories, the machines are so complicated, they say we are too uneducated to run them, so only people from upstairs can work in them. Those ones are sealed up so the air is clean. We have to breath the smoke that the machines spit out.'

'How do the people put up with it?' asks Heptosh.

'They'll simply slaughter us all if we don't,' says Tasha.

My chest feels heavy.

We start talking about ways to get our ship down here. We need an open space.

'My roof,' says Tasha.

She takes us up -- three floors. It looks like she rents rooms out to people.

There are no more carriers flying about.

Good! I want to get out of here!

Shan starts to communicate with the ship. He can get the ship's location, and he can use the ship's scanner to get our own location. He says they haven't done anything to it yet.

It's on its way now, but he says some of the people on duty started running to action when they saw it take off.

We wait.

I can barely see some very tall buildings through the mist not far from us. There must be an awfully lot of people here.

Soon, out of the grey sky, we see shadowy thing coming down to us. We step aside to make way.

It lands.

Heptosh says to Tasha, 'We will try to do something for you. I don't know what yet. I promise we'll try.'

I see other shadows moving about in the sky above us.

Tasha thanks us.

We're off -- straight to Nephtesh.

Heptosh does something to clean the air in the ship.

We're out of there now, but all those people still have to live there!

## 33

Heptosh scanned the star spotted blackness that now appeared before them.

The historian's calculation of the amount of rotation the galaxy would have done in four hundred years was accurate.

'Let's take it that way,' he said.

According to his calculation, this should have been the star. He scanned the system for a planet fitting the description.

There it was.

Heptosh used his beacon finder to locate the port. There was a very weak signal.

Heptosh signalled for landing. There was no answer.

They descended slowly. Heptosh magnified the image for a view of the ground.

The area around where the landing beacon shone appeared to be half city, half jungle. There were streets, boulevards, lanes, all set out in geometric order, but much of it was obscured by dense forest. Major intersections featured humongous temples and palaces. At the end of one street, with a long pool down the middle, was the remains of an obelisk. The centerpiece of the city appeared to be a giant white pyramid.

They flew low over visible parts of the city. There was far more vegetation than would normally be allowed in a city. Trees were growing where they shouldn't, creeping vines stretched across streets and whole groves had managed to plant themselves at some intersections. Cracks in the pavement facilitated a variety of vegetation in most parts of the city, and some parts were overtaken by dense jungle.

Heptosh decided to land in an intersection not far from the pyramid.

They got out and looked about.

'Hoi!' There was someone coming towards them. 'What do you think you're doing? You can't just go landing those things anywhere, you know! This is a busy city! You're obstructing traffic!'

It was a bionic, limping towards them as fast as it could shuffle.

'Hold on!' it said. 'You're not bionic! Have you taken an implant yet? It's mandatory now, you know!'

'How old are you?' asked Heptosh.

'Er -- I'm -- let me see -- four hundred and thirty-seven years if I'm a day! I take care of myself, I do. I have all my parts oiled regularly -- when there's oil, that is. Now, your vehicle ...'

'Have you noticed there isn't any traffic for us to obstruct?'

'Well, yes -- things have been quiet lately. But law is the law. Remove this vehicle, and get yourselves in to ...'

Shan sent a signal to his brain, and he stopped.

'Now, can you tell us,' began Heptosh again, 'where we could find the tele-gate to the Planet of Red Earth?'

'Tele-gate? Red Earth? Hmmm. I remember something like that from school days -- hmmm -- it seems there was a tele-gate, but it didn't work, or something. Where? Hmmm. Well, you should ask Mr. Ingtos, the historian. You should find him in the library. Go down this street, turn left where you see the oak tree, go one furlong, and you should see it.'

They thanked him. Shan and Heptosh agreed they ought to put the old robot out of its misery. Shan disabled it.

They used the ship like a carrier and sped down the street to the oak tree, and then to the left until they came to the library.

They went in.

There were all sorts of books. Clay tablets sat in rows on shelves, parchments and papyri were rolled up neatly in bins, and codices were filed on their own shelves.

'I'm sure all these books would be valuable for learning the history of the Nephteshi empire,' remarked Heptosh.

They found Mr. Ingtos behind a desk. He told them the tele-gate was in the great pyramid in the middle of the city. It was approachable through secret passages, and that only members of the royal family were authorised to enter.

He would accompany them to the royal palace, but he couldn't walk. He had been seated in the same chair for close to a hundred years. They left him intac in case they needed any more questions answered, or hints on where to look. They got the directions to the royal palace and were off again.

The palace looked as though it were every bit as grand, in its time, as that of Teknesh.

They made their way to the throne hall, sometimes modifying the half functional guards, sometimes disabling them altogether.

They found it, complete with lords, advisers and ladies in waiting, about half of them still functional.

The king, though on his throne, sat perfectly still.

Shan had to read his circuits to get any information out of him. He hadn't moved a tendon in fifty years.

A prince by the name of Shaktec seemed to be the most suitable one to show them the way to the tele-gate.

They went to the pyramid.

That was in much better shape than the bionics. Pressing the appropriate tile was enough to release a catch so that a door on a counter-weight swung open for them quite easily. Heptosh lit a metzig torch, and they trooped in.

'No one has been here for at least 1000 years,' said the prince. 'It hasn't served any function, except as a centrepiece. I only know the way because it is the duty of members of the royal family to retain such knowledge.'

He led them this way and that, up and down ascending and descending passages until they came to a passage that appeared to be at the heart of the pyramid. There was a square granite stone on the ground, about knee high. Here, he stopped.

'Where now?' queried Heptosh.

'This is as far as I know.'

Apart from the stone, there was nothing but the empty passage that appeared to go nowhere.

'Is it in that direction?'

'No. My memory of the instructions takes us to precisely this spot,' said the robotic prince.

'There's nothing here.'

## 34

darkness all about  
but a light dawns in the young adventurer's mind

This place seems familiar in a way. I've seen a dark passage like this before -- but where?

I've seen that square rock before too. I even stood on it -- in my dream!

'Er -- ' I don't know how to say it.

'Yes, Eetoo?' answers Heptosh.

'I -- Er -- let me have the torch.' That's all I know to say. I never remembered this part of the dream until now.

Heptosh hands me the metzig torch.

I do what I remember from the dream. I get up on the rock and hold it straight up.

'Look at that!' said Tsaphar.

Everyone looks.

There's something shiny stuck into the ceiling -- some sort of crystal or something that sends a shaft of light down towards the wall. The shaft gets narrower and narrower until it's just a point -- like a star from a distance.

'There!' I say. I point to the wall where the beam of light hits it. 'The gold plates there! We just dig them out!'

'But it's nothing but solid rock,' says Heptosh.

He walks up to the wall where the light shines.

'But -- what's this?'

He puts his finger on the point of light.

'Wow!' He jerks his finger away, as though it were a snake.

Suddenly everything's shaking

'Wah!' I jump down.

Tsaphar rans and clutches on to me.

The wall where Heptosh put his finger is moving slowly downward. Behind it we see another wall, this one covered with lots of writing, some lines, and something that looks like a door frame in the middle. It doesn't go anywhere though. It's just solid rock in the middle.

'We were never told of this,' says the prince. 'However, this is very much like the ancient tele-gates. One would turn it on by placing this square stone into this socket.

There's a tiny shelf built in next to the frame, with a tiny stone block sitting next to a hole the same size and shape.

Heptosh does what he says. A blue light starts coming out from cracks about the inside of the frame, lighting up the room. However, it's still bare rock in the middle.

The prince says, 'The other end needs to be turned on before it will work. A legend says that will happen one day. In fact, the inscription here appears to refer to the prophecy.'

Heptosh reads the inscription in Nephteshi pictographs:

I, Imhotep, servant of Pharaoh Djoser, have closed this door from the entrance on the Planet of Red Earth, so that it shall no longer be used to remove resources from this planet. It shall be closed from henceforth until the day that a chosen son of Hamtep shall enter thereby, in order that he might seek for the golden tablets of Simtep.

'We're in the right place,' says Heptosh.

This is amazing! Tsaphar and I are reading it again and again.

'Why is it not open from the other side?' says Heptosh. 'Does anyone know the coordinates of the planet of Red Earth?'

The prince shakes his head. 'Imhotep was very crafty. It was said that he came here in person, and forcibly removed the record book containing the location of his planet. In those days, only a few key people were entrusted with such information. He even, apparently, hid this tele-gate, so no one has found it until now. According to our legends, he had predicted a time of drought for his planet. It was brought on by the early Nephteshis removing topsoil and vegetation from a large portion of that planet and placing it here. It would have continued indefinitely until that planet was rendered uninhabitable had he not closed this door. Over here, on this wall, you will see a map of the original kingdom of Nephtesh.'

He points to carved design on other side of the frame. I can see it looks like the shape of tiny mountains, rivers and an ocean with a coastline all around it.

He explains, 'Over here, you see the vast area that became desert as the result of the removal of soil. Over there, you see the city of Memphis, from which Imhotep administered the affairs of state. That's the great river, which empties into the Great Sea. Down here, you see the location of a pyramid, not unlike this one, and a giant figure of a cat with a human head, nearby. The other end of this tele-gate is located in a passage connecting the two structures.'

I can see it. It's a tiny little pyramid.

Heptosh is standing in front of the map. 'This is what it would look like from space then!'

'On a clear day, of course,' says Shan.

'Shan,' Heptosh says, finally. 'Can you read the reverse beam being emitted by this tele-gate?'

'It's not configured to any coordinates, but I can scan it for those that were last used... There, done.'

'Can you memorise this map?'

'Yes.'

'Why don't the two of us go and look for the pyramid at the planet of Red Earth and see if we can't open the door from that side? If we simply find a sea on that planet that has a coastline like this, I'm sure we should easily find it.'

They go off with the bionic prince. Tsaphar and I will wait here for them. There's enough light from this tele-gate to see by, but I have an extra metzig torch in my bag in case we need it. It's not too difficult to find our way out if we have to.

We wait.

We take a nap.

We wake up. They're not here yet.

We read the inscriptions a few more times.

We're getting hungry. We don't have any food.

I'm talking to Tsaphar about all the confusion in my head about humanity.

First, I was really happy about life in Teknesh, but now I've seen what they do to their people when they don't need them anymore. It's like they throw them away! The people living in the nice flower houses and the nice green planets don't care what happens to the ones living in the dirty air, eating their crap! They were cruel to the Groki in our galaxy, and there, they're cruel to their own species!

The Groki are right! Humans can be worse than animals! I have to find answers.

Tsaphar thinks so too. But she hopes we can get home soon.

## 35

Heptosh was confused by the fact that while the image in the pyramid had shown an ocean surrounded by land, most of the land masses here were surrounded by water.

There was no landing beacon to be detected on the entire planet.

Shan suggested that perhaps the ocean they were looking for was much smaller in scale. If it was, it would take longer to find. Their best chances of finding it would be if it were on the side of the planet still receiving daylight. Then, what about cloud cover?

Heptosh repositioned the ship to various angles. Maybe they'd be lucky.

A large portion of the planet that was moving towards dusk looked like a vast desert. This suggested the climate change resulting from the removal of the Nephtesh kingdom. The parts towards the North were covered in cloud.

Shan thought he recognised a part of a river from the map. They descended and began scouring that from a safe distance.

A wide swath of field in various states of ripeness denoted the area within reach of the river, in contrast to the desert sands beyond, stretching from the south all the way to the area covered in cloud. Cities and towns clung to the path of the river, and to dirt roads branching out in either direction.

This ship that Shan had given him had much better magnification than his own ship did. He turned it on full strength.

It all looked primitive. The houses were clay, the roads dusty; the only means of transport appeared to be animal powered on the road, and wind, along the river. Some boats, however, appeared to be using oars. There was no sign of anything that resembled a carrier or spaces ship. No landing ports. Everything looked hand made out of local material.

Heptosh noticed what looked like a large troop of soldiers. Their weapons looked basic: swords, bows, spears, body armour, large shield -- fine workmanship, but it suggested primitive metal forging methods. Some were on horses, others on foot. The leader of the troop wore a fine brass helmet with a plum sticking out. One of them bore a standard atop a poll, with the representation of an eagle. The ornateness of it, the manner in which he held it, and the way they carried themselves, and the response of the local people they passed, suggested that they represented something important to their civilisation. It reminded Heptosh of the imperial regalia of Teknesh.

The shadows were lengthening. Heptosh reduced the magnification so he could search over a wider area. The pyramid would be easier to spot in daylight, than using the night viewer at night.

They made their way along the river. The shadows had disappeared on the ground, but they could still see the sun setting from their elevation. There was still sufficient daylight. They hurried on.

Then they saw it. It was just as the map showed it. Near it was the statue of the cat with the head of a man. There were other smaller pyramids also in the vicinity, though not as fine as the one near the cat statue.

Heptosh carefully positioned the ship over the apex of the pyramid. It had a flat top that looked ideal for landing -- probably designed for it. Surely there would be a door there as well.

He began to descend carefully. The full moon was rising in the East. It was too dark to see if there were people on the ground.

He turned on the landing lights. Half way to touchdown, Heptosh turned on the night viewer.

There they were. People were running towards the pyramid from tents and buildings. He could see various encampments here and there, one right next to the cat statue. Farther off, there were buildings.

At the base of the pyramid, some people had started to bow down in worship, as though their ship were the chariot of a god.

They landed. They had attracted too much attention. If there wasn't a door on the apex of this pyramid, Heptosh decided he'd better abort the attempt and come back later. Maybe if he landed farther off in the dead of night he could come and make a search.

Heptosh and Shan made a hurried search. They could hear voices of the crowd below.

There was no door to be found so they got back in and made their ascent. Then they returned to Nephtesh.

It was still daylight there, so they landed in front of the pyramid and went in, following the passages until they reached the tele-gate chamber.

No one was there. The tele-gate was on. Obviously, someone had turned it on from the other side and Eetoo and Tsaphar had gone through.

Heptosh decided to leave it at that.

# Part 3 -- The Adventurer

## 1

Tsaphar held tightly to Eetoo's hand as they stepped into the unknown. Eetoo hadn't turned on his metzig torch, expecting to see by the light of Heptosh's on the other side.

Instead, they found themselves standing face to face with a man holding a fire torch. They couldn't make any features in the dim dancing light.

'Heptosh?' Tsaphar whispered.

The figure stood still a moment, and then spoke: 'Shalom...' He said some more that Tsaphar could barely make out. It was Akkadi, but even farther from her own native tongue than Tasha's, of Thevsos.

Eetoo simply stood silent, as he usually did in moments of indecision.

Tsaphar attempted an answer: 'Al ekem shalem.'

There was a pause. Then, the man began speaking in a dialect Tsaphar understood a little bit better, but from the way he was speaking, wasn't his native tongue.

'I am Hyrcanah, the son of Mattai ben Tsaddok. Are you the children of Ham?'

Eetoo said, 'I am Eetoo, a son of Kham-tep'

'I welcome you. Please come with me.'

Tsaphar wondered if she should ask about Heptosh and Shan.

They followed Hyrcanah down a corridor, up another, and proceeded through a network every bit as intricate as the one on Nephtesh. They came up steps into what appeared to be a large tent. There was a slab of rock standing behind them.

'I cover this entrance with a tent, so people don't see it. I will close this door.'

Hyrcanah pulled the slab towards the square hole from which they had emerged. It came down easily. Tsaphar could see that on the two sides of the slab, at the bottom, parts of the rock went down slots on either side. Apparently, they were attached to a counterweight that enabled easy opening and closing of the door. After the door shut, Tsaphar couldn't even see the seam.

They went out of the tent and noticed that it was pitched against a large structure. They were too close to it to see what it was. There were other tents about. It was night.

Some men sitting about a fire immediately stood up and looked at them expectantly.

'They have come!' Tsaphar thought he heard Hyrcanah say. 'These are my pupils,' he said to the two.

'How did you know we were coming?' Tsaphar asked.

'The time was right. Then, this very night, not an hour ago, we received the sign that was spoken of: a star descended from heaven and rested on that pyramid. It remained a short time and went up again into heaven.'

Hyrcanah pointed. They could see a large white pyramid, just like the one they had entered. It was bathed with a white light.

Tsaphar turned to Eetoo and whispered, 'Heptosh's ship!'

She wondered where the light was coming from. So, apparently, did Eetoo. They looked up.

There was a large white thing -- it looked like a planet -- up in the sky.

'What is that?' said Eetoo.

'Do you come from a land that sees not the moon?' asked Hyrcanah.

'I know that in the planet where my fathers came from, they had such an object in the sky. Does it become a small curved line at certain times in the month?'

'Yes,' he answered. Then he motioned towards the biggest tent. 'You have come a long way. You should rest yourselves. Join us in this tent.'

They followed him in. There were rugs spread out with a short table in the middle set with food. Hyrcanah motioned for them to sit down. They did.

He took a flask, said some words over it like a prayer, that Tsaphar didn't catch at first, and poured three glasses of red wine. They drank it together.

One of his pupils brought a basin for them to wash their hand in.

Hyrcanah, again, recited a prayer over the food in his own language. This time, Tsaphar caught some of it: 'Blessed be the Lord, our god, (something - something) fruit of the ground.' He broke a loaf of bread into three and gave them each a piece.

Then he said, 'I am surprised that I can understand your speech. I had expected that I would have to use one of the ancient languages of the Egyptians. How is it that you know the ancient form of our language, being the sons of Ham?'

Tsaphar answered: 'Eetoo, my fiancé, is of the sons of Ham, the son of Noach. He speaks the language of the Nephteshi. I also speak it. I am an Akkadi, and we speak the language we are speaking now. I taught him to speak Akkadi. He can understand me, but I don't know if he can, you.'

'Just a little bit,' said Eetoo.

'Nephteshi?' pondered Hyrcanah. 'I've only found one reference to Nephtesh in the ancient writings of the Egyptians. Was that a city?'

'It's a nation that used to be on this planet,' said Tsaphar. 'They moved themselves to a different planet, and became a great empire. They used this gate that you opened to go back and forth from the planet of Adam, but Imhotep closed the gate. He also removed the record of the location from the planet of Nephtesh, so no one could travel back and forth.'

'Imhotep. That would be our Patriarch, Yoseph. He knew of the Golden Tablets of Shem, and that a son of one of the clans of Ham that had removed from these lands would one day return to seek for them. Not many people know this. I have studied the ancient texts, some of which I have had to search for in caves and underground chambers.

'I also learned that Shem, the son of Noach, was revered as both a king and a priest in the ancient city that later became known as Yerushalayim. Then, it was simply known as Shalem. They gave him the title "King of Righteousness", and to some, that became his name: Melekhi Tsedekh. It's said that he hid the golden plates in an underground chamber under the city of Shalem, which later became Yerushalayim after King David conquered it. Now, there are many underground passages under the city. I have explored some of them. It is said that the prophet Eliyahu once descended into the passages, and discovered the golden plates. After he read them he returned them, knowing they were intended for the son of Ham. Eliyahu is said to have quoted this from the tablets:

'Six thousand years have been determined for the world to exist: two thousand without the Torah, two thousand with Torah, and two thousand will be the years of Messiah. If Messiah doesn't come, the final two thousand will be lost.

'Those who keep track of the times and seasons tell us that the third period of two thousand years is about to begin. Therefore, it must be the time of Messiah. Your arrival through the gate is further confirmation.

'Now, I wish we had more food and wine for the occasion, which is a special occasion indeed, but we are in a far place, where good food is scarce.'

Eetoo told him he thought the meal was very sumptuous. Tsaphar thought so too.

As they left the tent where they ate, they noticed that the giant structure before them was, indeed, the cat statue. The tent across from them was pitched so that it covered a portion along the side.

He showed them to another large tent where they found sleeping areas, one separated by a curtain.

'Sleep now,' said Hyrcanah. 'Tomorrow we have a long way to travel. We must stay in Alexandria until the time comes to go to Yerushalayim. Meanwhile, it may be wise if I close the door to your land for now until you have completed your sojourn.'

He left them with that and walked back to the cat statue holding the torch.

We've already travelled a long way, though Tsaphar. How much further could we possibly go if what we're looking for is right on this planet?

## 2

the river winds on endlessly in the hot sun  
the waterway flows forever forward

the stillness of the water occasionally broken by a boat  
a wooden craft driven by its sail upstream

on the bank, farmers till the dry earth  
houses, villages and groves of palm trees dot the landscape

on board, a crowd of passengers view the endless moving scene  
some gazing, some dozing, some engaged in small talk

This is the second day we've been travelling. I thought this planet, being the birthplace of humans, would have everything the other planets have, carriers and spaceships and all. To Hyrcanah, a ship is only a thing that goes in water. This is hardly more developed than the Fa-tzi-zhi villages. I'm sure that in a carrier, we'd have got there long ago.

Some of Hyrcanah's men men have stayed at the camp by the cat statue to guard it. I guess we'll need them there to help us when it's time to go back.

We rode on donkeys until our bottoms were absolutely sore, and reached the river. Then we had to wait until a boat came by.

There was enough room for us -- only just. It's so crowded we can only sit here, or stand -- no room to walk about, only to squeeze past if we need to crap over the edge. The rest of the time we have to sit and watch other people doing it.

The only other thing to see is endless fields and clay houses, and people either working in the fields or going places on donkeys or camels.

Hyrcanah says we should be there later today. Every time Tsaphar says she's tired I remind her of that.

It'll be an even longer journey to that city where the golden tablets are hidden.

Hyrcanah helps keep our minds off our problems by talking to us. No one else understands the language we speak, even the Jews (as he calls them). He says that's good as we don't have to worry about people listening in.

The language they speak now is Akkadi, but it's changed over a thousand years or so. Tsaphar's Akkadi is almost the same as the ancient language Hyrcanah knows. It hardly changed at all because Tsaphar's people lost 1000 years by travelling close to the speed of light.

Anyway, Hyrcanah has spent his whole life studying all the ancient languages and digging up stuff from long time ago, so he can read them. That's how he found out we were supposed to come, and found the way to the tele-gate.

He definitely knows a lot, but doesn't know anything at all about space travel, nor any kind of technology beyond building a fire, or using a pulley and a lever. He thinks the tele-gate is some sort of magic. He knows his maths, though.

I haven't seen a single metzig torch, nor even anything that takes a power cell. I wonder what he'd think if I showed him mine? What about my computer?

He looks confused every time we talk about other planets, such as having moons or not having moons. He probably thinks we come from some other part of the same planet or something. He even talked yesterday as though he thought this planet were really one big plane that goes forever in every direction. But he seems to know a lot about other things, though. He's studied a lot.

I could sure use a drink of coourzt right now.

## 3

Tsaphar felt much better now they were settled into Hyrcanah's home. The only thing that bothered her was that they would have to make that long horrible journey again before they could go home -- not to mention an even longer one to find the Tablets. Maybe she could stay here while Eetoo went on his own?

She finished washing herself and returned to the main room. Hyrcanah and Eetoo were seated on some cushions at a small table. There were writing instruments set out.

The pupils were at the house of study, transcribing manuscripts, so the three of them had this house to themselves. Eetoo was attempting to write some Akkadi letters with a long stick dipped in ink on papyrus.

'She can do it better,' he said, as soon as Tsaphar arrived.

Tsaphar sat down and wrote out the Akkadi phonetic letters for Hyrcanah. He picked it up and examined it.

'I've seen clay tablets with this form of writing. They used a stylus to make wedge shaped imprints in the clay.'

'We do that with computers,' said Eetoo.

'Pardon me?'

'Very much like a clay tablet,' said Tsaphar, hurriedly. She gave Eetoo a warning look.

He blushed.

'Ah,' responded Hyrcanah. 'Now, my understanding is that our father, Avraham wrote in this way. Now, let me fetch a manuscript I have, in which the language may be similar, but the writing is different.' He got up.

He went to a clay vessel and pulled a large roll of papyrus and unrolled it on the table. Wrapped inside was something that looked like old animal hide.

'I found this in one of the underground chambers in the city of Yerushalayim. It's an example of writing that we used before Ezra the Scribe re-wrote all of our holy texts in the new Babylonian text. Not much of this has survived.'

Tsaphar wasn't familiar with the alphabet, so Hyrcanah read it to them. She could understand it better than the form of Akkadi he spoke with his pupils. It was still not the same as Hyrcanah had been using with them.

She even recognised the story.

'Eetoo!' she said when he had paused. 'It's the song of the seven ages you recited for me!'

'Remarkable! So you your version of the tablets contained the passage from the book of Beginning! Let me fetch another document.'

He went to a chest which he unlocked with a key and brought out another roll. This one contained linen cloth -- not old looking at all, but it was marked up as though it had been rubbed evenly about with a stick of charcoal, except for what looked like Hieroglyphics that were left white.

'I made this rubbing from an inscription I found. Don't read it out loud, particularly this word here.'

Tsaphar and Eetoo read it.

'Wow! It's in Akkadi, but it uses the old Nephteshi phonetic letters!' observed Eetoo.

'It was the writing system used by the Egyptians.'

It was a set of rules directly quoting the person who's name Hyrcanah told them not to say out loud: 'I am ---- your God...'

'My grandmother used a name close to that for the one god she worshipped,' Tsaphar said.

Hyrcanah gave a look of interest and went on.

'This inscription was made only a few hundred years after the time of Yoseph, whom you know as Imhotep, by a leader named Moshe.

'Before he became our leader, Moshe had grown up in Pharaoh's court and was educated in the wisdom and writing of Egypt. Among other things, he probably read the stone tablets of Ham, of which your people have a copy, which would have been stored in the library in Memphis. He put all the existing oral traditions to writing along with commandments that he received from the Most High -- blessed be He -- the one Who's Name I told you not to pronounce. Those are the books we have here. Also he inscribed the Ten Words, which I have made this rubbing of.

'Now,' he went on, 'concerning this rubbing, hardly anyone, not even my pupils, knows I have it -- perhaps one or two trusted friends. The tablets containing the inscription were lost, along with the sacred box, the Ark of the Covenant, that contained them. I was alone when I found them. Because they are so sacred, and central to the worship of the Most High -- blessed be He -- revealing their location would cause political chaos. Were I not rightfully a priest, I would not have dared touch them, they are so holy. I only did so after much prayer and ceremonial cleansing. But their location must remain a secret until Messiah has restored the kingdom and ascended the throne of His Father, King David. He will bring peace to the world and solve the turmoil the nation of Yisrael is now in.

'Again, no one knows but me, a few close friends, and now, you two, but the location is known only to me.'

Eetoo had been examining the rubbings.

'These are almost like the laws we have,' he said.

'What laws?' said Tsaphar.

'Elkhem gave them to Old Man Noka after the flood. They are: everyone who murders without just cause must be put to death, there must be trial and punishment for the wrongdoer, do not eat a limb severed from a live animal, do not have relations with someone who isn't your own wife, do not take what is not yours, and do not pray to sculpted images.'

'Yes,' said Hyrcanah. 'The the commandments given to sons of Noach. We teach that gentiles who don't want to change their nationality through circumcision, can show their devotion to the Most High by keeping them.'

Tsaphar remembered, 'My grandmother worshipped Adonai as well -- but she kept an image of a bull.'

'Image of a bull --' Hyrcanah thought a while. 'Our people worshipped them at various times in our history. An early folk tradition was that the Most High rode on a bull. Many people, even since then, worshipped Him by bowing to a golden calf. However, in the wilderness, when Adonai gave us the Torah, He made it clear that we are not to make an image of any sort, even of a calf, nor to attempt to picture Him in any other way. Many people, however, did it in ignorance. Once one has begun to understand what Adonai requires, one must do repentance and follow the right way.'

'How do we do that?'

'Not long ago, a leader of one of our communities, also a priest named Yohannan, began proclaiming that the Messiah is coming. He instructed everyone to prepare themselves by undergoing immersion to signify repentance. He officiated the immersions at the Yardon river near the Dead Sea. He was put to death by Antipas, but we've continued the tradition. We have a miqva b'rit pool at our meeting place. If you wish, I will take you both there so you may immerse yourselves for cleansing of anything you may possibly cause you to be unworthy of Messiah's kingdom -- such as praying to the cow image. Now, it's rather unheard of to allow immersion to gentiles, but I'll go ahead and officiate for you if you desire it.'

Tsaphar and Eetoo agreed to do that. Hyrcanah put away the manuscripts and brought some bread and stew.

They washed their hands, Hyrcanah said the blessing, and they ate.

## 4

the young adventurers, accompanied by their host  
make their way down a busy street

We're on our way back from the building they call a 'synagogue'. That's a word from a language neither the Akkadis nor the Egyptaians or Nephteshis knew, but a lot of people speak it, especially here in Alexandria. It's called Greek.

Greek is spoken all over the place here. Another language is Latin, which is the language of the Roman Empire. They say the Romans control most of the planet of Red Earth now. A lot of people hate the Romans, especially in Yisrael. They make them pay out lots of money, and that's made life miserable for them.

I guess they must be something like the Nephteshi Empire.

There are lots of people in this city. It's sort of like Thevsos, but not as smelly and dirty. If I hadn't been there first, I suppose I'd be shocked about this place. This is just the Akkadi -- or what Hyrcanah calls, the 'Jewish' section. There's an even bigger section with other groups. The houses are all very close together, some with walls about them.

There are a lot of other synagogues too. The name of ours is, Beit Tsaddok.

Anyway, Tsaphar and I just took a special ceremonial bath. We said a prayer after him, and confessed some things we weren't doing right. In my village, we have the seven laws, but we don't always keep them. Some people pray to the spirits, and sometimes I've joined in with that. Also, I've eaten blood. I also came very close to doing what I shouldn't with Tsaphar. I confessed all that, and went down into the pool for what they call miqva b'rit.

I feel better now.

Hyrcanah's walking with me.

'If you and Tsaphar stay with me until we go to Yerushalayim in a few months,' he says, 'I can teach you both to read and speak Hebrew as it is currently spoken, along with some of the customs that you would need to know. When we arrive in the Holy City, I can show you where to descend into the underground passages below the city where you can search for the Golden Tablets. As far as I know I'm the only one who could show you how to go down. I couldn't lead you to the Tablets themselves, but you could get a start in looking for them.'

I gladly accept his offer. He goes on:

'As far as I and my pupils, and those of Beit Tsaddok congregation are concerned, you're one of us. As a believing non-Jew, however, you won't be able to participate in everything we do. For instance, when we go to the Great Temple in Yerushalayim, you can go in as far as the Court of the Gentiles, which is a massive courtyard adjoining the Court of the Women and the Inner Court. However, you would be forbidden to proceed further than that. Also, when we meet for prayers, you can join with us, but you could not be counted to make up the required ten men, or the minyan. If there is already a minyan, you are free to pray along with us.

'Now,' he goes on, 'our brethren in Qumram and other nearby settlements, being more isolated from the rest of the Jewish community, interpret the Torah by more strict standards. They call themselves the "Sons of Light". Others refer to them the "Essenes". Whereas we here accept gentiles who wish to follow Adonai by obeying the Laws of the Sons of Noach, our brethren in Qumram generally require that all be circumcised and follow the whole Torah, just as they do. I tend to keep quiet about minor differences of opinion, believing that Messiah will make all things plain. Some of them, therefore, assume that I believe as they, and some of them even regard me the rightful High Priest, being that my family descended from Tsaddok.

'If you stay with me, I'm sure no one needs to know you and Tsaphar are anything but devout Jews. You're young enough that no one should raise any questions.'

'Will Messiah come at the time we go to Yerushalayim?' I ask.

'Some of us feel deeply in our heart that it is the time of Messiah. There is a man in Yisrael that we're keeping our eyes on and our ears open to. His name is Yeshua ben Yoseph, of Natseret. He has been making some profound announcements and performing great deeds. However, the house of Hanan ben Shet, who currently occupy the office of High Priest, have been opposing him rigorously. So have the Herodians, who support King Herod Antipas, and even, unfortunately, some of the p'rushim, especially those of beit Shammai, and other factions. I'm afraid they are going to try to pre-empt his ascension to the throne of David. That's why we are willing to risk the trip to Yerushalayim as a large group during Passover, despite the fact that Herod Antipas exiled all priests of the line of Tsaddok from the Holy City. It's our support of this man Yeshuah ben Yoseph that unites us and the sect of Qumram. We believe that our arrival will coincide with Messiah's entry to the Holy City to claim the throne of His Father, David. No one will have the power to stop us then. He will restore the rightful priesthood to the Temple.'

All this sounds quite exciting. When I think back on all the things that have been happening that led up to this, the fact that Tsaphar and I are here now, I'm amazed.

## 5

Heptosh recognised the Thevsos spaceport when Neuryzh magnified it for him on the viewer. From there, Shan remembered the way to Tasha's roof.

Neuryzh's ship was good in many ways. He could alter the atomic structure so that it was totally undetected as they made their descent, and then, after altering it back again, keep it in transflective mode, so that to the people on the ground, it looked like the brown mist above it.

It was good of Neuryzh to respond so quickly to his twin particle communication. Heptosh would have never made it in and out of this planet alive in his own ship.

Having landed, Heptosh got out and walked to the edge of the roof. He called Tasha's name.

Tasha came out and looked. Her face expressed recognition.

She came up and opened the trap door to the roof. Only then did she see the ship.

Shan did the speaking, as Neuryzh had uploaded the Akkadi language into his head. Better not to let her see Neuryzh just yet. He was a mythical creature, as far as she was concerned.

'We need to speak to one of your community leaders about the possibility of moving all of you to a new and empty planet,' he said.

'I don't understand.'

'We have found that the original planet of Nephtesh is vacant, and is once again safe for human habitation.'

'But the empire will never let us leave.'

'We have a way,' said Shan, 'but we need to speak to your community leaders down here so that the move can be arranged in an orderly manner.'

She invited them downstairs to wait while she went to find Mr. Alef. He brought a couple of his deputies.

As soon as they all sat down at the table, Shan spoke. 'We have brought a tele-gate for the purpose of moving as many people as would like, to much more suitable living conditions on the former planet of Nephtesh. First, we need to know, how many people live on the ground in Thevsos?'

Half of the community leaders were suspicious as to what possible reasons Heptosh and Shan could possibly have in mind. The other half thought that whatever awaited them, at least was certain to be better than their present state. In the end, they agreed that, at least, there would be more room in Thevsos for those who chose to remain.

After some discussion, it was determined that there were enough people to fit comfortably into four planets.

'We have reason to believe,' said Shan, 'that there are enough vacant planets in the Milky Way Galaxy to fit all of your people. One is now ready for new residents. There is a large staff of robots that can assist in distributing the population to places suitable for farming and other trades. I suggest we begin moving them as soon as possible as, I'm sure, getting them all through the tele-gate with all their possessions will take some time. The the powers-that-be in the upstairs portions of Thevsos are bound to realise sooner or later that something is up. They may try to stop the exodus. Hopefully, we can get a major proportion of your population through the gates before they try to stop us. In the meantime, we can work on securing some of the other planets in the former Nephteshi empire.'

The next item of business was to find a location suitable for setting up the tele-gate.

Heptosh and Shan had found a pair of them while exploring an old storage depot on Nephtesh. Shan had got them into working order, made sure the built in twin particle transmitters were functioning, they had tested them at close range, and then got hold of Neuryzh.

Everything was finally in place. Families carrying all their belongings were already lining up.

Neuryzh had already left. As agreed, Heptosh and Shan were the first ones through. They informed the robotic staff at the other end that the exodus was beginning, and the people began pouring through.

## 6

Tsaphar enjoyed her studies because it helped keep her mind off home.

On Shabbat, the one day a week they rested from all work and study, she was left with her thoughts. She had to remind herself that this was the life she had asked for when she chose to become engaged to Eetoo.

But was this what she had expected?

If she'd learned anything from her mother, it was that some of the steps towards those things the heart most yearns for may be more difficult than they looked at first. At those times, one has to remind oneself what it is one wants out of life, and choose to stick with it. But what if it turns out that the thing one yearned for wasn't so grand after all?

That's what she was wondering about now. She wasn't sure if she now saw Eetoo the same way she did in Tok.

There, he seemed a quiet thoughtful sort of boy who acted decisively -- sometimes heroically -- when he knew the time was right. Now, he sometimes seemed too quiet, and she'd wonder if there was any thought going on inside his head at all.

He did need encouraging sometimes, and Tsaphar had done her share of that. She only wished he would encourage her in return.

Other times, he'd be sitting quietly, looking as though he were disturbed about something, and Tsaphar would break in, only to find that he was meditating over some piece of Jewish history or something else he had been learning.

Though Eetoo hadn't had the chance to do much of it in his life -- compared to others Tsaphar knew -- he had made the best of what learning opportunities did come his way. Tsaphar appreciated that about him.

* * *

the young adventurer muses - he   reviews the facts at hand

Here's the way I understand it: There were three people who changed history big-time for Yisrael. The first was Moshe, who received the Torah from Adonai (whom we called Elkhem) and wrote it in Akkadi, sort of what Tsaphar and I speak, but using the writing form he learned in Egypt, which is about the same writing system as Nephteshi. Four hundred years later, there was Sh'muel, who got more people to learn the Torah. Hardly anyone but the priests could read the original copies, so he wrote it in the phonetic script the people had learned from the Philistines. He also made David King. Then, four hundred years after that again, there was Yeramiyahu, who sort of shut down the Kingdom of David, but prophesied that it would come back. He also wrote the Torah in his language so everyone could read it. A bit later, Ezra wrote it using the new phonetic script they learned in Babylon.

That's the one I've been learning to read. Tsaphar's doing a lot better than me, because her Akkadi is so much better anyway. She can recognise words quicker.

I also spend a lot of time reading the older Torah scroll and the rubbing of the Ten Words. Reb Hyrcanah lets me keep them near my sleeping area, but I have to be really careful when opening the old Torah scroll, because it breaks easily. I just leave it open on my little table.

Anyway, it looks as though we'll be going off to Yerushalayim next week to be there for the feast of Passover. A lot of the people from the synagogue are going too. Most of them are also priests, sons of Tsaddok.

This place reminds me a little bit of Tok. On Tok, there were the Akkadi, the Nefzedi, and the different species of non-humans. Here, there's the Jews, the Greeks and the Romans, the local people, and then, there are people from the South that look like Nefzedi. Some of them consider themselves Yisraeli as well. Even with the Jews, there are different types. Each group has their own synagogue. Most of the people at this one are priests. There's another synagogue of Jews who are mostly from Babylon, and another, where they do it in Greek. There are a lot of those.

Every group dresses different. The Greek usually have plain tunics and togas and capes, the same styles as the Greeks and Romans. Some of them shave their beards, or parts of them, and others cut them so they're pointed. Some of them weave their hair at the back. The way the Jews from Yisrael and Babylon dress seems to have lots of curved lines -- when they're all dressed up, that is. Some of them have turbans wrapped about a tall hat in the middle. Their shoes curve up at the toes, and they have wavy patterns on some of their overcoats. Their beards are even combed into wavy patterns, and sometimes braided. Most of the folks at our synagogue just wear plain tunics and coats. They don't shave their beards at all, nor even braid them.

A lot of them, even a few from our own synagogue, remind me of the way the people of Teknesh were with their emperor. That sort of bothers me.

Today, there was a visitor at our synagogue that wore all the curvy lines. He even had a curved dagger stuck in his girdle -- a wicked looking thing. He seemed interested in meeting Reb Hyrcanah.

## 7

Tsaphar was still in the corner of the sleeping quarters that had been curtained off for her, when she heard people talking in the main room. She went out to see who the visitor was.

'I'm glad to make your acquaintance,' Hyrcanah was saying. 'Reb Mordecai ben Levi, is it?'

'Yes indeed.' It was the ornately dressed visitor Tsaphar remembered seeing at the synagogue. 'Rabban Hyrcanus, son of Matthias, I've heard of your fame from the people of Qumram and the other Essene settlements, and I promised myself that on my next trip to Alexandria, I would look up the future High Priest of Yisrael.'

'I wouldn't jump to any conclusions about that.'

'But you must have aspirations, certainly!'

Tsaphar didn't know what to make of him. He rather reminded her of a friend of Rav she once met in the market, whom no one but Rav ever trusted.

'I concluded long ago that my aspirations tend to lead me astray,' Hyrcanah answered.

This was not Tok, nor the Akkadi community. Tsaphar put the thoughts out of her mind.

Eetoo entered.

'Your pupil?' Mordecai enquired.

'Yes. Reb Eetoo, and Tsaphar, both my pupils.'

'The young lady is your pupil?'

'Does not the daughter of Rabban Gam'liel, a president of the Sanhedrin, accompany her father as a pupil? Is she not known to answer some of his enquirers?'

'Gam'liel, grandson of the rabban Hillel, of the p'rushim! That's right. I've heard your named praised by the local p'rushim as well! But the p'rushim would pull a cow out of a hole on shabbat, but the Essenes would wait 'till sundown. The Essenes would extract an eye-for-an-eye from a one-eyed man, making him fully blind for making the victim only half blind; but the p'rushim would settle for equal compensation. And the p'rushim of Alexandria also look to you as their High Priest! Come! One who can unite the p'rushim and the Essenes; should not such a one have a claim to the honourable title?'

'It is not I that unites them, but the hope of Messiah.'

'Ah, but do not Messiah, and "Righteous High Priest" go hand in hand?'

'Messiah will choose the High Priest. He must increase, the rest of us, decrease. He could even be the High Priest as far as it goes.'

'Be the High Priest? Is he not of the tribe of Yehudah?'

'Is it not written, I have made you a High Priest after the order of Melechi-tseddech? Of what tribe was he?'

'Some say it was none other than Shem, son of Noach,' answered Mordecai.

'If so, both Yehudah and Levi are of his tribe! Did not Avraham even paid tithes to him after the battle of the five kings? And was he not also King over the Holy City long before David?'

'Messiah, as his own High Priest! That's a new one on me!'

Tsaphar thought she heard him add under his breath, 'Sacrificed lamb, more likely!'

As he got up to leave, he asked, 'Should I expect to see you in the Holy City at Passover?'

'Do you expect to see me?'

'Do not the sages and diviners of the times say that this Passover is auspicious?'

'Does not the house of Hanan ben Shet make every Passover a time of longing for the auspicious?'

Mordecai paused. That last statement obviously meant more to him than it did to Tsaphar.

'I've heard it said by both the p'rushim and Essenes that you do plan to be there this Passover,' he said. 'That, all by itself, makes it auspicious indeed!'

'If I am there, I'm sure I'll see you. If I'm not, perhaps I won't,' said Hyrcanah as he saw him to the door.

He shut it, and Tsaphar thought she detected a sigh of relief.

## 8

the pupils of the priestly rabbi  
each holding a neatly folded prayer shawl and t'ffilin

walk together to their place of worship

Reb Hyrcanah said he has to meet with someone who said they'd pop by with a message, then he'll join us for prayers at Beit Tsaddok synagogue. We're off with the three pupils that live with us, Philip, Nicanor and Alexander.

We do this three times a day, but not always at the synagogue. Sometimes it's just the six of us or a few more if some of his other pupils are there. If there's ten men, it's a special time. We do it out loud. Sometimes he forgets he's not supposed to count me as part of the minyan. Once, I started to remind him, but he put his finger to his mouth to shush me up.

We're only half a furlong to the synagogue. There are about five of us, including Tsaphar.

'What are you packing for the trip?' asks Philip.

'Everything,' says Alexander.

'You reckon we won't be coming back here?' says Nicanor.

'Yeah. King Messiah will need us there,' answers Alexander.

'You sure it'll happen this Passover?' says Nicanor.

'That's what everyone says,' says Philip.

'Where is your faith?' says Alexander.

There are at least three other synagogues along the way. I see people going into all of them. I know that in two of them, they say their prayers in Greek. They also teach the Torah in the way of the Greek wise men -- sophists, they call them. Most of the men at Beit Tsaddok don't approve of that.

Nicanor says, 'There comes that man, Mordecai. What do you make of him?'

I look up and see him coming the other way.

Alexander answers him, 'He seems a nice chap. Asks a lot of questions though.'

'He claims to be a merchant. What does he sell?'

'I haven't seen him at the market at all,' says Philip.

He's close to us now, fingering the hilt of his fancy dagger.

'Join us for prayers?' calls Philip.

He goes past like he didn't hear us.

I say, 'He say he go to Yerushalayim for Passover.'

'Will he be on the same ship, I wonder?' says Nicanor.

'I hope not,' whispers Tsaphar.

We've arrived at the synagogue. We kiss our hand and touch the mezuzah and go in.

There's about a dozen men there already. They look at us, probably expecting to see Reb Hyrcanah.

'The rabbi will be with us shortly,' says Alexander. 'He says if he's late, we should start without him.'

They decide to wait a while.

They're mostly talking about the trip to Yerushalayim for Passover. A lot of them are sons of Tsaddok, and some are wondering how it'll go, since they're officially not allowed in. Some of them think that there will be so many of us, no one can stop us.

Someone calls for the prayers to begin. We pull our shawls over our head. Some of them tie the little straps about their arms and their head with the tiny boxes attached. Once they do that, they can't talk to anyone any more.

We start with some of the prayers and psalms, and go into something they call the benedictions. For most of those, they pray quietly.

I look about. Reb Hyrcanah still isn't here. I wonder what's keeping him?

The benedictions are finished, and there are more prayers and songs. Soon they'll be saying the Shema.

Some of the others are looking about. It's really not like Reb Hyrcanah to miss prayers.

We're starting in on the Shema. The first line of it, we say loudly and clearly.

We go into the rest of it.

There are more prayers and benedictions. One of the men has to say the mourner's kaddish.

We're finally finished.

People are taking off their straps with the little boxes and we're taking off our shawls. Everyone's wondering what's keeping him.

We start home.

A few of the men from the synagogue are in front of us. They were going to pop in to talk about plans for the trip.

I see the door. It's sitting half open.

Hyrcanah doesn't usually leave the door open like that.

Two of the men go in.

One of them rushes out with a look on his face. His tunic is torn.

'He's been murdered!'

'What?'

'G-d forbid!'

'Yes! On the floor -- throat slit wide open!'

* * *

Orphans, all

Things have been flying past my eyes so quickly I can't even think. It's like my mind is all numb. Everyone is that way, I think. If it weren't for Alexander, and Reb Shim'on, the synagogue president at Beit Tsaddok, we probably wouldn't have even got around to burying him. Everyone cries, 'We're orphans! We're orphans!'

I sure feel like an orphan now.

Everyone's got a tear in their tunic. A few even have ashes on their head. We're all in the main room of Hyrcanah's house. We all still sleep in the back room.

Everyone's sure Reb Mordecai is the murderer. They sent for the authorities and gave a description of him, but he's disappeared. They searched the docks. There hadn't been any ships leaving during that time. They even sent men to overtake the last caravan, and he wasn't with them either. He might have had a very fast horse. They reckon he was an agent of King Herod Antipas, or someone.

Yesterday was the day we should have left for Yerushalayim. We've missed the ship already so we'll have to go with a caravan. If it were up to most of us, we'd probably just sit about weeping, and forget about going. Alexander and Reb Shim'on are saying we must keep things on schedule. Messiah will come. Hyrcanah would have had us go no matter what.

'What of a High Priest?' someone says.

'Messiah will appoint a High Priest,' says Reb Shim'on.

People are going about the house collecting things we should take.

'Here's the Temple Scroll,' someone says. He picks up a giant scroll wrapped in a leather bag. 'We'd better take that. His family's kept it ever since we were driven out of the Holy City. Where are the other books?'

'Over here, I think.'

I remember I still have the rubbing and the old parchment next to my bed. I get up to fetch them.

'Are they all there?' someone says.

'Yes. The Torah, the Prophets, some of the the other writings, yes, all accounted for.'

They don't miss the old Torah scroll. I guess most of them don't know about that. Alexander says I should just keep it since no one else can read it anyway.

They've found some camel's hair cloth Tsaphar and I can use for a tent. We'll also pack the sleeping mats we're using now. There's a big bag I can fit the scrolls in, and another one for the tent and bedding. Other than that, there's my pouch where I keep my metzig torch and my computer, and spare power cell.

At last we're going to Yerushalayim.

I don't know what's going to happen there though. How are we going to find the underground passages below the city? Reb Hyrcanah knew about everything. We were all set to go, but suddenly, he's dead, and we're left with nothing. We really are orphans!

And now, no one but Tsaphar and I even know he ever found the sacred box, let alone where it is!

We talk to Alexander about it. He knows what we're after.

'No one but Reb Hyrcanah knows of the underground passages,' he says. 'What you must do is go to the temple and take your requests to Adonai. As a gentile, you can go to the Court of the Gentiles. Have faith in Him. He brought you here; He'll show you the golden tablets.'

He sounds pretty confident. It's making me feel a bit better.

## 9

Heptosh and Shan had been working flat out. At least Shan was bionic and didn't need as much rest. Heptosh had to get aside and catch some sleep, but every time he did, another problem would emerge.

What was becoming more and more clear was that life, even on the newly available planets, wasn't going to be a paradise. Already, there were complaints.

If only he had more help. The bionics had the know-how but were in poor working order. There were a few willing hands among the new arrivals, but they lacked the skill. Heptosh had to be on hand at every point to tell them where to put this and that.

Besides the big tele-gates joining Thevsos and Nephtesh, there were the ones joining the main city square of Nephtesh with various other planets that were coming available.

It was becoming clear that the one tele-gate from Thevsos wasn't enough. There were already riots taking place there, so it would only be a matter of time before the imperial authorities swooped down and put a stop to it, or worse yet, send a commando unit into Nephtesh.

If they didn't process the newcomers quickly enough, the riots would spill over into Nephtesh. Some of the communities that were arriving weren't compatible with one another. At least here, there were different planets to separate them to.

Even apart from that, they had to keep relocating the local gates to various places as each city and town began to fill up. One secret to keeping social order was to give everyone plenty of space.

As far as locating new places to set up gates and moving them about, Heptosh was basically on his own. Shan was busy insuring that the newcomers didn't go hungry

Food, there was, if they knew how to get at it. There was wild fruit, wild cows and sheep, wild grain, but the newcomers from the crowded under-city of Thevsos were neither farmers nor hunters. The local bionics were, but the best they could do with their failing bodies was to teach them.

Shan was reprogramming them to teach the newcomers how to live and farm, and how to forage for existing food until their first harvest. The rest, he disabled.

Neuryzh had made several trips carrying seed grain and other commodities. On his last trip, he apparently saw the plight Heptosh was in, so this time, he brought what he really needed, people.

There were a few experts in managing people, plus a few who were willing to be managed, and speakers of the languages. Among them were some of Heptosh's neighbours, Rav and Shav, and even Tsim, along with a few professional people from the village, including Doctor Taknen, and Rov the tinker.

Shav reported that Nakham was busy minding Eetoo's sheep.

## 10

a train of camels, donkeys, horses   
people on foot, a few carts

crossing desert sand and rock  
Roman soldiers lead the way and take up the rear

We're on our way. Philip, Nicanor, Alexander, Tsaphar and I have a donkey between us to carry our things. Sometimes we take turns riding it, but that means the rest have to carry something to lighten its load, so mostly we just walk. My bottom gets sore when I ride long distances anyway. One of the others in our group lets Tsaphar take turns with his wife riding their donkey, but she's usually glad to get back on her feet again.

There are soldiers going along as well. They say that's usual for this rout because there's lots of robbers along the way. No one in their right mind would travel by themselves.

If Reb Mordecai did it, I'm wondering how. Alexander thinks he rode real fast until he caught up with the previous day's caravan.

He says there aren't as many soldiers in this one as they normally have. I hope there won't be any trouble.

It's evening now. Daytime is scorching hot, but at night it gets cold! There's hardly anything to see, but the ocean once in a while.

The caravan's stopping for the night. About time! We're both aching all over.

This looks like an oasis.

The leader of the caravan comes around to show us each a place to pitch a tent, or put down a bed roll. The group of us from Beit Tsaddok get together and eat our meal. They brought food, and we fill our water bags at the well in middle of the oasis.

There's another caravan here going the other way. Philip says they always try to make it to this oasis on each trip. There are locals selling things here as well.

We talk about what we'll do in Yerushalayim. I still can't think of anything. Alexander keeps encouraging us to go to the Temple and pray. He's sure something will turn up.

We're all still sad that Hyrcanah's dead. There's enough of us for a minyan, so we have prayers every time we stop. They all say the mourners kaddish. We talk about him a lot. Alexander is the one who keeps saying Messiah will triumph despite all the odds.

We finally turn in. This tent is just big enough for Tsaphar and I to sleep in without getting too close together.

We talk a while.

Tsaphar misses home -- especially now that Hyrcanah is gone.

So do I.

***

There are noises outside. People are shouting.

I hear sounds like knives hitting each other. Somebody yells as though they're hurt.

I go to stick my head out.

'Stay in!' says Tsaphar.

I take her advice. We sit still, listening.

The noise is getting closer. More people are yelling, like they're hurt.

Oh! Adonai! Help us!

Someone rips our door open. He's looking inside. He's got a fire torch in one hand, and a sword in the other that he's holding the door open with.

Tsaphar is sitting there, frozen.

He sees Tsaphar, and a wicked smile comes to his face. He sticks the end of his torch in the sand outside and starts to come in.

What can we do?

I feel about for something to hit him with.

There's my bag. I reach my hand in.

There's my metzig torch. That should make a dent in his head -- if I'm quick enough.

I turn it on so I can see him better.

It shines in his face. He screams and backs out real quick.

I stick my head out.

The man backs into his torch and his clothes catch fire.

There are other men with swords running towards us. I shine the torch in their face. The man on fire is running past them. They hold their hand up and run the other way.

Wow! I guess they've never seen anything so bright before!

They yell at their friends and they all get on horses and camels and they're off.

People are waking about, checking out the damage. A couple of soldiers are unhurt. The other three have been wounded. I think they're talking in Latin.

Alexander says they're saying the gods were with us. Nicanor thinks it was an angel. Everyone thinks it's the light that set the man's clothes on fire.

I think I'll keep quiet about the torch.

* * *

So far, nothing more has happened to us. Some more soldiers joined us at the next garrison town so now we're fully protected. They don't think anyone will dare to attack us now.

We're now coming to a town called Yavneh, which is sort of on the outskirts of Yehudah. It'll be one more day's travel to Yerushalayim. They say this area is just as dangerous as the dessert where we were attacked.

It'll soon be Shabbat, so we'll spend a whole day here before moving on the the city.

Tsaphar seems a bit more confident now, ever since I scared the robbers off with the metzig torch.

Some people look as though they would attack the soldiers if they could. Some of them look daggers at them.

Others are trying to get to us to ask for money and handouts, but the soldiers are driving them away -- more daggers.

The children are thin, some of them naked, and some of the adults might as well be for all the holes in their clothes. This reminds me of the place under the brown mist in Thevsos. At least here, the air is clean.

We're putting up at an inn. The richer travellers take rooms inside, but we'll camp out here where they keep the donkeys and camels.

Alexander suggests that we go to the local synagogue for Shabbat prayers.

We go as a group, with Shim'on leading. Since it's Shabbat, the beggars aren't allowed to bother us -- it's like, working. A lot of them go the synagogue though -- the ones who have clothes to wear, that is.

Here at the centre of the town, the people are better off. You can see, by how they dress, how religious people are. A few of them are also on the way to prayers.

Someone's coming the other way, very rich, by the way he's dressed, but different -- more like Reb Mordecai. He's got a couple of bodyguards.

One of the religious looking blokes glares at him and spits as he passes. The man just smirks back.

'Probably a tax collector,' says Alexander.

The man and his bodyguards turn into one of the nicer houses.

'Everyone hates them,' says Alexander. 'They work for the Romans, and get filthy rich off it. You'll never see them without their personal bodyguards, or if you do, you'll find them dead next time you turn around.'

'For good reason too!' says a man walking near us. 'You see all the beggars? You know why the countryside's so full of robbers?' He's obviously very religious, the way he's dressed.

'The Imperial taxes, I suppose,' says Nicanor.

'Yes, and if that weren't enough to break one, these traitors collect double their share of it.'

'I've heard that too,' says Alexander.

'And if that weren't enough, there's one more thing.'

'Which is...?'

He gets close to us and says in a whisper, 'Our own Temple tax! Those pagans that run our Temple send their men to collect our tithes, our first fruits -- fruit or no fruit -- redemption of our first-born -- every bit as vicious as the Romans, they are! If people can't pay up, they lose their land. Then, they have no choice but to beg. By the time they realise there isn't enough charity to support a population of beggars, (if they aren't already dying from malnutrition) they do the only sensible thing: join the robber gangs.'

Now, we're about to enter the synagogue, so we quiet down.

## 11

a day spent in rest and peace  
an evening of enjoying the end of the Shabbat

 a night of more rest

The sun's not up yet, and we're already a couple of furlongs outside of town.

There are people along the side of the road here with horrid looking diseases. Some of them don't even have fingers and toes. I've seen some of these at a distance in some of the other towns, but this is the first time I've seen them this close.

'Lepers,' says Philip.

They get off the road to let us pass.

'They're not allowed to get close to people,' says Philip. 'They're not even allowed inside the town. They can't even beg. Their relatives bring them their food.'

While it doesn't look as bad as Thevsos, it's still a lot worse than most other places I've been to. Some of them are as poor as the ones in the brown mist, and yet, they're as fanatical as those that had a bionic upload.

It's hard to believe I'm here to find answers. So far, it's only giving me more questions. Everywhere I look, I remember what Blazz said about cockroaches and rats.

There are plenty of those here too.

weary adventurer, treading along side his espoused  
the latter, though seated on a beast, equally weary

We can see the walls of Yerushalayim on top of the next hill. There are pinnacles and towers overlooking the walls. It looks like it must be pretty nice inside, but on this side of the wall it looks pretty dismal.

The whole landscape is a bit cluttered with this and that, some tumbled down houses, some almost dead trees. I can see posts stuck in the ground up ahead, along the way to one of the gates. They look ugly, whatever they are. Are they for processing some sort of food or hide?

It looks almost like -- nah, it can't be.

The smell's terrible here too. I hope it's better inside the city.

Now we're getting closer to the posts, and we can see them better.

The gods! It is people that's stuck to them! I think they're actually nailed there!

We're passing by a few now. There's a cross-bar at the top where the hands look like they're nailed through the wrists, and the feet are nailed at the base, and they're just hanging there, stark naked.

I've never seen anything so horrible!

'You see that?' says Nicanor. 'That's how the Romans executes bandits and terrorists.'

'How long do they keep them there?' says Tsaphar.

'Until they slowly die.'

They look like they're in intense pain. One is groaning. I think they'd be screaming, but it looks as though they can't get enough breath to do that. That's about the worst kind of death I can imagine!

Tsaphar is holding her shawl up to hide the sight from her eyes.

We're passed that now. It looks like we're going around the North side of the city.

I'm starting to see gold pinnacles off on the far side. Alexander says that's the Holy Temple. It looks as though it's made of solid gold! There's a castle on this side.

We're going to be staying with someone named Yakov ben Yoseph. He's the half brother of the one they think might be the Messiah, Yeshua ben Yoseph. He's of the tribe of Yehudah, not a priest, so he's allowed to live in Yerushalayim even though he's associated with the 'Sons of Light'. Whenever the priests of Tsaddok manage to get into Yerushalayim, they use his place as a safe-house.

We part ways from the caravan about here, so we can head towards the Eastern side of the city. That's where Reb Yakov's house is. The caravan with the soldiers go into the city from the North towards the castle. I can see guards walking along the ramparts -- Roman soldiers, like the guards with our caravan. Right now, the castle obscures our view of the Temple.

There are a few communities outside the city wall. They're just like the others, full of beggars and all that.

A lot of people are going in our direction. There's some action up ahead. People seem to be excited about something.

Someone near us shouts something.

'What?' says Philip.

'Messiah is coming!' says Nicanor.

'He must be entering by the Eastern Gate!'

'We're right on time, then, aren't we!' says Alexander. 'Let's go then!'

The main road going up to the gate is crowded. There's some sort of celebration going on. I see palm branches waving back and forth and flower petals flying in the air. People are shouting.

Nicanor, whose leading the donkey, calls out, 'You all go on ahead. I'll meet you at Yakov's house.'

I don't know where Yakov lives. We'd better stick with Alexander and Philip.

We're going through the crowd. I'm holding Tsaphar's hand, but it's hard to keep track of the other two.

I can barely make out what they're all saying: Hoshia-something-something-ha shem Adonai.

I've only got my leather shoulder bag. All our other stuff is with the donkey.

We're a bit smaller so we can squeeze through places easier than the grown-ups. Tsaphar's good at it, so she can follow me even if we don't have each other by the hand.

I think we've lost Alexander and Philip.

We seem to be at the crossroad, but we can't get any further.

There's a wall here.

'Let's get on this wall,' says Tsaphar.

She's good at climbing, so we both get up. There's other people already sitting up there.

We've got a good view.

Now I catch what they're saying. They're more together now: Hoshia ana! Baruch haba bashem Adonai!

Tsaphar and I are shouting it now too.

People have got coats and blankets spread out on the road. There's a group of people walking along, and one is sitting on a baby donkey, leaning against what's probably the mother donkey. Lots of kid are dancing about in front, some throwing flower petals.

The one on the donkey must be him!

That's a king?

The only living king I've ever seen is the emperor of Teknesh. Then there was the king of Nephtesh, who was only a bionic. He doesn't look like either of them at all. He's too fatherly looking for that -- as though he doesn't think of himself as a king at all! He doesn't even carry himself like the headman of my village in Fa-tzi-zhi-land. He's looking at everyone as though he were some sort of -- well -- if he were an Utz, his dome would be glowing.

Now he's looking this way. He's looking at me! It's as if he picked me out of the crowd!

They're going past us now.

The way he looked at me...!

Tsaphar and I jump off the wall and follow as best we can.

We've definitely lost Alexander and Philip now. I suppose I'd be panicking, but I'm interested in seeing more of the king.

We're walking up the hill to the big gate. Alexander said it leads right into the Temple.

All the people are following the king through the gate now.

Finally we're in.

This is a big place. It looks like a big market square. There's lots of stalls selling things like doves, sheep and goats. Some are dealing in some sort of coins. There's a wide space between, not exactly a road, but where they make sure people can pass by into the Temple.

Lots of people are dressed differently than they were outside. They look like they probably come from different places, sort of like in Alexandria, but there's even more variety. Not many of them are paying attention to the king. A few look like they're curious about what's going on.

'Let's find the Court of the Gentiles and pray to Adonai,' says Tsaphar.

Good idea. Where is it?

A crowd of people are still following the king about the place, but there's more room to move.

I see a long queue of people standing behind a big gate, some leading a sheep or a goat, but most of them are only carrying a dove or two with the legs tied up.

'Let's go to that gate over there,' I say. 'That looks like the way to get into the Temple.'

'We'd better make sure its the right place before we go waiting in a long queue,' says Tsaphar.

We cut across some of the aisles where people are buying and selling things.

We're looking at the gate.

'What does that sign say?' I ask Tsaphar. It's written in three languages.

'Er -- Oh no! The bit in Hebrew says, "All un-circumcised people are forbidden to enter, on pain of death."'

'Huh? Where is the Court of the Gentiles then?'

We start walking about, looking.

All I see is a great big market. People are haggling and even shouting at each other at some stalls. It doesn't look like a good place for bargains. I see one customer who's about to start swinging.

There are a lot more people over this way. I see the man who was riding the donkeys -- the king. He's also looking about.

Just about everyone nearby is watching, but it's not so crowded about about him any more.

Groups of kids are prancing about singing that song they've been singing.

There's the king, just ahead of us. He seems to enjoy looking at the kids. Then he turns his head and is looking at us.

It seems natural to walk up to him.

I say, 'Messiah ben David?'

'What can I do for you?' he says.

The way he said that! It's as though he were really waiting about just to do something for us.

He's looking at me with such pure eyes, I feel like I have to tell him the truth, even what Hyrcanah told me to keep quiet about.

'Please, Sir, we're gentiles. Where's the place of prayer for gentiles?'

The word 'gentile' doesn't faze him one bit. He looks about at the shops.

'What do you see here?'

'I just see a big market.'

'That's right,' he says. 'You see a market. It's the house of prayer for all the nations, but they've turned it into a market. Worse than a market -- a den of thieves by the looks of it!'

He's looking about again -- like he's got fire in his eyes.

'Bring me that piece of string there,' he points.

I pick it up for him.

'And that there, and that.'

Tsaphar helps. A couple of other people get more bits of rope. One of them isn't much older than me.

He's got a few pieces of twine, and he's tying them together.

Suddenly, he takes it and whips it across a table full of coins and scatters them all over the place. He does it to another table, and then upsets a cadge full of doves, and then a pen of sheep.

Every thing's suddenly in pandemonium.

He's roaring out, 'It's written, "My House shall be a place of prayer for the nations," but you have turned it into a den of thieves!'

He's going through the whole place doing that. People are clearing out, herding their sheep away before he gets to them.

There's a shaded area running along the edges of the square. He's cleared out a corner near the shaded area. He motions to us and points to it. He goes back to cracking his whip and turning over tables and stuff.

A lot of people are gathered about. Some look like teachers, like I saw in Alexandria.

There's a group of important looking men in white robes walking up really fast from the door where we saw the sign. They strut up to the king and stand there, blocking his way.

The one in front says, 'By what authority are you doing this?'

The king just stands there, looking at them for a moment. He doesn't look all that angry -- at least he isn't glaring at them hatefully as most people would who go on rage like this.

Everything's quiet.

Then, he say, 'Go ahead -- destroy this Temple. In three days, I will raise it up again.'

Suddenly, people are talking among themselves, as though this means something. Some people are cheering and yelling their chant again, 'Hoshia ana! Baruch haba bashem Adonai!'

Tsaphar and I go over to the shaded area. It looks as though it were made for people to have prayer services with a minyan and all. There's even the Seven Laws written on the wall in one place. It's quite peaceful, now there aren't people selling things nearby.

A few other people come along. They start praying.

We pray too.

I say some of the prayers I've memorised, I say the Shema, and then I say, 'Please, Adonai, show us the way to find the Golden Tablets.'

We keep it up for about an hour.

Then, I'm praying that we'll find our friends and get to where we're supposed to sleep tonight.

'There they are! Eetoo! Tsaphar!' it's Alexander with Philip.

We join them.

Things have pretty much died down now. There aren't many people selling things any more.

Alexander and Philip take us out another big door that goes through the city. There's a big wide staircase leading to the foot of the hill the Temple is on.

That's full of people selling things, especially the ones selling coins. At the bottom of the steps, the place is crowded with the people selling sheep and doves. There's only a tiny space to walk. Philip said they all just moved here from inside. It used to be all open space.

We make our way through the crowd off towards the city wall. The high wall on our left is like an extension of the hill the Temple is on, that we just came down by the steps. The wall of the city joins it and there's another gate.

'Ophel Gate,' says Alexander.

We go out that way. In front of us is a wide valley. There's a road leading along the side of the hill. It meets another road much further down. I think that's the road we were on before.

'Kidron Valley,' says Philip. 'That's Olive Hill over there. You can see Reb Yakov's house at the bottom of it.'

One whole area off to the right is full of racks with animal skins hanging out. Now and then, when a breeze blows, I catch a horrible stench!

'That's a tannery belonging to the High Priest's family, where they treat the skins from sheep and cows from the sacrifices.'

We finally arrive. The place is buzzing with people. Nicanor's there already, along with Reb Shim'on.

They introduce us to Reb Yakov. He seems like a nice man.

'I'm deeply saddened to hear you've been orphaned,' he says. 'Hyrcanah was a close friend of mine.'

It's a big house, but it's full, not only with the folks who came with us, but also men from Qumram and other places. A lot of them are talking about Hyrcanah. Some of them break out weeping and tear a bit of their tunic when they hear the news.

A older woman comes around with a basket of bread and offers us a piece. I hear Reb Yakov introducing her to someone else as his mother. Since lots of people are arriving, they don't bother with a formal meal. People are just eating their bits of bread as they dash about putting their things away and meeting other newcomers.

We're tired. We find where they've set our bedding down. It's in the corridor where a lot of other men are, but they have a different place for Tsaphar in a room with other women. We put down our mats and settle in.

## 12

Tsaphar had slept most of the afternoon so, even though the other women had settled down, she no longer felt sleepy. She got up and went into the corridor. An oil lamp hanging in the main room shown through the door so she could see the men sleeping along the wall facing her. Eetoo was snoring away at the end near the door. Next to him was Alexander. Separating them were the bags containing the parchments and the rubbing. The tent was rolled up near his head where he and Alexander each used a corner of it to cushion their heads.

There were several men talking just on the other side of the partition, but Tsaphar only recognised the voices of Reb Shim'on and their host, Reb Yakov. She didn't want to bother anyone, so she simply sat down at the foot of Eetoo's mat, leaned against the wall and let her mind reflect on what it had absorbed so far. What were they doing here? Why did so many people act as though they'd taken a bio-media upload? Was taking things in perspective even a natural human trait?

The one person she knew well -- her only shelter in this wasteland -- lay sound asleep with his back to her, his arm caressing his shepherd bag.

Right now, she envied that shepherd bag.

Some day, she would lie next to him in that position. Would he caress her then?

In this place, they had to be careful. Some of the men who came from Qumram had sworn off all contact with women, and had the attitude that anyone fit for the Kingdom of God would be as they. That obviously put a barrier between them.

If only Eetoo would say more, something to reassure her -- make her feel less alone in this wasteland.

Men -- Akkadi men, especially -- pay so much attention to the focal point of their affection, the woman they seek to win, but only until they own her. Then, they go on with life forgetting she exists. Eetoo was no better...

Reb Yakov's voice pulled her out of her reverie, 'So the boy and the girl that came with you, I understand they're gentiles?'

'God fearing gentiles,' said Shim'on. 'The boy comes from a nation that has held to the Seven Laws since the days of their father, Ham.'

'Has no one attempted to persuade the boy to undergo circumcision?'

'Hyrcanah wouldn't think of it. It would violate his calling. His reason for coming to our lands has to do with his role as a son of Ham.'

'What calling?'

'It's a long story. It's all based on a prophecy written in the Book of Yoseph, and other sources.'

'From the Testaments of the Patriarchs?'

'No. It's a very rare manuscript written in an ancient script. But the prophecy was fulfilled before our very eyes by his actual arrival in a rather miraculous way, and he has a mission to fulfil as a son of Ham.'

A third voice said, 'If he took circumcision, he'd no longer be a son of Ham, but a son of Yisrael, wouldn't he!'

'Hyrcanah was open minded about such things. He tended to lean towards the opinions of the P'rushim.' said Yakov.

'What about Messiah?' queried the third voice.

'If you're referring to my brother, he likewise seems to follow the opinions of the P'rushim in most things, especially Beit Hillel,' said Reb Yakov.

'I heard him support an opinion of Beit Shammai just the other day,' said a fourth voice.

'Which one?'

'In the question of divorce. They asked him, "Can a man put away his wife for ruining his dinner?" -- that was the gist of it. He quoted Genesis, saying "The two shall be one flesh." Then, he practically put a curse on anyone who would separate them.'

'Interesting that he actually sided with the rabbis of Beit Shammai! They're the ones who are usually all over him over this or that, especially over the issue of shabbat,' said the third voice.

The fourth one said, 'He also said once, "If the P'rushim can pull a cow out of a pit on shabbat, why can I not save the life of the desperately sick?"'

'An indirect reference to the Sons of Light,' said Reb Shim'on.

Reb Yakov spoke again: 'He does support the Sons of Light on a number of issues. He says, "Let your 'yes' be 'yes' and your 'no' be 'no' -- don't swear at all by anything."'

'What do the Sons of Light think of his healing on shabbat?' asked Reb Shim'on.

'They have their rules,' said the fourth voice, 'but ever since their prophet, Yohannan the Immerser loudly proclaimed Reb Yeshua as Messiah of Yisrael, they tend to be less troubled about some issues.'

'I can speak for myself,' said Reb Yakov. 'I used to be a lot more sure about some things than I am now. At least I was sure I knew my own brother! I tend to accept most of what he says now. Opinions differ, as they always do, but in the end, the Truth will show them for what they are -- opinions. As far as I'm concerned, the gentile boy and girl are welcome to stay -- for now anyway. Let's not say too much about them in the hearing of the others though.'

The conversation began to drift to other subjects not of interest to Tsaphar. She looked again, longingly at the snoring body of Eetoo, and walked quietly back to the women's room, lay down and was soon asleep.

## 13

to the Outer Court of Beit Ha Mikdash  
go the rabbi's orphaned pupils each day  
to observe the morning sacrifice

while the smoke is yet ascending  
but the last 'Amen' has been sung

the two young adventurers go  
in search of their treasure

Alexander says some of the wells join underground streams. One of the kings of old time once dug a tunnel for water. There's another one that leads to a well, that King David sent his men through when they captured the city from the Yebusites. There are others as well, but no one's sure which passage would get us to the tablets.

Alexander's not with us today but we sort of know our way about now.

Parts of the Lower City are every bit as bad as Thevsos, under the grey mist. It's crowded and dirty as anything! The air's generally cleaner though, but there are smells from other things, like the animal hides hanging out over the wall in the Kidron Valley.

Even if we did have any idea where to find the way underground, there's so many people about, either selling things, working their trade, or just camped out. One little lane we went up is full of weavers. They're working inside the shops, but they've got rolls of material and stuff scattered all over. The next street is mostly cobblers making shoes for folks, and other people working with leather, and mending things. Here and there, there are people selling other things as well.

And the beggars! Some kids wearing nothing at all; some grown up ones might as well be wearing nothing. At least the lepers aren't allowed inside the city.

The leather workers seem very religious. One of them, an older man, is working away at whatever he's making, and at the same time, teaching the Torah to some of the others gathered about him. Some of them are working as well, but others just come to sit and listen.

Down another street, they're selling oils and perfumes. They aren't so religious there. I even saw one of the shoemakers giving some of them a dirty look, as though he were a pervert or something.

I can see why. One of them's flirting with his woman customer.

In another section of town people are dyeing cloth purple, red and other colours. Then, we come to where they're all making tents. There's a few rabbis there as well, teaching Torah while they work.

There are wells here and there, but we can't even get close to some of them. With all these crowds, it's going to be awkward, even if we do find the right one. It's hard to move about, let alone look for ways underground.

I don't understand a lot of the talking. There are so many languages being spoken. Besides Hebrew, there's one that's a lot like Akkadi, but they started speaking it in Babylon. Some are speaking in Greek and other languages.

There's so many people because it's a special holiday. Alexander says, some of them just come for one feast day and stay on till the next, doing their trade, like shoe making or weaving tents, like these ones here.

There's one who looks like a rabbi, sorting out some camel's hair in his weaving loom while he's answering someone's question about some point of the Torah. There are a few half finished tents lying about and a kid is sewing some bits of one together.

Tsaphar nudges me. 'He seems to know a lot. Maybe he'll know about the plates.'

We stand about and wait for a chance to ask.

There's a lot of talk about what this rabbi or that rabbi said, what the rabbis of Beit Hillel say, and what Beit Shammai say. It all sounds like the discussions Reb Hyrcanah used to have.

Then the rabbi at the weaving loom says, 'My own rabbi, Rabban Gam'liel always says -- something something \-- but I tend to lean towards his son, Rabbi Shim'on on that issue.'

Reb Hyrcanah used to talk about Gam'liel as well.

There's a pause. I nudge Tsaphar.

I think she's all ready to ask him but someone else gets in first:

'Rabbi Sha'ul, what do you make of this Yeshua of Natzaret, whom they claim is Messiah?'

'Hah!' he starts, 'You mean the one who'll to destroy the Temple and build it back in three days?' He goes on to verbally bash Yeshua every which way. He all but curses him!

'We'd better go,' whispers Tsaphar.

We're off.

There's another gate ahead of us. Next to it is a big pool with a wall around it, called Shalom pool. Alexander showed us this way out before. He said this was Fountain Gate.

As we come out this gate, there's a big valley on our right they call Gei Hinnom. On the left is the Kidron Velley. Where Kidron smells of hide tanning fluid, Gei Hinnom smells of rubbish. There's smoke from some places where they're burning it. Lot's of barely dressed people and naked kids are picking through it trying to find anything valuable, or even food to eat -- just like Thevsos again.

Alexander says that the rabbis named the place where the spirits of bad people go after they die, Gei Hinnom, after this place.

Also, long time ago, during the reigns of the kings when the people turned away from Adonai, they set up a big iron image here of a god they called Molech. It was a beautiful valley then, but they had the idol here, and they'd sacrifice babies to it. They would build a fire around it, so the iron image was red hot, then they'd throw the babies up into the arms of Molech. They had loud drums playing to drown out the screams of the baby so the parents wouldn't be upset while worshipping the god.

Now, it's like there's a curse on the place. The idea of spending the afterlife in a place like this should scare anyone into being good.

We get back to the house, no closer to finding the plates than we began.

As usual, Alexander says, 'Have faith.'

Miriam, Yakov's stepmother, is also encouraging. She always has food in the pot, and welcomes anyone into the kitchen for a bite when they look hungry.

We're there with her now. I think she's trying to figure us out.

'I'm trying to think where you could be from. What's the name of the place again?'

'The land of Tok,' says Tsaphar. 'Eetoo's from Kalodzu-Famta.' We've learned to say 'land' instead of 'planet', so we won't confuse people too much.

'And you're looking for golden tablets that were hidden underneath the city by Shem.'

'Yes,' says Tsaphar. 'The stone tablets say they are in this land. Hyrcanah said they were hidden under the city.'

'Yes. I knew Hyrcanah -- may he rest in peace. He was quite a scholar. If he said they're under the city, I'm sure they are. He's found a number of things there, including a very ancient Torah scroll.'

'He gave that to me,' I say. 'Also a rubbing he made of the Ten Words.'

She puts her finger over my mouth. 'I wouldn't talk very loudly about that. Just take that quietly back to your land with the other things you find. I'll pray daily that you find the golden tablets.'

After a while, she says, 'Perhaps I'll mention it to my son.'

She seems like a woman I'd trust. But I think Yakov already knows what we're looking for.

## 14

at the break of day  
leaving time enough for the morning walk  
before the morning sacrifice is offered

There's a knock at the front door. One of Reb Yakov's pupils goes to answer it.

It's the boy we saw the other day who was helping us pick up bits of rope for the king.

Reb Yakov Says 'Yohannan ben Zavdai, do you come with a message from your rabbi?'

'I've come to fetch the son of Ham,' he says.

Reb Yakov points him to me.

'Come,' says Yohannan. He sees Tsaphar. 'You too.'

We're ready to go so we follow him.

There's a few other men walking ahead of us. We catch up.

Yohannan introduces us to his older brother, Yakov. There's a big, rough looking man named Kefa. That means 'rock'. I suppose he looks a bit like a rock.

'So, you wish to be a follower of Messiah?' he says.

I guess that would be nice. I nod my head.

'Let me tell you right now, it's not a life for the weak. You've got to be willing to die for him. You see all of us here?'

'Lighten up Kefa!' says one of the others.

Kefa just repeats himself. 'You see all of us here? We've left all to follow him. There are twelve of us, and because we're ready to die for him, we will sit on twelve thrones when he sets up the kingdom.'

He sounds as though he's had a bio-media upload.

'Hey! Give it a rest Shim'on!' says Yohannan's brother. 'We don't even know why Rabban asked for him!'

'You'd better lighten up Yakhov!' says another one. 'Don't forget what you sounded like just a few days ago!'

'Hah! Two thrones for the Sons of Thunder! Indeed!' says another.

'Hoi!' Yohannan twirls around glaring at the one who said that.

But now everyone's looking at what's up ahead. There's a tree in a bit of empty ground. Someone's under it looking for fruit.

'Figs for breakfast?' says someone.

'It's not the season, is it!' says another.

I see who it is -- the king!

'No one shall eat figs from you, ever again,' he says. He turns to us. 'Ah, the son of Ham and daughter of Ishmael.'

We go to him, and he has us walking one on either side of him as though we were his kids. He's asking us this and that, but nothing really important -- like he just wants to get to know us.

We come to Ophel Gate.

If he's a king, this is nothing like the emperor's court in the Teknesh galaxy. He's opposite of the way people were there, or here too for that matter. I even get the feeling he's forgotten how important he is!

We're walking along the South side of the Temple now, in an open area. The wide stairs up to the Temple are ahead of us, but we're taking a round-a-bout way. There are merchants here that look like some of the same ones he chased out of the Court of the Gentiles a few days ago. A couple of them give us a look. A few others from the crowd begin to follow us.

Suddenly, he stops and points off to the left. 'Do you see that hole, son of Ham?'

I see a hole at the edge of the open space. It looks as though it were covered with pavement before, and some of it has broken and fallen in. There are big rocks on either side that look like they're to keep people from falling in.

'That's actually an ancient well. If you were to descend into it early tomorrow, before sunrise, you'll find a passage leading in the direction of that pinnacle over there. Go that way for fifty paces and then to the left another twenty-seven. Stand on the rock you'll see. Shine your light upward and it will show you what you're looking for. Go down tomorrow before sunrise, for if you go at any other time, it will have become an underground stream. Nothing will hurt you down there if you go at that time. The gates will be shut, but you can come in by that small door you see there.' He points to a small door in the wall near the big gate we just came in.

'Read, and record what you find written in your recording box, but return the original tablets to their place. You will have just enough light to do what you need to do. When you have finished, continue along the passage to a junction. Then go the direction in which you see a dim light. Follow the light and exit the underground passages by that way. You will see me again at a distance, but we cannot meet again until four days from now. At that time, remember where it was you last saw me at a distance, and go to meet me there.

'Now, go and offer thanksgiving, and then return to your abode and rest. You will need it.'

We start to walk to the hole, but he grabs my shoulder.

While Tsaphar walks ahead, he whispers in my ear, 'This is a strange land for you, and your sister is lonely.' He looks at me, like I'm supposed to do something about it.

He walks off.

## 15

Tsaphar was sure it was the same one. That morning they had seen Messiah standing under it, gazing into the green leafy world of the tree, looking for figs. Now, all she saw were dry branches, twigs and a few drooping leaves that hadn't fallen off yet.

He had said, 'No one will eat of you again.' And the tree took it so literally!

Why in the world would he do that?

Hyrcanah said once that the forbidden tree in Gan Eden was a fig tree. Was he saying, maybe, that the fruit of the tree of the Knowledge of Good and Evil was now dried up?

They arrived at the house.

Ima Miriam brought them to the kitchen and served them a lunch of matzo and stew.

After that, they took a long nap.

That evening, a couple of the neighbours from down the street popped in, whom Reb Yakov introduced as Reb Lazar and Rabbi Shim'on the P'rushah. They joined them for a light supper. Some of the others were there. Eetoo sat with Alexander, Philip and Nicanor, while Tsaphar ate with Ima Miriam and some of the wives.

'Where is Reb Yeshua this evening?' enquired Reb Yakov.

'Up the mountain with his pupils, as usual,' said Reb Lazar.

'I mean no disrespect,' said Rabbi Shim'on, 'but he's gone and stuck his foot in it this time.'

'How so?' asked Reb Yakov.

'Had they convened the Great Sanhedrin at noon today, they would have declared him Messiah of Yisrael -- unanimously. Some of them, perhaps grudgingly, but they would have conceded. He had proven himself. But as of an hour before sundown? Most were dead against him.'

'Why?'

'They had tested him with their questions. Some of them were out to trap him, to be sure; others simply needed to be confident that he knew his stuff. He passed every test, he answered every question with amazingly simple solutions. The pupils of Shim'on ben Gam'liel had tried him, the pupils of Sha'ul of Tarsus, the pupils of Yehuda ben Nahum, the Harodians; even the Tsaddukhim had a go at him with one of their objections to there being a resurrection. He delighted all the P'rushim by not only answering Tsaddukhim without a bat of an eyelid, but by tossing them a question of his own, throwing them into utter confusion.

'Finally, one of the older rabbis -- I couldn't see who, from where I was standing -- I think, Yahannan ben Zakkai, or was it the other one that looks like him -- of Beit Hillel -- he simply asked, "What is the greatest commandment?" Reb Yeshuah answered by quoting the Shema, and then adding the commandment from Sefer Vayikra: "Love your neighbour as yourself". That ended in a pleasant dialogue that should have been a prelude to his reign.

'At that point, the rabbis of Beit Hillel were happy with him. Those of Beit Shammai were at least happy he had silenced the Tsaddukhim and the Herodians. They would have declared him Messiah of Yisrael.'

'But?'

'Then, Reb Yeshuah has a go at them! He turns to the people and says, "The rabbis and P'rushim sit in the seat of Moshe..." and that was about the only good thing he said. He gave the most cutting commentary I've heard yet. You should have seen them, Rabbi Shim'on ben Gam'liel, Rabbi Sha'ul of Tarsus, Rabbi Arach ben Yohannan, absolutely gnashing their teeth, calling him names.'

'What about Rabban Gam'liel, himself?'

'As usual, silent.'

'Ben Zakkai?'

'Likewise, silent.'

'Nicodemon?'

'I couldn't see him from where I stood, but if he spoke against him, it would be a first.'

'Yourself? You also sit in Moshe's seat.'

'Ha ha ha -- on one hand, I wanted to say "Amain", on the other, kick him! He spoke the truth. But the truth -- should it always be shouted from the housetops?'

'The truth, in this case,' replied Reb Yakov, 'is that many look for Messiah, but they aren't ready for him. The prophet Malachi said Messiah's coming could be a curse rather than a blessing but for the coming of Eliyahu. They say Yohannan the Immerser was the emissary of Eliyahu; some say, a reincarnation. He warned them to repent and prepare themselves for Messiah, but they didn't, so now -- this.'

'So, what's to happen?' said Reb Shim'on of Alexandria, looking horrified.

Rabbi Shim'on answered, 'If Reb Yeshua's last words to them are anything to go by, it would seem the Kingdom is going to take a while in coming. In fact, it sounded as though he were prophesying destruction.'

'What did he say?'

'"Your house is left in desolation" and "You will not see me again until you say, 'Blessed is he who comes in the name of Adonai.'"'

'Oi-yoi-yoi!' gasped Reb Shim'on. There were exclamations from some of the others from Alexandria.

Baruch haba bashem Adonai. That's what they were saying the first day they arrived in Yerushalayim, remembered Tsaphar.

## 16

darkness, with just a hint of dawn  
the two young adventurers heed the instructions of the King

Here's the hole. I look for the pinnacle. I can barely see it with no moon. We'll just remember what side of the hole the rope is on, and go towards it.

Tsaphar's been carrying the rope. I tie it to the big rock that looks heavy enough to hold us.

'Let's shine the torch down and see what's down there first,' say Tsaphar.

Good idea.

I take the torch.

'Better not turn it on up here,' she says. 'People will think we're angels or something.'

'That's right.'

I look down the hole, put my hand down with the torch, and turn it on. We both look.

We see the ground, and a little bit of water way down there. The rope's long enough though.

It's a good thing Tsaphar's so good at climbing. I don't think most girls could get down a rope.

I go first. I put the torch back into my pouch and start down.

There are a lot of little noises down here, like water dripping, and echoes. It's pitch black.

I'm finally at the bottom. I turn on the torch again so Tsaphar won't freak out on her way down.

There's only one passage going both ways. We go the way Reb Yeshua said.

I start counting as we go.

'One -- two...' there's quite an echo down here. I lower my voice: '...three -- four -- ...' we have to step over lots of things, '...six -- seven -- eight -- nine -- ten -- eleven....' here's a deep crevice. We'd better be careful. '...twenty-two -- twenty-three -- twenty ...'

'Someone said there's snakes down here,' says Tsaphar.

'Just look carefully. Twenty... -- where was I?'

'Twenty-four.'

'Okay. Twenty-four -- twenty-five -- twenty-six ... fourty-nine -- fifty. Here's where we turn left.'

It's a wider area here. I shine the torch around. We see a passage off to the left.

The light is going dim. I've got one extra power cell in the bag. I change it. It's shining as brightly as ever.

'Twenty-seven paces, right?'

'Yes.'

'Okay. One -- two -- three...' etc.

We arrive. This looks like ...

'He said we have to stand on a rock and shine the light upward,' says Tsaphar.

There's the rock -- just like the one in the pyramid of Nephtesh -- just like in my dream!

I go and stand on it, and shine it straight up just like I did in the pyramid. The passage is narrower here.

Just like the first time, we see something shining in the ceiling. It's sending a shaft of light on to part of the wall.

I shine the light on the spot it showed. It's different from the rest of the wall. Instead of rock, it's like covered with dry mud. It's high up, but there's a rock there we can stand on.

'Let's dig here,' I say.

We start digging with our hands. It crumbles easily.

There's something in there. We pull it out. It's heavy! It's the tablets!

Wow! This time it's just like in the dream!

We can only pull one out at a time, they're so heavy. We bring them down and lean them each against the wall.

'He said to record them in our box, didn't he?' says Tsaphar.

I get the computer out of our bag.

'How did he know we had one of these?' I say.

'Or a light bright enough to make a beam inside a dark cave?'

'You better write. You're a faster writer than me.'

We look at the writing. It's in Akkadi pictographs done with the wedged shaped indentations, with a few words in phonetic symbols. The phonetically spelled words look like an even older form of Akkadi than we're used to.

'It's going to take forever to write all this down,' I say. 'You'd better do it.'

She feels the letters with her fingers.

'I know!'

She takes a cloth out of our bag and begins cleaning one of the plates. Then, she takes the computer, puts in some commands, and lays the flat pin bed against the gold plate, so that the plates force the pins in -- except where the letters are.

'This is how you copy clay tablets using a computer,' she says.

She shows me how to do it, and I start in.

I have to do this about twenty times for the whole length of one tablet. After each impression, I have to check to make sure it copied. Sometimes it doesn't because I didn't hold it straight, so I have to do it again. Sometimes, lines at the beginning of each section get entered twice, or get missed, so I have to go back and correct it. While I'm doing that, she's reading away at the other ones.

The first one, I can see, is the song of the seven ages, and the story of Red Earth, the same as in our tablets. Then I come to the second one, which is the story of the two sons, how one killed the other. The third is of someone named Hanoch. It's a long story that we don't have in our tablets, but this one's missing The Book of Metushalech, the oldest man. The Torah doesn't have that story either. The fourth is about Noach.

Tsaphar's reading the fifth tablet, called The Book of Shem. That has a lot of interesting stuff. Our set at home only has the Book of Ham, which this one doesn't.

Suddenly, she says, 'Listen to this!' She starts reading:

The years allotted to humanity shall be as one week, but a day is as a thousand years. These shall be as six days in which a man works and the seventh, in which he rests. However, to live out the whole extent of the six days and enter the seventh, humanity must redeem itself three times. During the first two days, the world will be destroyed by water, and humanity will cease to exist unless there comes a redeemer, who will, by obedience, save a remnant and replenish the earth after the waters subside (this has happened already, and the redeemer was the father of Shem). Thus, humanity will survive the first 2000 years without the Torah.

After this, a son of Shem will make a covenant with the most High, and thus will begin the third day. But the world will be destroyed by fire before that day is half through, unless his descendants ratify the covenant with the most High, and receive the Torah from the Almighty. Thus, humanity will survive another 2000 years with the Torah, during which, a dynasty will arise from among the descendent of the covenant maker, which is destined to bring light to humanity.

After this, the world will surely be destroyed by fire, unless the Anointed King of that dynasty again redeems humanity. Then, the Anointed King will usher in the fifth day. Thus, humanity will survive another 2000 years with rule of the Anointed King. Then, will dawn the seventh day, the day of rest.

That does answer a lot of questions.

Even with the quicker way of copying, it's still taking a long time.

We're hungry. We didn't have our breakfast, and I'm sure it's almost noon. We eat the matzo bread we brought along, and go back to work. Matzo is all they eat these days, since it's getting to be Passover.

I'm back to copying, and Tsaphar is reading away.

'Wow! This is talking about you!' She reads:

The son of Ham shall journey from the lands beyond the stars to read the golden book of Shem. The sign of his coming is this: a star shall descend from the heavens and rest on the apex of the great monument. Then, the one who opens shall open the gate, and the son of Ham shall come. When he has read this book, he shall receive a gift from the anointed King to take to the lands beyond the stars.

I finally finish with the copying. Tsaphar tests the copy on the computer to make sure they copied okay.

There's a bit on the third plate that didn't make it. We enter that again. I read bits of it on the computer, especially the bits Tsaphar read out loud. The ends of the pins light up so we can read it in the dark.

It's all there. But the computer is running out of power. We don't have any more power cells except the one in the metzig torch. That's starting to go a bit dim too now. The one in the computer will recharge if we set it on the roof in the sun, but not these others.

'He told us to put them back the way we found them, didn't he?' she says.

'They were covered with mud.'

'Is that a hole over there? It looks like wet mud.'

We lift the plates back up one by one. It takes two of us to lift each one.

They're all in. We go to the hole. The mud is just the right consistency. We pick up hands full of it and slop it over the mouth of the hole with the golden plates.

It's finally all covered. When it's dry, it should look the same as when we found it.

We wash our hands in the tiny stream that runs along the passage. It's much bigger now than when we came.

We're ready to go. But the light is going out fast.

'We'd better hurry. How do we get out of here?' I say.

'He said, go straight on until we get to a junction. Then, follow a light.'

We start walking. The light's getting dimmer and dimmer.

We walk faster and faster.

Tsaphar trips and lands on my back, knocking me forward.

'We'd better slow down,' she says.

'But this light will go out. We'll be in the dark!'

'But there's too many holes and rocks to go too fast!'

'Let's just go then.'

We go on.

The light's gone out. It's pitch black. Since there was just a little bit left in the other power cell, I look for that in the bag and put that in in place of this one. We go some more. Soon that's completely out too.

We can't see a thing, even our own hands when we stick them in front of our face.

## 17

Heptosh realised that they had done all they could. The rest of the population of the grey planet were either unwilling to move, were unreachable, or would be a detriment to the new society if they did move.

At least the population on the ground level of Thevsos was significantly reduced so there would be space to grow more things and make life more bearable for those who stayed.

One group of newcomers were people who used to administrate such things as spaceports and infrastructure maintenance, and other essential planetary services until even their job got taken over by robots and computers. They were offered land on comfortable planets as a severance benefit, but that came at a price, that of a bio-media upload. The ones who refused found that their compensation was no more than a small plot of land under the brownish grey mist of Thevsos. They were glad to come, and Heptosh readily saw that they would be useful in all the planets. However not all the populations wanted them, so he sent them to ones that did. A few went about with Heptosh to help administrate the exodus. Thus, the job became easier and easier for him as time went on.

In all, they had set up three gates in different parts of the planet. One gate wasn't doing it fast enough. Heptosh and Rov the Tinker, along with some of their new help, had found two sets of giant sized tele-gates that would get people through much more quickly. Representatives of the ethnic communities that had already arrived suggested the locations. Neuryzh borrowed a ship big enough to transport them, and they set them up.

Just as the two began operation, the authorities of Thevsos discovered the first tele-gate. The first sign that things weren't as they should be, was the stampede.

Tsim was doing his shift of duty at the time. People who managed to get in, informed him that imperial storm troopers had landed and were cordoning off the area surrounding the gate.

Then, apparently, the stampede in Thevsos pushed the gate so that it toppled over on its back, and those left on that planet were jumping in on every side, as though the relocator beam were a pool of water. As soon as they became subject to the gravity of Nephtesh, they fell on the heads of those still squeezing in the bottom end, causing a few injuries. People on the Nephtesh side began pulling people out of the way. Some had to be treated for broken necks. A couple of children were crushed to death.

As soon as the newcomers stopped literally pouring in and all were pulled to safety, Tsim began working away at the switch. It had become corroded over the centuries.

The first uniformed man bounded in carrying a distance weapon. Tsim got the switch down as the legs of two more began to appear. Two pairs of legs from the waist down landed on Nephteshi soil, along with a pair of shod feet and a hand, leaving their top halves back in Thevsos.

Before the first man could make use of his weapon, Tsim administered a swift kick to the back of his neck, which sent him and his weapon flying. Another man conveniently caught the weapon, and handed it to Tsim, who wisely set it aside while the others took control of the trooper.

Tsim supervised the clean-up. That was the end of that gate.

By now, people had begun pouring in through the other two gates, which were each on different planets. Heptosh returned to Nephtesh via the network of tele-gates they had set up for that purpose. Once the planets were comfortably populated, they would dismantle the network and let each planet govern itself independently.

Another useful discovery Heptosh and Shan had made were a group of bionics with in depth knowledge of relocation technology, who could repair relocator motors. Already, Rov the Tinker, along with his apprentices were learning the art. A school was in the making. This was important in a way Heptosh appreciated. It would break the monopoly of the Heknosh clan, thereby giving Amanhep less of an edge in expanding his empire.

Though his fellow Tokis tried to persuade him, and the prospect tempted him, Neuryzh had warned him against reviving the original Nephteshi empire. Some thought that it would be a good counterbalance to Amanhep's, but Neuryzh believed that something of an opposite nature would be more effective. Heptosh readily saw the wisdom of that, and made it clear that each planet would be on its own to use their resources as best they could. He had done his best to direct the people so that only groups that were compatible with one another would share a planet. A loose alliance of independent human planets, such as would result from this operation, would come to one another's aid if any of their planets were attacked.

Things were doing well, and now it looked as though their job was almost complete.

## 18

in pitch blackness, beneath the Holy City  
the adventurers feel about

I put the metzig torch away.

'What do we do now?' Tsaphar says.

'Let's just walk slowly. I'll shuffle my feet in case there's a hole. You hold on to my shoulders.'

We're walking very slowly. I'm feeling the rock wall next to me.

'What about scorpions and snakes?' Tsaphar says.

I just keep quiet and keep walking. I don't want to think about that.

Then, I remember. 'He said nothing will hurt us while we're down here if we come when he said to.'

'And we did.'

'So nothing will hurt us.'

I feel better. I can tell by the way she's holding onto me she feels better too.

This is taking a long, long time.

I'm hungry again. We still have another couple of pieces of matzo in our bag.

'Want to stop and eat?' I say.

'Yeah.'

'I think there's a rock here. We can sit down.'

We sit down. I feel about in the bag for the bread.

We're eating.

'Is that a light over there?' Tsaphar says.

I look.

Sure enough. There's a very dim reddish light. It's so dim, we wouldn't have seen it had we still had our torch on -- not even a fire light.

We quickly finish our bread.

We start off again. This time, I see the wall's not on my right any more. We must be in that place he said there were several ways to go.

We follow the dim red light. It gets bigger and bigger. It's also getting much brighter.

Now, I see where the light is coming from. It's just below us. We have to climb down.

Finally we're through. We're blinded by the light of the setting sun.

This looks like a place where water should be flowing into the pool below us.

We climb down. It's a large square pool.

He had said that usually, this passage would have water in it. It probably feeds the pool.

'We're on the West side of the city,' I say. 'We have to get over to the East side.'

'We've walked a long way then,' says Tsaphar.

'Let's go.'

We go through a gate not far from us.

The houses here look a lot nicer than where we've been before. That, over there, is one of the most beautiful palaces I've ever seen since arriving on this planet -- besides the temple. It's almost up to some of the ones in Teknesh. The other houses here are beautiful too, but got high walls around them.

The farther we go, the closer to the street they are.

We can tell, as we pass some of the houses, people are having their Passover Seder.

We're going down-hill. I see a wall further down there, but there's more of the city on the other side. We can see the Temple far off on top of the next hill.

There's a large street crossing the one we're on, and it looks like this one dead-ends into the wall. We turn and go down the other street until we find a way through.

Tsaphar says, 'I'm amazed when I think about it.'

'What?'

'Reb Yeshua said we'd have just enough light. We did, then it went out. If it had still been on, we wouldn't have seen the sunlight coming through the passage.'

'And that was the sun shining straight through that hole,' I add.

Finally, we find a gate. On the other side, the road starts going up-hill again. I think this is the Lower City now, the part of town we're used to, with the crowded markets and all. No one's selling anything though. I looks a lot different at night.

Lots of people are camped along the street. Some are having their Seder. A few are finished.

We've been through parts of this before, but we still don't totally know our way about.

We get lost. We go through this way and that, whichever leads away from where the sky is still red. Then we see the pinnacles of the Temple. That helps us.

We don't always see them, because we have to go down some hills and up others. Sometimes we get to a dead end, and we have to go back the way we came. Then we have to find our way around another wall.

We're lost again.

It's completely dark now, except for a few candles and torches. Everyone's long finished their Seder. Most people are settling down to sleep.

Some people look at us funny as they see us going one way, and then coming back the other.

We finally see the gate to the outside, but it's Fountain Gate, the one next to Shalom pool. It's shut, but we see people coming in by a tiny door, just like at the other gate. We go through.

We know where we are now, but we have a long way to go.

We can smell both the animal hides from Kidron, and the rubbish from Gei Hinnom.

We go through the gate and head down the road that leads along the side of the hill into Kidron Valley.

I hope this is safe. We don't have any power left the power cells, so we can't use the metzig torch to frighten anyone off if they attack. It's dark enough though, so no one sees us.

After a long time, we meet the road from Ophel Gate, and and later still, the road that runs around the city.

There's a few houses along the road here. It's really like one big city, even outside the walls all the way to Beit Anya and Olive Hill.

I'll be glad to get home and rest. We still have a long way to go.

We start to turn in the direction of Beit Anya.

There's a noisy crowd of people coming towards the intersection from the direction of Olive Hill. Some of them are holding torches, and other people have knives. People from the neighbourhood come out to look.

Someone at the front of the crowd shouts, 'Nothing here to concern yourselves about. Go back to your beds!'

Some people go back inside, but a few are curious. We stand over towards the way to Beit Anya and watch them pass. They turn up the road into the city.

The last time we watched a crowd passing by here was the king's procession where everyone was waving palm branches.

A kid is standing near us, watching them. He's only got on a loin cloth.

Suddenly, he shouts, 'Hoi! It's Messiah! Rabbi Yeshua!'

He runs forward. One of the men grabs him and holds him. He struggles and gets away, but the man who had him has his loincloth. He's running away naked.

I look.

Sure enough! It is Reb Yeshua! They're taking him somewhere by force!

We stand there, frozen.

The crowd passes. A few others are following.

There's Yohannan, the kid who came to fetch us yesterday!

We run to him. 'What's happening?' I say.

'I don't know! Those men just came up to the garden on the hill, and took him! I think Yehuda led them to us.'

'Yehuda?'

'Yehuda Ish Kiriot. One of us. A traitor!'

We're walking with him, following the crowd of men up the road to the gate we went in this morning.

The gate is shut. Someone shouts. They open it and they all go in.

We manage to get in behind them.

There are footsteps behind us. I look. It's Kefa.

He barely gets in before the gate closes.

'This can't be happening!' he's saying. 'We've got to stop this!'

We walk past the place where we went down the ancient well. Someone's taken our rope.

The crowd keeps going. We're up to the gate Tsaphar and I came through from the nicer section of the city. We're through, going straight up another road.

We turn up a lane going up along the side of the hill where there's lots of fancy houses. One looks like it could be the king's palace -- if this place had a king, and if we hadn't seen an even bigger one before.

'The High Priest's house,' says Yohannan. 'My mother's related to the family. We can get in if we wait a bit. Then we can find out what's going down.'

Just around the hill behind Yohannan's relative's house, I catch a glimpse of the big palace we saw earlier.

'What's that?' I say.

'Herod's Palace,' says Kefa. 'May fire descend from heaven and consume it.'

The crowd goes in the main door. We wait a while.

Some other important people begin arriving.

Yohannan says to Kefa, 'They might recognise you at this door. Go around to the service entrance, and I'll get someone to open up for you there.'

He tells Tsaphar and me to follow. 'Try to look like you've just travelled a long way. We're dropping in to my uncle's.'

Like we've travelled a long way? That shouldn't be difficult!

We approach the guard at the door.

First he looks at us, ready to turn us away.

'Zakkai!' says Yohannan. 'Remember me?'

He looks at him, and suddenly says, 'Why, Yohannan! I haven't seen you since your bar mitzvah! How you've grown! Is your father with you?'

'I've -- er -- been apprenticed. My master said I could come here for Passover though.'

'Well, come in! Are these your friends?'

'Yes.'

'But I should tell you, right now isn't a good time to visit your Uncle Kayafah. He's got some urgent business, and some important people from the temple and the Sanhedrin have to meet here. You see, they have to try a notorious rebel, or the Romans will be down on us. Just go in quietly, help yourselves to something in the kitchen; when I get the chance, I'll tell you're uncle you're here.'

'Okay,' he agreed, and we're walking in as though we own the place.

This is a bit like where they put us up in Teknesh, but at the same time, sort of like the houses on Tok, in that it has a courtyard. The rooms on the ground floor go all around it, with a porch sticking out towards the middle on three sides. Some well dressed people that have been waiting on the porch take Reb Yeshua through a corridor on the opposite end, and the rough looking men who brought him all stay in the courtyard. There's a fireplace in the middle. We go into the courtyard.

On the side without a porch there's a passage going off towards a door to the outside.

Yohannan says, 'Wait here. I'll go tell them to let Kefa in.'

He goes to talk to a girl while we wait.

The men look as though they're waiting for someone to tell them what to do next.

A man comes out of the place they took Reb Yeshua.

'Okay, men,' he says. 'Your job's not finished yet, but for now, take a rest. Someone will bring food and drink.'

I've heard that voice before.

'We just have to wait until we know what the big boys will decide, and then I'll tell you what to do next.'

It sounds almost like that man -- Mordecai!

He starts to turn about.

It is him!

He's looking about at everyone in the courtyard. He's starting to look this way.

'Tsaphar! Turn around!' I whisper. I turn around too.

Yohannan is coming out with Kefa.

'Who is that man there?' I ask.

'That? That's Mordecai ben Levi. If he's here, that means Hanan ben Shet is behind all this.'

'He works for Hanan?'

'His right hand.'

'We think he murdered Reb Hyrcanah ben Mattai.'

'Huh?'

'I don't want him to see me. He might know me.'

'He's going inside now.'

We wait about a while, doing nothing.

Kefa says, 'So, w-what's going to happen?'

He's looking nervous.

Yohannan says, 'I can go and try to listen. You, maybe, go sit over there.' He points Tsaphar to a corner of the courtyard where there are some women sitting about. 'You two come with me if you want. There's a room where we can listen.'

'Er -- no way -- er-- I-I'll just stand out here and keep a look-out,' says Kefa.

So it's only Yohannan and me. He takes me up to the porch, and we go along to the other side. There's a way leading off between some of the rooms there. We follow some of the men through that into another courtyard.

This house must be really big!

The courtyard here is much more beautiful than the other. It's lit up with torches all about, and I can see a garden in the middle with trees and flowers. There's even a fountain. I'm sure it would be beautiful in daylight. Everyone's going through a big door on the other side. Yohannan leads me to a smaller door near it.

This room is all dark except for some light coming in through a sort of lattice partition through which we can see into the other room. The big room looks like the prayer room of a synagogue.

'This is where the women sit when they have prayers,' whispers Yohannan.

There's lots of men there, but it looks as though they're waiting for more to come.

I see Reb Yeshua standing in a corner, with a couple of armed men about him.

The well dressed man standing up is doing a lot of the talking.

'Where's Arukh ben Sha'ul? Is he here yet?' he says.

'He on his way,' says a man. 'Shim'on ben Gam'liel is also coming. Sha'ul of Tarsus is indisposed.'

'Then call Levi ben Yohannan. If he's not available, call Shim'on of Yaffa. We need the full number before we can convene a beit din.

'Yes sir,' says the man and he goes off.

'Who is that?' I whisper.

'That's my Uncle Kayafah. He's the High Priest.'

'I thought it was that man, Hanan ben something.'

'That's Uncle Kayafah's father-in-law. He controls everything. He lets different people be the High Priest when their turn comes but only if they do everything he tells them to do.'

Kayafah's talking again. 'Mordecai, are the witnesses ready? We're waiting for only two more, and we'll begin.'

'They're ready and waiting to be called.'

Yohannan is looking about the room. 'They've only called the people who already hate Rabban! This isn't fair! They should have called the Great Sanhedrin in the Chamber of Hewn Stone.'

He's looking some more. 'They called the pupils of Gam'liel, even his son, but they didn't call Gam'liel himself! I also don't see Rabbi Nicodemon, nor Yehuda ben Tamai, nor Yohannan ben Zakkai, nor ...'

## 19

Tsaphar sat by the women near the fire. She looked and listened, if for nothing else, to keep her mind off her loneliness.

The men, about fifty of them, were milling about, some of them coming to warm themselves at the fire whenever they felt chilly.

Three attendants came in, one carrying a basket of bread and another of raw meat. The third handed out long forks to the men, who began roasting the meat on the fire.

Men all over the courtyard crowded about the attendants. As many as would fit came near the fire. Some of them stood right in front of the girls, forcing them to scoot back a bit.

'Real meat!' said the man standing right in front of Tsaphar.

'The last time I had meat, let me see, was on my twentieth birthday!' said another.

'Me? At my bar mitzvah!'

'I only remember the smell of it from my circumcision!'

The men within earshot roared with laughter.

All Tsaphar could smell was body odour and other smells.

'No! That was your foreskin you smelled!' shouted someone.

More laughter.

'It's a good life being a priest, isn't it!' said the someone else when the laughter died down.

'Did they say they were bringing drink as well?' shouted someone.

'Yeah! Let's have it!' The courtyard erupted again.

'Hear hear!

'Patience gentlemen!' shouted an attendant. 'Wine's on its way.'

'So, do you reckon this'll to stop the revolt?' said someone closer by in a lower tone.

'Hope not,' said another.

'If they keep paying us more than the Zealots did, I won't complain!'

'Yeah! When's the last time Bar Abba dished out fresh meat and wine?' The conversation was widening.

'Bar Abba won't be doing much of that again. He's due for nailing up, isn't he!'

'So, Bar Abba's out of the way, this Nazarene -- what will they do, stone him? What will be left for the Zealots? They saw the Nazarene as King Messiah!'

'So, do you think there will be a messiah?' said someone across the fire pit.

'Hah! Not in a hundred years!'

'Not if Hanan ben Shet has his way, anyway.'

Someone shouted, 'The P'rushim and Sons of Light are bad enough. Who wants a bloody king shoving Torah observance down our throats!'

'Hear hear!' The whole end of the courtyard was responding.

Someone began setting out pitchers and cups along the edge of the porch where the men could reach them. Men began gathering about the pitchers. That drew some of the crowds away from the fire. Tsaphar could breathe again.

She wished for Eetoo. At least having him beside her was better than nothing.

A conversation behind her caught her ear. '...so when we got to Gaza, the boss said he had the man's word for it that the next caravan would be short of a few guards, so he sent us back to the oasis to work that one -- told us to meet him back here. So we went, and -- well --'

'He had it wrong, or what?'

'No. It was dismally short of guards -- should have been easy takings. It's just -- how can I say it? This bright light starts shining from on of the tents! A angel, or something. Scared us out of our wits!'

'No!'

'Don't believe me, ask Zakkai! He was going into a tent to screw a chick when...'

Some louder conversation started near the fire again, so Tsaphar didn't catch the rest. Nor did she see who the speaker was.

She could see Kefa still walking nervously about. Someone approached him and offered him a cup. Suddenly it looked as though he recognised him and asked him about something -- accusingly, Tsaphar thought. Kefa answered something but she couldn't hear it from where she sat, but she thought she caught Kefa's words, '...don't know the man!'

Didn't know who? Tsaphar wondered. There was only one man she could imagine they could be talking about, but he certainly couldn't be denying him!

## 20

allegations, countered by objections  
more witnesses, more cross-examining

the search continues for evidence that carries weight

They've been trying all sorts of ways to make Reb Yeshua out to be a bad man, deserving to die. So far, they can't seem to agree on anything. Some witnesses get up and say this, or that, but some others get up and say, 'No way, can't get him on that,' or 'That's false charges, we can't do that.' Usually it's someone like Shim'on ben Gam'liel or one of the others who know Gam'liel himself.

Yohannan's uncle just called for a rest. Someone's out to fetch some more witnesses.

I know which one's Hanan ben Shet and which is Kayafah now. There are some of Hanan's sons as well. Some of them have also been High Priest before. His youngest isn't old enough to be one yet. He's named Hanan, after his father. He's dressed really stylish, like some of the rich kids I've seen about the city. He acts cool with some of the younger people here. He's over in one section near us, talking about his conquests. He's worse than Tsim and Rav!

Here come Hanan ben Shet and Kayafah. They don't know there's anyone behind this lattice. They stop right in front of us.

'Whoever invited the pupils of Gam'liel?' says Hanan.

'They're on our side! Their rabbi might not be for this, but these ones want his hide as much as we do.'

'But they're too freak'n stringent! We've had one good story after another thrown down the cesspool because of these. For goodness sake! We've got to have the man put away!'

'Do you want it on false charges or what?'

'Any charges are better than none! The choice is, we get him, or the Romans get us! Don't you get the picture? He's the key to it all! The Zealots hope in him; he's the fuel for the revolt. The Romans know that. If we stop him, we've stopped the revolt. We've bought ourselves more time! You said so yourself at the last meeting.'

'But I still don't think this is going to work. If we take him for stoning on the charges we've come up with so far, the people...'

'So don't stone him then. Have the Romans nail him to one of their stakes! The new prefect, Pontius Pilate is in town and I've had a word in his ear. So is Herod. The opportunity couldn't be better. The Romans kill him, the blame gets taken from us. He'll be our Passover lamb. His blood atones for our nation's sedition! Now go to it!'

'Right.'

Kayafah's calling the meeting back to order.

Hanan is over on the other side now, talking to his son. 'Do you have to be such a noisy braggart? There are P'rushim here for goodness sake!'

* * *

Tsaphar listened to the girl in amazement.

'...and not only do they sell the hide,  but they also make money at the front end. They're very picky about what they allow to be sacrificed. Even if  you're poor and bring the best dove you have, they'll usually find something wrong with them and tell you to buy one of theirs, and you have to pay a lot more for it than you'd pay at the market.'

'Wow! What about the coins?'

'That too. You can only use their special Temple coins for the Temple tax and for redeeming the first-born. They charge what they want for them.'

'So they make lots of money out of the Temple!'

'That's only one part. The annual tithes and first fruit offerings, it used to be, people brought that themselves, and only if they wanted to be Torah observant. Now, they send their men to each farm in the country and collect it, as though it were a tax. After paying the tax to the Romans, my father just couldn't afford it. He lost his farm, and then had to sell me.'

Most of the men were either talking in small groups, or sleeping. Only Kefa was shifting here and there, looking like a fish trying to choose between a frying pan and a fire.

'Do you like working here?' Tsaphar asked her. Having a girl her age to talk to was just what she needed right now.

'No. It's -- like -- totally evil here! I just want to run away. I've thought of going to join this Nazarene man they were saying was Messiah – but...'

Kefa wandered slowly over to warm himself. He looked strung out, ready to run from his own shadow.

Tsaphar was aware of movement near the passage to the meeting room.

The girl looked at Kefa. 'Weren't you one of the Nazarene man's followers?'

'Oh! No! Not me! I don't even know the man! I swear it!' Kefa almost shouted.

A couple of the men sitting nearby looked their way, chuckling.

A cock crowed, and almost made Kefa jump out of his skin. It was the second crowing of the cock, which meant day was dawning.

Kefa glanced towards the porch, and his face froze, as though he saw a ghost. He abruptly arose and ran to the service entrance.

Tsaphar looked towards where Kefa had looked. There stood Reb Yeshuah, looking sadly after Kefa.

At that moment, one of the men jerked the rope binding his hands, and they were off along the porch to the other door.

Tsaphar's attention was distracted again.

'Now listen up men!' it was Mordecai! 'Here's the scoop. There's a bag of cash at the door for each of you for service rendered so far. But you're not finished. There's more where that came from. You are to go out and gather as many of your mates as you can. Bring them to the Pretorium. Each of you bring at least fifty men, tell them to bring all their mates. We'll pay any of them that brings ten or more. Use what you have in your bags to pay the ones you contact, and you'll get double before the day's out, and we'll pay the others as well. We need a crowd, a big one. And keep your eyes and ears on me. I'll be coming around telling you what to say, you repeat it to the men you bring and so on. Have them shouting and chanting the same thing. We have to make an impression. Make Ponius Pilate shit in his toga if he doesn't nail up the Nazarene. You got that?'

'Yes sir!' 'Righty-ho!' 'Hear, hear!' etc.

'Right then! Go to it!'

He started handing out bags to each man as they passed through the service entrance.

Tsaphar remained huddled in the corner next to her friend. She no longer cared if Mordecai saw her or not. Nothing really mattered any more.

She had seen what the Romans did to terrorists and bandits. They nailed them up, and left them hanging on stakes until they died slowly.

And they'll try Reb Yeshua as a terrorist! What a horrible way for such a gentle loving person to die.

'Tsaphar!'

Eetoo and Yohannan were there.

'Oh, hi, Zipporah, -- er -- where's Kefa?' asked Yohannan.

'He ran off -- that way -- just a while ago,' said Tsaphar.

'That was one of you then,' said Zipporah. 'Have you talked to your uncle yet?'

'I don't wanna see him right now. I can't believe he did this!'

'I think he's looking for you.'

Tsaphar looked up. There was a well dressed man walking towards them.

'Yohannan?'

'Yes sir,' said Yohannan, weakly.

'It's good to see you! How's your father? Is he here for Passover?'

'I donno.'

'Come! Aren't you glad to see your Uncle Kayafah?'

'You just condemned my rabbi to death, didn't you!'

'He was your rabbi?'

'And the Messiah of Yisrael!'

'Come! There are issues here that are too deep for your young mind to understand!'

'Oh, I understand it all right!'

'And besides, it was out of my hands. I had no choice.

'No choice? You're the High Priest, dammit!'

'Yohannan! That's no way to talk to your uncle -- nor to the High Priest for that matter. Now you and your friends stay here. This city is no place for you to be running about, especially on a day like this.'

He turned and called the guard. 'Zakkai, make sure my nephew and his friends don't leave the premises.'

'Yes sir.'

As Reb Kayafah left, he said, 'You have nothing to worry about. If he is, indeed, Messiah, he can take care of himself. Neither the High Priest nor the Roman army will stand in his way.'

He was off.

## 21

breakfast on a palace roof - with a view of the city

the Temple reflects the sunlight, adding to it it's golden sheen  
while Herod's palace competes for glory

between the two, the beautiful parts of the city  
a curtain hides the ugly places:

the Lower City - and the Vale of Gei Hinnom

Great! Now we're prisoners in this place.

I was right last night. The place is breathtakingly beautiful in light of day. It's a lot bigger than just the two courtyards too. They've served us breakfast on the rooftop above the fourth floor, where we can see all of Yarushalayim. We can't eat much, though.

There are two reasons I can't enjoy this. First, they've condemned the King. How can I enjoy nice things from the man who's intent on taking away the hope of humanity? The second reason -- sitting here, looking down at parts of the Lower City reminds me of it -- the way the rest of the people live. How can anyone stuff themselves with such fancy food while people down there are starving? They run water through these fountains and the hot bath as though there were a lake nearby, while people in the city are fighting over a few drops!

I get up and pull back the curtain, so we can see the rest of the Lower City and Gei Hinnom.

Now, we can see some people out scrounging for food on the rubbish heaps. They even look like cockroaches!

There's plenty of nice food on this table. If only I could throw it far enough...

An attendant brings more food. He looks at the curtain, and puts it back. He suggests we enjoy a hot bath.

That reminds me of the palace where we were prisoners in Teknesh \-- still no less a prison.

I hope -- I dearly hope the High Priest is right, that Reb Yeshua can take care of himself. Otherwise, the planet is finished. The Groki will simply decimate all of humanity from the universe.

I even wonder if Reb Yeshua even knows that. I mean, like he knows everything else except the things that should matter to him. He even gave them their accusation back there when all the others didn't work. He outright told them, 'You'll see me at the right hand of my Father.' It's as though he felt sorry for them that they couldn't find an accusation that could stick, so he gave them one.

Does he even know the world's going to end if he doesn't finish up as the king?

We go downstairs to one of the guest bedrooms.

I really need the sleep, but my head's too full of things. These are the softest cushions I've ever rested on, but, like everything else here, I can't enjoy it.

Reb Yeshua was right again, we'd need the rest before going down that hole. We're certainly not getting it now.

Yohannan even refuses to sit on the soft couch. He says, 'How can I lie in a soft bed while my rabbi is all beaten to a pulp, sitting in a bare cold cell?'

We just sit on the floor, looking at the wall.

Yohannan whispers, 'I'm going to try to find a way out of here and see what's going on.'

'We'll go with you,' I say.

Yohannan thinks a while.

'It might be hard for the three of us to get past Zakkai.'

'I could wait here,' says Tsaphar. 'Zipporah can keep me company.'

That's the maid she made friends with last night. She's been bringing us things all morning.

So, the two of us go downstairs.

Zakkai is at the door. He doesn't see us yet, because there's someone coming -- it's Mordecai!

He does see us. He looks at me for a while.

'I've seen you somewhere...why! You're -- Hyrcanah's pupil! Whatever are you doing here? Have you got the wrong High Priest or what?'

'I was with the right one until you killed him.' I'm not afraid of him any more.

'What? Come now! Isn't he here in Yerushalayim?'

'Don't you play stupid with me!'

Now, that gets a rise out of him -- but we're interrupted by someone who's just barged past past Zakkai. Zakkai's scuffling to catch him.

'Hey!' says the man to Mordecai. 'You didn't tell me you were going to have him condemned!'

I've seen this man before too.

'What's it got to do with me?' says Mordecai. 'If you don't like it, go talk to the boss.'

'Where is he?'

'Where do you think he is? He's got duties. It's time for the morning sacrifice, isn't it!'

Just as the man's shouting more profanities, Yohannan grabs my arm and we slip past Zakkai, who's holding the man by one arm.

I can still hear Mordecai saying, 'Hey! You got your wad. Buy a piece of land and settle down! Do some farming ...'

I can't hear the rest. We're walking fast.

'That was Yehudah!' says Yohannan.

That's where I've seen him! He was one of his own pupils!

Suddenly he walks right past us, almost pushing us over. 'I'll buy some land, I will!' he's muttering. I think he's so worked up he doesn't even recognise Yohannan.

We'll go to Reb Yakov's house first to tell them what's going on, and then to Lazar's place to tell the rest.

* * *

We're at this place they call the Pretorium. It's a part of Antonia Castle, which we saw when we first arrived in Yerushalayim, next to the Temple. It's so crowded we can't get anywhere close. The people near us are only trying to see what's going on. The ones in the front are doing the shouting.

We're both short so we can't see. There's a low wall over there where some people are standing.

Yohannan says, 'Let's go there.'

The wall is full. One of the men on the wall loses his balance, so Yohannan scrambles up. There's actually room for two our size, so he pulls me up.

I can see some people standing on a balcony. One man is dressed in a fine toga, who looks pretty important. The one next to him looks like he's interpreting. There are some people behind them. Two are armed guards, and the other -- someone wearing a purple cloth draped over his shoulders. He looks beaten up -- badly! And what's that funny thing he's wearing on his head?

Is it Reb Yeshua? It must be! What have they done to him?

He's just standing there quietly, like in Kayafah's house, as though he were playing their game in spite of the pain he must be in.

The man in the toga looks as though he's having a hard time. He's taking a deep breath.

He says something, and the man next to him translates: 'Okay then, I understand that it is the custom to release to you one prisoner on your special holiday. I have two people in custody as of now, Yeshua of Natseret, and Bar Abba. Who shall I release to you?'

The people near us start saying, 'Yeshua, of course!' 'Yeshua!'

Yohannan and I are shouting as well.

The noise of the people in front drowns us out: 'Bar Abba! Bar Abba!'

The man on the balcony shouts, and the interpreter says, 'Okay, Bar Abba it is. What shall I do with Yeshua of Natseret, who's called King of the Jews?'

The people near us are saying, 'You gotta be kidding!' and 'No way!' 'Yeshua, not a terrorist!'

People further in front of us start turning and giving us such threatening looks that we all quiet down, but the shouts from the front are, 'Nail him up! Nail him up!'

It's so catching that even some of the people near us are saying it, even one I noticed saying 'No way'.

They just keep chanting that over and over. They say some other things, and finally, the man on the balcony throws his hands up. Someone brings him a basin of water and he washes his hands.

Now, they're taking him inside. People in the front are cheering.

They bring him down to the front, a sort of courtyard, near where the people are, and there's this post in the middle. They're lifting him up so he's hanging from a nail in the post by the rope tying his hands. They tear his coat off so his back is bare. There's someone with a mean looking whip -- he starts whipping. Blood splatters all over the place. The ends of the whip are digging into his skin.

With every whip the people all cheer like they would for each punch in a boxing match.

They just keep it up and keep it up. When will they stop?

I look away. I see Yohannan's covering his eyes, gritting his teeth. Tears are coming out both of our eyes.

It's over, finally. They take him down. He can hardly stand up any more.

Now they've taken him inside. People are still standing about.

Now, it looks like people are making way for someone.

I'm glad we're not on the ground. We'd be getting squeezed pretty badly now.

It's the group of them that held the trial at Yohannan's uncle's house. There's Hanan ben Shet up front with Kayafah, a group of the others, the P'rushim, the other big wigs, and finally there's Mordecai.

Yohannan sits down and covers his face. I think he doesn't want his uncle to see him.

They all have satisfied looks on their faces -- all except for Kayafah. He's looking a bit worried.

Hanan seems to notice it. He nudges him, and right as they pass close to us, I can hear him say, 'Hey! What's the problem? We've got it in the bag!'

'I don't know. It's just that ...'

Mordecai is looking especially pleased with himself.

I know exactly what happened now. Reb Yeshua and Reb Hyrcanah were both part of what was supposed to be the new kingdom: Hyrcanah as the righteous High Priest, and Yeshua as King Messiah. Mordecai went to Alexandria just to find Hyrcanah because he heard from the Sons of Light that he would be their High Priest, and he murdered him. Now, he's helping them do the same with Yeshuah.

Doesn't he know he's dooming the human race?

He's coming past now.

'Murderers!' I shout.

He looks about and sees me.

'You!'

Some of the others start shouting at them too.

They're gone now.

## 22

like pupils playing truant from a school master, they wander the city  
in fact it's the master who's absent

We don't know what to do with ourselves. I don't want to go back to Yakov's house without Tsaphar. Yohannan doesn't want to go to his uncle's house, so we sit on a wall beside a street talking about things.

Yohannan's telling me about the things Reb Yeshua did, and some of the things he said.

He was a pretty amazing bloke! He healed people just by putting his hands on them. He even taught Yohannan and the other pupils to do it too, and sent them out places to tell everyone that the Kingdom of Adonai had come, and to get ready. The fact that they could heal people, and get rid of evil spirits proved to everyone that they were telling the truth. It's like the kingdom of good was taking over from the kingdom of evil, where bad things happening to people.

As he's telling me all this, I think about all the poor people we saw on the way here, and all the beggars here in Yerushalayim. He was even healing the lepers! People's lives were getting better because of him, and that was the Kingdom of Adonai already proving itself by pushing all the things from the kingdom of evil out of the way wherever he went.

I wonder what he could have done on Thevsos, on the ground?

We get tired of waiting in one place, so we walk to another. People all over are talking about what happened.

He's telling me more stories. It cheers him up a bit to be telling them.

'There's one thing he started saying that we couldn't figure out. It didn't make sense, and it still doesn't make sense.'

'What?'

'He said that when we got to Yerushalayim for the yom tov, the elders and the Priests would take him and hand him to the gentiles. He'd die, but on the third day, he'd rise again.'

'They've done that now, haven't they.'

'I guess they have, but it still doesn't make sense.'

'I know.'

'Where's that place they said you and the girl came from?' he asks, suddenly.

'Er -- I lived in Tok for a while, and that's where I met Tsaphar. She's from there, but I lived on Kalodzu-Famta.'

'That's like -- far away, isn't it?'

'Yeah.'

'What's it near?'

'Er -- you might not be able to believe it if I told you.'

'I don't know. I've seen some pretty amazing things -- you know -- with my rabbi and all.'

'Okay -- you know the Zodiac, that you can see from here?'

'Yeah?'

'Some of the stars in Capricorn, that are the faintest from here? We can see one of them on Kalodzu-Famta.'

'That far?'

'You can't even see our star from here.'

'Your -- what?'

'Like -- our sun. The star our planet revolves around. Like this planet revolves around this star.'

'That's not a star, that's the sun!'

'Yeah, but all the stars are like that. It's just that they're so far away. If you're on a planet that revolves around any star, it'll look just like this one.'

'Oh.'

We're quiet for a while. I think he's given up trying to understand it.

'Maybe I'll come visit you sometime,' he says, finally.

Someone's shouting, 'They're taking him off to be nailed! Skull Hill!'

People start talking, and some start going.

Yohannan says, 'Let's go!'

We're walking along in the same direction as everyone else. The farther we go, the more crowded it gets.

Now, we can't hardly walk any more.

We're coming to a gate. It's really slow here because of the bottleneck.

People are saying all sorts of things.

'He's gonna call fire down from heaven! I know it!' 'Good riddance!' 'This is it!' 'Just watch! He'll defeat the Romans and the corrupt system all in one go!' 'I just wanna watch him hang!'

We're up to the gate. Now we're walking faster.

I see the hill I think must be what they call 'Skull Hill'. It does look like a skull. A couple of caves look like eye sockets. There are stakes with people hanging naked from them, just like we saw on the way to here. Some of them look as though they're dead already. The one's who aren't dead yet look like they're suffering horribly. They can hardly breath.

There's three vacant stakes stuck in the ground near the top of the hill. The middle one, I see they're hoisting a crossbar up with a pulley. It's got someone hanging from it -- literally nailed, from what I can tell.

It's him!

He's letting them do it too!

They've got him all the way up. Now, someone's nailing the feet.

This looks about as close as we can get. Yohannan wants to get closer though.

We move up a bit at a time, squeezing passed people. We're smaller, so it's easier for us.

People are shouting things.

Now they're hoisting people up the other two stakes.

Someone's saying, 'Look! If you're really King Messiah, then come on down! We'll believe you.'

'That was my uncle!' Yohannan says.

He actually sounded sincere. Other people don't. They're saying things like, 'Yeah! Come down if you can!' 'You claim to save others, why don't you save yourself?' 'You still gonna build it back up in three days or what?'

Some of them are spitting.

I think this is about as far as it's safe for us to go. All the ones in front are the ones jeering at him.

But Yohannan is still working his way forward.

Suddenly, he moves to the right. He's scared of something.

I look. There, standing right there are Hanan ben Shet, and Kayafah.

Hanan is smiling broadly.

I can just hear him say, 'We won't be having any messiahs interrupting our agenda now, will we Kayafah.'

Kayafah stands still, staring at Yeshua, as though he's worried about something.

Some of the people are going away now. We're getting closer.

The gods! He does look ghastly! I never knew it was possible to look like that and still be alive. Blood's dripping down everywhere, more than just dripping in some places. He's covered with that, and people's spit, and bits of human manure they've been throwing.

The Roman soldiers are making a big joke of it. They've even got a sign stuck up in three languages. I can read the Hebrew. It's 'Yeshua of Natseret, King of the Jews'. The other stakes have signs like that too, with their name and what they did, such as terrorist, bandit, murderer, and that sort of thing.

He's being executed for being a king? At least someone's acknowledging it.

I wonder -- if they wrote that in Groki, if they'd hold off exterminating humanity?

I see the soldiers have got his clothes, and they're giving each one a piece. His overcoat doesn't have a seam and they don't want to rip such a nice garment. They're drawing straws for it. The one who won is taking it, and mockingly saying 'thank you' or something to Yeshua.

They have no idea!

Some of the people from Reb Yakov's house are here now. It's easier to get close now that the crowd is getting tired and thinning out a bit. The ones who didn't like him are probably bored with it. Those men we saw at Yohannan's uncle's house probably just want their money.

Yeshua's saying things to people. Just now, he said something to Yohannan. He's standing with Ima Miriam. I couldn't catch what he said.

Suddenly he's looking my way. He sees me, I swear it! But he's looking -- like he's asking me something with his eyes. It's not about the golden plates. It's the same look he gave me when whispered that Tsaphar was lonely.

I'm sure he's suffering more than I can even imagine. Yet, he manages to think about Tsaphar's loneliness!

Some other people get in the way. Now he's looking another direction.

* * *

I hear that Mordechai's voice again. I don't bother to turn my head. He's talking to someone -- some rabbi or other.

'... he just said, "What I've written, I've written." He won't change it.'

'But it makes it sound like his offence was being Messiah!' says the other man.

'To them, that is the offence. We spent all morning explaining that to him.'

'It took long enough.'

'I'll never understand the Romans! He was after his hide, like the rest of us, so -- why...?'

'I guess he would have preferred we stone him.'

'But what could we stone him for? The Jewish community's too divided. Half of them would turn around and stone us! This way, it's their problem.'

'He knows that, I expect.'

'Yes, I expect -- on top of that he goes and changes his mind at the last minute.'

'Changed his mind?'

'You know how superstitious they are. His wife has this dream -- tells him the man's good, don't have anything to do with putting him away. So, he starts throwing all this crap at us -- says he's had his men watching and listening. He hasn't found anything treasonable -- reckons we have more to fear from him than the Romans. There's nothing in what he's heard that suggests he'd try to overthrow the empire. Maybe he'd be another local king, like the Herods. If we want, send him to Antipas. He's in town. Maybe he'd be paranoid about a rival king.'

'But "Messiah" won't be just some local puppet king. Everyone knows that.'

'I know, but before we bring that up, he's already given the orders. We figure it might work for us anyway. I mean, God knows, the old man, Herod the Great, used to get tied up into knots over possible rivals. So we go to him. He just wants to see a sideshow. He doesn't get one, so he does one himself -- fixes him up in that get-up you saw -- sends him back -- Pilate laughs his head off. Finally, we had to turn on the mob. If nothing else gets him nervous, that does. We explain to him that Herod isn't afraid of him, because, to every Jew, "Messiah" means he won't just be Herod's rival, but Caesar's. Then we got our mob chanting like they're all true blue Romans -- you know -- fans of old man Tiberius, and if Pilate won't ...'

Now they're walking away. I still don't turn about. I don't care anyway -- the rabbi suddenly turns and goes the other way. I've seen him somewhere -- I think it's the same one we saw in the market, weaving tent cloth.

The king is still hanging up there! When's he going to call it?

## 23

clouds have gathered for a storm; the midday sky has darkened  
as have the spirits of all who hoped for light

I've been doing nothing but sitting here, waiting. When's he going to do something? Is he going to let the world end?

It's been dark since about noon. Not just dark like during a storm, but really dark. It feels as though Adonai has forsaken us.

Suddenly, Reb Yeshua shouts something. I don't catch what he's saying.

I look up. He's looking at the sky, and suddenly, his head sinks down.

Is he dead?

It's suddenly getting even darker, like an eclipse or something. Lightening's flashing.

Oh the gods! The ground's shaking!

I've heard of earthquakes. Some planets have them. I've never been in one before. I don't know what to hold on to!

It's happening! It's the end!

I'm trying to stand up.

It's starting to rain. People are running down the hill.

Lightening is flashing really close by, as though it's going to strike us all.

Even the soldiers have suddenly turned sober. One of them just exclaimed something loudly in Latin and he's looking up at Yeshua like he's shocked.

People are screaming. Some are running for their lives. It's pouring now.

I can hear somebody laughing. I look about.

It's Hanan. He's just standing there, laughing like a mad man.

Next to him, is Kayafah, looking terrified, covering his head with his cloak. Suddenly, he turns and runs down the hill. Hanan is left by himself, still laughing and laughing.

He doesn't even sound human! I think even if he knew it was up for humanity, he'd still be laughing.

I take one more look at the hanging corpse. I'm off down the hill. At least I'm going to find some place dry to sit and wait for the planet to be engulfed in flames.

I can still hear that madman's laughter.

Wait -- forget being dry! Reb Yeshua got me thinking about Tsaphar, like it's his last wish. It'll be my last chance...

* * *

Tsaphar sat under the doorway of the foyer leading into the courtyard. Someone told her once that a door is the best place to sit during an earthquake.

Keeping dry was a different story. Some of the rain was blowing straight through from the front door, where Zakkai did his best to stand guard, all the way to the courtyard.

Zippora had told her she had never seen weather like this.

The sky had turned black. Tsaphar suspected an eclipse. Lightening was striking everywhere. There were screams, and sounds of trees falling in various places.

News came earlier that Reb Yeshua had been condemned and was on his way to be executed -- nailed up as though he were a terrorist. Was this the beginning of the end of the planet?

She could barely make out voices through the sound of the rain. Some men had taken shelter under the front door and were talking to Zakkai. He was telling them the High Priest wasn't in. He had gone to the execution.

The people came in and waited.

Their clothes were drenched, but they looked like Temple officials. They were talking excitedly among themselves.

Then, they turned towards the door. Kayafah was back.

Kayafah didn't look very well.

'Sir,' said one of the men. 'You need to come to the Temple. A most unimaginable thing has occurred.'

'What now?' he said, looking as though he'd already seen the worst.

'You'll have to see it to believe it!' said one.

'A miracle of the -- er -- diabolical sort -- a bad joke by the divinity, if you will,' said another.

'What?' demanded Kayafah.

'The Inner Sanctuary. You can see right into it from the door to the Outer Sanctuary.'

'The curtain, all three layers, has torn from the top, right down to the bottom. None of us dares to go in to fix it. You'd better come.'

Kayafah grabbed his forehead in both hands. 'On any other day but this, I'd swear you were joking with me.'

'We are certainly not joking, Sir.'

Kayafah let out a sigh. 'So, we've killed him.'

'Who?'

'King Messiah, son of David. He came, and we killed him.'

He followed the others out.

Tsaphar followed them to the door.

Just beyond the door, as the other were exiting, she saw Eetoo, peeping in. She simply followed the others out as though she had been asked to go along. It was just as well she had Eetoo's bag with her.

'We're going to catch cold in this rain,' she said as they walked in the direction of the gate.

'What does it matter? The world's going to end anyway. I just want you close when it happens.'

'Oh Eetoo! Does it take the end of the world to open your heart?'

'I'm sorry...'

## 24

Heptosh couldn't believe what he was seeing. The sky above Nephtesh was full of ships. Three of them had begun to descend.

Reports were arriving from all the planets in the new network that the same was happening all over. Most of them thought it was the Tekneshi forces coming to retaliate for the infringement on their sovereignty.

Heptosh didn't think they looked like human ships at all. Neither did Shan.

Though the space port was now serviceable and staffed, and was blinking out messages insisting that the newcomers hold to the accepted protocol, the three began to land, instead, in the open area about the pyramid.

Heptosh walked towards them, followed by Shan, Dr. Taknen, Rov and some of the others.

The doors opened, and out of each ship, came two Groki.

Heptosh held his hand up and made the recognised sign of peace.

The Groki made no sign at all.

Heptosh ventured, 'Our space port is serviceable. Why did you not follow the recognised landing protocol?'

'We do not recognise you as being the legitimate inhabitants of this planet,' said the first Groki.

'We have the permission of the king. Go to the royal palace yourself and ask him.'

'There has not been a king of this planet for four hundred years.'

'Was this not a human planet? We are simply returning to live where our forefathers once did.'

'You did not request permission to travel within this sector.'

'These people will not be doing much travelling. I understand your concerns, in light of the evils committed by the ancient Nephteshi empire. Each planet will be independent of the other, so this does not constitute the revival of any human empire.'

'Not a human empire, you say?' said the second Groki. 'We now count six planets, including this, located well outside the Noofrishi Sector, populated by your so-called Federation of Indigenous Nephteshis. Now, we've just repelled a horde of your ships all the way from the Zuyun galaxy. We had earlier been following the course of that craft there,' he pointed towards Heptosh's ship, 'and its presence here is proof that your "independent planets" are, in fact, part of an intergalactic human empire.'

'On the contrary. Amanhep's imperial ambitions have nothing to do with me. My job is with the sector's Department of Human Affairs.'

'Though, I understand you enabled him on his first conquest. And, you're certainly not here on sector business.'

'I was duped by him, as were the others in our Sector Council. I've been prevented from returning to my own sector because of the misunderstanding that resulted, so I'm here, engaged in a project entirely of my own. As for the Tekneshi ships, I must thank you for repelling them. We've just rescued all these people from their grasp, so they were undoubtedly here to retaliate. These are all victims of the same human oppression that gave the Nephteshi empire a bad name. They shouldn't present a problem, as they simply want to live and support themselves peacefully, and wont need to do any interplanetary travel.'

There was a pause. The three Groki appeared to be discussing something among themselves.

Finally, the first Groki said, 'They will, indeed, henceforth not be a problem. The time of humanity has, in fact, ended. Apart from defending our own sector's sovereignty, we are also awaiting confirmation of the destruction of humanity's home planet. When we have received it, we will proceed to clear the cosmos of humans, beginning with this planet, moving right on throughout the galaxy, to the Zuyun galaxy.'

'How will that confirmation come?' asked Heptosh.

'We have drones plying the galaxy that are capable of detecting any explosion on a planetary scale. When such an explosion occurs, we will send ships to the area and collect asteroid samples. If no such evidence is found, we then await evidence that the planet yet exists. It will be up to the human species to provide that proof.'

Heptosh, after a pause, said, 'We, likewise, are awaiting confirmation that the time of humanity has been extended.'

'So, we wait,' said the Groki.

So, they waited.

## 25

Tsaphar noted that the planet hadn't been engulfed in flames, although, she suspected for a while, it would be destroyed by water again.

It had been sunny enough to recharge the power cell for the computer. Eetoo put it on the roof before they both took a long nap downstairs. Tsaphar had woken up from that and noticed Eetoo reading what they had recorded .

He read some to her. It did say that the earth would be destroyed by fire if the King didn't redeem it. Maybe it was just a matter of time. Maybe the earthquake and the eclipse were only a sign, not yet the real thing.

There were some people in the front room. Tsaphar recognised Yohannan's voice.

She went out. There was Ima Miriam along with some other women. Most of them were weeping. Yakov had his arm about his mother's shoulder.

'Who, Again?' Yakov was saying.

'Yoseph of Har Mattia,' said one of the women. 'Rabbi Nicodemon assisted him, and we followed them, so we know the place. They didn't have time to do a proper job of embalming him, but I thought we could take some more oils and spices after the Shabbat.'

'Indeed,' said Yakov. 'The sun is already setting for Shabbat. That means we can't do anything until the first day of the new week. You would need to buy the ointments, though.'

'I have them already,' said another of the women.

'Oh Miriam, you have such presence of mind!' said the first woman. 'I would have never have thought of that, the state I've been in!'

'Nor I,' said the third.

Tsaphar noted that the other one was called Miriam as well. One was from Magdala, the other, the sister of Lazar.

Yakov said, 'Yohannan, you're welcome to stay here close to our mother. You are a good choice of a man to care for her, as you were especially close to him as well, and she'll be wanting to travel back to the Lake Galil region after the holiday season. Lazar's house might not be a good place right now, as they could come looking for you there. On the other hand, most of the Qumram people will be leaving shortly, so there will be plenty of room for all of you here.'

'I think the others are going to stay at the room we rented for the Passover Seder,' Yohannan said.

'That's probably a good place.'

'Yakov might come here though.'

'What about Shim'on Kefa?'

'I don't know. No one's seen him.'

Mother Miriam said, 'Why don't you go and inform them now? I'll be okay for now.'

The other women went into the kitchen. Yohannan went out. Ima Miriam was alone.

Tsaphar went up to her quietly.

'Were you also Reb Yeshua's mother?'

'Yes. In fact, he was my only naturally born son.'

'Eetoo told me what happened, but I still can't believe it. Reb Yeshua was such a wonderful person!'

'He was an uncommon person. I just hope it isn't over yet. I hope against hope.'

Tsaphar looked about and noticed Eetoo had joined them.

'Did you know that Ima Miriam was also Reb Yeshua's mother?'

'No! It's horrible, what happened! I really feel like an orphan now. I don't know what to do, but I'm sure you're the saddest one of all if you were his mother.'

'But perhaps, I'm not. I still have hope,' Miriam said.

'Hope for what? The world's going to end.'

'Is that what it says in the golden tablets?'

'Yes. Reb Yeshua told us where to find them, and there they were.'

'What else did he tell you?'

'To go to meet him in four days at the very last place where I saw him. He'd give me something to take back.'

'Where is the last place you saw him?'

'Er -- Oh my god!'

'What, Eetoo?' said Tsaphar.

'No! The last place I saw him was -- ...' Eetoo began sobbing controllably.

Miriam took his arm and pulled him to herself and let him weep on her bosom. Tsaphar put her arms around the two of them. She couldn't restrain herself either.

* * *

the house is quiet  
the young adventurer muses...

It seems like, now that both Reb Hyrcanah and Reb Yeshua are gone, there's no reason for the Sons of Light to try to stay friendly with the P'rushim. They reckon their prophet Yohannan the Immerser must have missed it when he said Yeshua was Messiah, because he died; and of course, Yohannan the Immerser is dead too. They've convinced Shim'on, Nicanor and Philip and a bunch of the others to go with them to Qumram to wait there until Messiah comes. They just left this morning. They took the Temple Scroll and all of Reb Hyrcanah's other books to keep there. They say that when Messiah does come, they'll need to have all that ready.

Alexander is still here with us. He doesn't know what to think, and neither do I. Whatever happens, Alexander says he'll go with us back to the pyramid and the cat statue to help us find the tele-gate again.

Even though Reb Yakov was one of the Sons of Light, he also doesn't seem to know what to think. It took him a long time to be convinced that his brother, Yeshua might be the Messiah, and once he was convinced, he seems to have a hard time believing it's all over.

Ima Miriam also doesn't think it's all over.

Anyway, there's a lot fewer people here now. Kefa is here though. He finally came back, but he hardly says much. When people talk about being orphans, he says he's not even that; he's just a castaway child because he failed him. He and Yohannan and both of their brothers are staying here while the rest are in an upstairs room they rent in the city.

Ima Miriam has been telling us a lot about Reb Yeshua as he grew up. Everything that I thought strange about him, she also did. It's like he never took it seriously that he, himself, existed. He was Adam and Hava all over again, naked in the garden, not even knowing good and evil. She says he was that way all his life. That's why he never acted like a king, nor took all the hoopla seriously. It sounds like he must have had his sense of beauty fully developed, like the old Utz on Zonch was talking about.

I told Tsaphar about what the Utz teacher taught me, and she thinks so too.

I don't know where Ima Miriam's getting the idea from, but she thinks we should go ahead and keep our appointment at the place where I last saw him. Alexander says we should at least try.

In four days -- that will be the day after Shabbat. But I don't know if I could bring myself to go there. Anywhere, but Skull Hill!

## 26

departing from the house before the break of day  
are women with spices and ointments to embalm a dead king

and the two adventurers, to carry out his last instructions

We're on our way.

Some of the same women that have been popping in and out for the last three days are on their way to the grave to embalm him.

If we really want to see him, why aren't we going with them?

Tsaphar and Ima Miriam say that because I didn't see them take his body to the grave, I should go to where I did see him.

At least Tsaphar's going with me.

The gate's not open yet so we go through the little door in the city wall that we used four days ago. There's a crowd of people waiting at the gate with carts and stuff that's too big to fit through the little door.

Inside it's not crowded yet. Some people are starting to set up their stalls.

It's funny! Three days after he's dead, and people still don't dare sell anything in the Temple court. This place in front of the steps is filling up fast though.

Oh no! Another earthquake!

People are running about grabbing things. Someone's bird cage popped open, and all the doves are flying away. The sheep too. I wonder if it's Reb Yeshua's spirit haunting the place, or what?

We'd better not take the shortcut through the narrow road. Bricks and stuff might fall on us.

All over the city, people are checking the buildings for damage. They're talking excitedly here and there. There's one man insisting that some dead person just appeared to him.

We're almost through to the other gate, near Skull Hill.

Beside the gate, there's a group of old men sitting. I think I've seen this bunch before.

One of them's just arrived, really excited. He's saying, 'Rabban -- may he rest in peace -- he's appeared to me!'

'What message did he bring?' says another.

'He insists that Messiah has come!'

I don't catch the rest.

I see the place now. It looks like the type of place no one would ever go, even without the horrible things that happen there.

The dead are appearing to people! I wonder if Reb Yeshua will appear to us from the dead?

This place is spooky enough without thinking about dead people, what with all these tall stakes stuck in the ground, most of them covered in dried blood.

We're climbing the hill.

Tsaphar is shivering. I think she's spooked as well.

I put my arm around her shoulder. She snuggles up to me.

We're at the top now, looking about.

I'm looking at the stake Reb Yeshua hung from.

'Who are you looking for?' Someone's behind us.

We turn. There's a man standing. The sun's shining brightly from behind him.

'Er -- someone I last saw here -- from a distance...'

'Come, then,' he says.

Where have I heard that voice?

We both walk up to him.

'Son of Ham, daughter of Ishmael.'

It can't be! But it looks like him -- but it doesn't look like a departed spirit.

'Don't fear. I'm not just the spirit of a dead person. I'm really alive. Feel my hands.'

We each grab one of his hands and look at it. There's a big scar going all the way through the wrist at the same place the nail should have gone through. I look down to his feet. They've got the scars too.

'King Yeshua!' I say.

'Because you believed and obeyed my instructions in coming here, in spite of observing my state the last time you saw me, you will be rewarded.'

'Have you redeemed the planet then?' I ask.

'The world won't end until the Kingdom has taken root everywhere humans are to be found. You know of some of those places. I commission you now to go to them and spread my Kingdom among them. Proclaim it to them, and do the works of the kingdom by bringing relief to the suffering among them, exactly as I have been doing.'

'How have you been doing it?'

'You have heard some of the accounts from my pupil, Yohannan. Ask him for more. Also another pupil of mine, Mattityahu has been keeping a journal of our travels and activities. Ask him for the journal, and in the time you have left, copy it into your recording box. The things you hear and read about, are for you to do yourself.'

'But how?'

'All my life, I have been creating a borunñnvotzp.'

'Huh?' I can't believe I'm hearing this. He even pronounces it right!

'Yes. Utz's aren't the only ones who can create a borunñnvotzp. The only difference is, mine doesn't fit neatly into a crystal bubble as your friend's did, but I've been creating one, none-the-less. Three days ago, at the top of this stake, I, in effect, smashed my borunñnvotzp onto the forehead of all humanity.'

'But I don't see any difference in anyone.'

'Just wait. Stay here in Yerushalayim at my brother's abode. Stay close to my pupils, and to my mother. You have already learned a lot from them. Listen some more, and learn from what you read. In not many days, the borunñnvotzp will begin to take effect. It will affect every person from then on as they believe the proclamation of the Kingdom and go through immersion for repentance of their sins. When it has affected you, go back to the monument, taking my gift with you, and return by the gate by which you came. Your work will begin the moment you arrive back.'

'Your gift?'

He looks about on the ground. He picks up a rock that's lying at the foot of the stake where he hung, and gives it to me. It just fits in my hand. I would never have even touched it myself, let alone picked it up. It's even got dried blood on it.

A rock? Just a filthy rock?

'It's a piece of this planet. Take it and show it to anyone who would question the right of humanity to exist. And don't wash it; it's stained with the price of the planet's redemption.'

We're looking at the rock. It's about as dirty as any rock I've ever seen.

I look up again, but -- he's gone!

He's vanished -- not here anymore!

I wrap up the rock carefully in a scarf that's in my bag, and then Tsaphar and I almost run down the hill.

## 27

Tsaphar and Eetoo took turns transcribing Mattityahu's journal. It was a full time job, but it was almost finished.

During the time she had to herself, Tsaphar went to sit with Ima Miriam to hear her stories and to bask in her motherliness.

Ima Miriam was one of the reasons Tsaphar never stayed homesick for very long.

Kefa was no longer the hard shelled radical she had first met. He spent most of his time with the others at the rented upstairs room, but in the evenings, he showed himself a gentle transparent individual. He also told her stories of their experiences.

If she'd ever been worried that believing in the Kingdom would be like taking a bio-media upload, Kefa's attitude change reassured her. What she observed in him, Ima Miriam and the others was the opposite of what she saw and felt in Teknesh.

Even Eetoo had become warmer to her. He was again the shepherd boy she once knew, watching his sheep in Heptosh's pasture.

Now and then, especially when they all gathered at the Outer Court for prayers, Eetoo and Tsaphar and the women joined them.

The last words of the journal were finally entered into the computer. After that, they spent most of their time with Yeshua's pupils and circle of friends.

On the feast day of Shavuot, they accompanied Ima Miriam and the other women, Yohannan, Kefa and both Yakovs and Alexander to the outer court for prayers.

* * *

gathered in one place, in one accord...

That must have been the borunñnvotzp exploding! I've never felt anything like it! I can't describe it!

I don't think anyone can. It's like we've all gone crazy, except we're speaking in languages other people understand, but we don't!

I don't know what I've been speaking in! It just comes up from inside.

We've attracted enough attention. Kefa's been talking to the crowd that's gathered. He usually gets nervous in front of people, but he's just talking away!

But the thing is, people are listening to him! It's like the borunñnvotzp is suddenly taking effect in them as they listen. They were begging to know what to do next. Now, they're lining up at all the miqvas around the place.

I'm getting ideas about what to do back in the other sectors of the galaxy -- even about Thevsos.

heeding the command: go therefore and teach all planets

Everyone was sad to see us go, but wished us Adonai's blessing on our new work. Ima Miriam prayed a special blessing on us, and so did Kefa, and Yohannan. Yohannan still says he wants to visit us there sometime. Maybe Alexander can show him how to get there through the gate.

Alexander is going with us. First, we have to travel to Alexandria, and from there, to the pyramid.

## 28

Heptosh had managed to contact the Toki authorities, and the Noofrishi sector council had put out a strongly worded request to allow a delegation of other non-human species to travel to Nephtesh to observe the situation.

Rather than face the wrath of all the non-Groki species in the galaxy, the Grokis decided to back down and allow Neuryzh and a few others to land.

Neuryzh, Vralpz, president of the Noofrishi sector council, and Diggen, head of sector security met with Zakh and Vlab, respectively the commander and sub-commander of the fleet hovering in the skis of Nephtesh.

Heptosh accompanied them. He listened in via one of Neuryzh's vocal tubes.

Neuryzh asked the leading question. 'Has not the time of the supposed destruction of the human planet already past? What sort of confirmation would you need that the planet has or hasn't been destroyed?'

'We've been scanning the galaxy for any explosions of a planetary scale,' answered Zakh. 'Once we've detected one, we collect any asteroid samples from the area to verify the identity of the planet. We will only wait so long.'

'No one is sure of the location of the planet. It would take a long time for the light from the explosion to reach us. How do you go about such a scan?'

'We have drone ships moving back and forth throughout the Drozht Sector that can detect any explosion that has happened within the time specified. It's only a matter of time that they'll pick it up. Failing that, it is up to the human species to supply proof of the planet's survival.'

Heptosh thought there was a much easier way to verify the existence or non-existence of the planet, but that would involve giving away its location. Neuryzh had assured him that that should only be done as a desperate last measure, as knowledge of its location would still put the future of that planet in jeopardy.

Neuryzh continued with the questions. 'What do you propose to do once the time has run out?'

'Remove all humans from the universe, beginning with these.'

'Why do you feel that is necessary?'

'Do you not know what the existence of humans in this galaxy has cost to the Groki? Has it not also affected the other species as well? And even now, there are attempts, right in your own sector, to revive their empire. Though these ones say they plan to live here peacefully, who knows what future generations will be capable of? As long as they are present outside their home planet, no species is safe.'

'And, what if the continued existence of the planet should be confirmed?'

'We would forgo exterminating them, but we won't allow them to live in our sector.'

'Were these not originally human planets?'

'They have not been inhabited by humans for the past ten cosmic ages.'

'Nevertheless, they were human planets. This planet was uninhabited until humans settled it. The others that they have repopulated were built by them. Furthermore, those humans who have been resettled in this sector are not descended from the ruling classes of the former empire, but their servants, many of whom have also been victims of the same imperial abuse.'

Vralpz added, 'Despite any misgivings on your part, I think that galactic protocol would require that you allow them to settle on these planets, provided they intend to do so peacefully. If you require any verification of accepted protocol, I'm sure we can convene a galactic congress.'

Diggen said, 'On the other hand, we can assure you that these are not, in any way, connected with the recent expansion of Amanhep's Federation of Indigenous Nephteshi Planets. Heptosh has acted wisely in guiding them into self sustaining independent communities.'

Zakh and the other Groki didn't wish to convene a galactic congress, so they simply decided to wait for verification one way or another.

So, they waited.

29

after many days journey  
over land, over sea, up the river

the adventurers return to the tele-gate

Here we are. A few of Hyrcanah's men are still keeping the camp. We went in through the tent that was built over the hole next to the giant cat statue.

Hyracannah had turned it off when we left last time so I place the stone block into the square hole, just like we did in Nephtesh. The tele-gate lights up and looks like water. Alexander wants to go through with us just to see what it's like on the other side. We step through.

No one's in the room here. There's a metzig torch lying there though. I take it, light it up, and we walk through the passages following the way I remember.

There's daylight shining through the mouth of the tunnel as we approach it. I hope Heptosh has found enough food to keep him all this time.

We're out now.

Wow! Where did all the people come from?

Someone sees us and comes running.

It's Rav! What's he doing here?

'Eetoo! Tsaphar! You're back! Shim, go call Mr. Heptosh!'

Someone goes running off.

I see a couple of gates set up in the open air. They look like tele-gates. Where to, I wonder?

Rav is hugging Tsaphar. Then he comes and hugs me.

Alexander is looking about as though he doesn't believe what he sees.

'Where did all these people come from?' I ask.

'They're from Thevsos.'

'Thevsos?'

'Yes. Mr. Heptosh and Mr. Shan set up some tele-gates and they've brought the people from Thevsos to here and some other planets that don't have anyone living any more. Shan has reprogrammed all the bionics to help them settle in.'

'That's good!' I say.

Tsim is here too.

'But there's a big problem,' says Rav. 'The Groki want to kill us all. They say it's time for the humans to die.'

'Don't talk about it too loud, though,' says Tsim. 'These people don't know about that. They're already afraid, and almost ready to riot.'

'I've got something to show the Groki.'

Heptosh comes running up.

'Eetoo! You've returned! What outlandish dress!'

'I have the gift from the anointed human king to show the Groki. It's a piece of the planet.'

We hurry off to where I see some ships on the ground. I suddenly notice that the sky is full of ships.

There's Neuryzh, and some other non-human people.

Alexander looks at them like he's sure he's in a dream.

Neuryzh glows his dome. 'Friend Eetoo, Friend Tsaphar, welcome back. And welcome to the new friend.'

They're rushing me to one of the ships.

Heptosh says, 'Mr. Zakh, we have confirmation.'

A Groki comes out of the ship. I've been fumbling about for the rock as we walked, so I'm ready to hand it to him.

He takes it.

Neuryzh is standing next to me. Tsaphar and I are listening through one of his vocal tubes and Heptosh is listening through the other.

The Groki is using some sort of gadget to look at it.

'Yes,' he says. 'It's a piece of the human planet. When was it removed though?'

Another Groki comes and looks.

The first one says, 'Dried human blood. Yes, it dropped onto this stone -- indeed, the very moment the planet was to be destroyed.'

'But the blood was allowed to dry in natural weather conditions -- sunlight from that solar system, I see,' says the other, 'which suggests that the planet wasn't destroyed at that time. The other side was washed off by rain, but on this side it's dried. Whoever it was lost quite a large quantity of blood.'

'Now, the imprint in the D.N.A. -- this is interesting. What do you make of this?'

'The overall imprint suggests -- hmmm.'

'It suggests -- yes -- but why he would allow his blood to spill on the soil of the planet, that's what boggles me.'

'And the the fact that it's imprinted on human D.N.A. to begin with.'

I whisper into Neuryzh's tube, 'It's the price of redemption.'

Neuryzh repeats it in their language.

'So,' says the first Groki. 'We have to put up with humans for another fifty celestial ages at least?'

'Possibly more, if this imprint suggests anything,' says the other.

'We'll relay this information through our network. I hope we can live peaceably together.' They hand me back the rock, and get into their ship.

We back off. The three ships lift off, and all the others in the sky zoom off.'

Alexander's just standing there, looking up with his mouth open.

# Glossary

This glossary includes scientific concepts (fictional science), first century Jewish cultural heritage, words from Hebrew (a real language), Akkadi and Nephteshi (the latter being fictional languages, however Akkadi is a guess at pre-Hebrew pre-Arabic Proto-Semitic). Some items listed are fictional, others from real life or history. After each entry, the italics in the parentheses will show the source of the word and/or whether it is a factual or fictional concept.

In most cases, a people group or language is designated by the suffix '-i' placed after the name of the planet or nation, the same way it's done in Hebrew -- thus, an inhabitant of the planet Tok is a 'Toki'.

Akkadi: (fictional) An ethnic group with semitic features, speaking a group of dialects descended from Proto-Semitic. They were descended from the Ishmaelites who bought the Patriarch Joseph from his brothers and sold him in Egypt. Later, they travelled to the kingdom of Nephtesh, were enslaved, and accompanied them to space. The Akkadis of Tok have a different history than most. Early in the Nephteshi Interstellar age, a group of Akkadi slaves escaped their harsh conditions by taking a ship. Because they only used linear propulsion (see: linear populsion) they travelled close to the speed of light for what felt like months to them, but lost about one thousand years because of the dynamics of relativity. A Tzozk ship discovered them and brought them to settle on Tok, but because they had lost a thousand years, their language had only developed a few hundred years from that spoken by their ancestors on the Planet of Red Earth. Thus, their language was close to that of the Patriarchs (Abraham, Isaac, Ishmael, etc.) The words of their language that appear in this language are the author's guess at what proto-Semitic would have sounded like, based on a limited knowledge of Hebrew.

Bar mitzvah: (Hebrew/factual) Literally: son of the commandment. At the age of 13, Jewish boys undergo a special ceremony in which they put on the t'fillin for the first time, and take on the responsibilities of manhood.

b'n: (Akkadi/proto-Semitic/fictional) Son of -- as in Tsaphar b'n Shammah. Based on Hebrew ben and Arabic bin and ib'n.

beit: (Hebrew/factual) Litterelly: House. The spelling here represents the correct Hebrew pronounciation of a word often represented in English translations of the Bible as 'Beth', as in Bethany (litterally meaning 'House of Anyah', pronounced Beit Anyah). The word would had a wider use than simply a home or village. Various factions of the P'rushim (Pharisees) would have been refered to with the prefix beit, or what would be in plain English, 'school', thus: 'beit Hillel', meaning, 'School of Hillel', or those who follow the opinions of the famed rabbi. Various institutions in Judaism are also prefixed with 'beit', such as beit ha sefer (house of study), beit kinessit, (house of congregation, or a synagogue), or the definition that follows this one in this glossary.

Beit din: (Hebrew/factual) Litterally: house of judgment. A Jewish court. For civil offences, it consists of three judges picked from the local community. For capital offences, 23 judges sat. The highest beit din was the Great Sanhedrin in Jerusalem, which had 72 members. This met in a building adjoining the Temple, called 'The Chamber of Hewn Stone.' According to the scripture account, Yeshua wasn't tried by the Great Sanhedrin, but by a smaller one in the home of the High Priest, which would have had 23 judges.

ben: (Hebrew/factual) Son of -- as in Yohannan benZavdai: Yohannan son of Zavdai.

bio-media upload (fictional) A method originally created to cure some forms of mental retardation. Information is written in a way that can be transferred directly to the human brain. During early experiments, it was discovered that such information became a vivid impression at the same level as fear of falling, or of fire, etc. It was thus impossible to upload something for simple reference. Uploading just a few concepts could help some forms of retardation, or even enable scientist to master more than one discipline and thus, bridge gaps that previously led to duplication. However, unless care was taken, bio-media uploads could lead to obsession and other forms of mental instability. Even when the information to be uploaded was carefully chosen, close acquaintances and family members of those who received a downloads often noticed the loss of their ability to contemplate the more aesthetic aspects of life. After the collapse of the Nephteshi empire, bio-media upload became rare in the Milky Way Galaxy.

bionic replication (fictional)An advanced technology for transforming humans into bionics by placing a self reproducing synthetic cell into the flesh. The cell reproduces itself by drawing its building material out of the bloodstream, reading the DNA of its neighbouring cells and replacing them with self reproducing bionic cells. This process continues until the entire body is bionic. A fuller explanation can be found in the narrative, including the sinister down-side.

borunñnvotzp (fictional) sole art form of the Utz (see Utz), though the Groki (see Groki) have also been known to create them. It consists of a crystal bubble in which the Utz stores images and sounds, usually following a common theme. The individual images and sounds can be played for other creatures, such as humans, in holograph and sound, but only another Utz or a Groki can receive the full impact of a borunñnvotzp. impact is gained by smashing the borunñnvotzpthe dome of one's forehead. Thus, a borunñnvotzp, though it can take decades to mature, is enjoyed by only one other creature, the one the creator chooses to give it to. If the reader has a hard time with the pronunciation, that's to be expected. It's not a human word, so there are some sounds in it that are inaudible to the human ear, let alone pronounceable. The nñn the middle of the word is best spoken while rubbing the tongue back and forth against the roof of the mouth.

Celestial Age (fictional) A unit of time, equal to approximately forty years, used by non-humans.

Coourzt (fictional) A popular beverage extracted from the coourzt berry, native to one of the Blilkin planets, but popular throughout the Noofrish sector of the galaxy. It is enjoyed by both humans and non-humans. It's high in caffeine, making it the Noofrishi equivalent to coffee. Unlike coffee, however, it is brewed by professionals and served cold, sometimes blended with herbs and spices, or even mixed with alcohol -- no milk or sugar. As to the actual taste, I've left that to the reader's imagination.

computer (fictional) The computers used in this narrative are early human inventions. I actually designed the concept for a different novel, which I haven't seriously started writing yet (except for the first chapter and a synopsis). It is the predecessor of the clay tablet used by the ancient Sumerians, and the letters are impressed into the writing surface in the same way as in wet clay. The writing surface consists of a sea of tiny six sided pins, all six sides of which act as a switch. When two adjoining pins are depressed, the switches joining each other are turned to 'on' position. The pins relay the information about which switch is turned on to the underlying grid, to which they are in contact on depression. Every letter has a numerical value that can be immediately read, even though the input method appears to be analogue, or graphic. The computer outputs data by raising the pins so that the surface is embossed. Some computers can be hard to read in dim light, but others have illuminating pin-tips which can be read more easily.

Dozht Sector (fictional) A sector of the Milky Way galaxy that includes the Planed of Red Earth. The sector itself never comes up in the narrative, but included anyway so as to complete the sector map. (see sector)

Essenes: (factual) Refers to a grouping of religious Jews who separated themselves from general society, and went to live together in communes in the mountains. It's likely that it consisted of priests of the lineage of Zaddok, the ones authorised to continue the priestly line, but were exiled by Herod Antipas. Another name for them was 'Sons of Light', a name that appears in the sayings of Yeshua. Their beliefs were similar to those of the Pharisees (see P'rushim) except they were strict to the point that they excluded themselves from Temple worship, believing that the current Temple worship system was too corrupt. The Essene community best known to us today, because of the discovery of the Dead Sea Scrolls, was based in Qumram. It is probable that Yohannan the Immerser (John the Baptist) was a member of such a group, which would indicate that they at least some were motivated by true love for God. However, it is quite evident that Yeshua didn't belong to such a sect, but adopted a style more similar to that of the Pharisees, and involving Himself with the Temple worship system.

Fa-tzi-zhi (fictional) The ethnic group Eetoo, the main character of our narrative, belongs to. 'Fa-tzi-zhi' is their own name for their tribe, whereas other groups call them Famtizhi. The Fa-tzi-zhi are a more-or-less primitive tribe. Their language doesn't have any syllables ending in consonants. Full adults who have married and have had children are referred to by the name of their oldest child, i.e. Zhue Paw (father of Zhue), Zhue Maw (mother of Zhue) etc. The Fa-tzi-zhi have moderately dark skin with straighht hair, ranging from black to brown. I have based this fictional culture on the Karen, an actual ethnic group that today live on both sides of the border of Thailand and Myanmar. All of the above is also true of them (my own parents were known as Robbie-Paw and Robbie-Maw). Even the tradition of the Golden Tablets in our narrative is a slight revision of an actual legend passed down through the generations of Karen. They also have a story of Creation and the flood that closely parallels that of the Torah (and the Stone/Gold Tablets). Some Karen believe they are one of the lost tribes of Israel. This, however, could not have been true of the Fa-tzi-zhi, as they were descended from Ham, not Shem as the theory regarding the Karen would assume.

Famtizhi (fictional) See Fa-tzi-zhi

Gam'liel /Gam-lee-el/: (factual history) One of the great rabbis of the first century, and Sha'ul's teacher. He was the grandson of Rabban Hillel, and inherited his more lenient, pragmatic views. He is quoted both in the Talmud and in the New Testament (Acts 5:34 ff.). He died approximately 50 c.e.

Groki (fictional) A non-human creature that's approximately the size of a human, has knees that bend so that the feet come to the front like a bird's, and the crown of the head consisting of a translucent dome. The cranial dome can glow to show various emotions and dispositions, and can impart various feelings, good and bad, to those close by. Their mental capacity is much greater than that of a human. The Utz and the Groki are both sub species of the same genus. The Groki differs from the Utz in that they are smaller, their life cycles life spans are shorter, and they are more numerous. Of all the non-human species, the Groki are the most similar to humans in their drives and ambitions. This makes them incompatible to humans, so that Humans and Groki have had a bad history. (see also Utz)

Hanan ben Shet: (factual history) In English translations of the New Testament and Josephus, he is referred to as 'Anannus ben Seth'. That would be based on the Greek transliteration. He was the High Priest himself, both before and after the time covered in our narrative. He was the High Priest by the time covered in Acts of the Apostles. Several of his sons were also High Priest in their turn, the last one being Hannan ben Hannan (whom Josephus referrs to as 'Anannus ben Anannus') who ruled at the time of the fall of Jerusalem.

Hillel: (factual history) A great Jewish sage living in last century bce. Known for his lenient views and emphasis on mercy and love, and for his self control in the same areas. Grandfather of Rabban Gam'liel. Father of one of the two great schools of the Pharisees, the other being the school of Shammai (see Shammai). The School of Hillel (or beit Hillel) emphasised Study of the Torah, believing that it would lead to righteous actions. Their views gained predominance over those of the opposing beit Shammai after the destruction of Jerusalem in 70 ce., when Yochanan ben Zakkai started his school at Yavneh (see: Yochanan ben Zakkai). Hillel died around 10 ce.

Imhotep (factual history) An Egyptian god who could have had a basis as a historical personage, probably a physician/statesman, whom some identify as the Patriarch Joseph.

Ima (Hebrew/factual) Hebrew for Mother

Immersion: (factual) Ceremonial cleansing by immersing oneself into body of water either in a flowing river or stream, a lake or sea, or a pool that conforms to the rabbinical requirements (see: mikva). It was done in fulfillment of the command to 'bathe in water and be unclean until evening' after contracting uncleanness by either touching something unclean (i.e. A carcass), recovering from childbirth, or the completian of a menstrel cycle.

Kefa: (Hebrew/factual history) Correct Hebrew for the name, 'Peter.' Literally: 'rock.' One of Yeshua's disciples, who later became one of the foremost Apostles.

Kayafah: (Hebrew/factual history) Correct Hebrew for the name, 'Caifas,' the High priest at the time of Yeshua's execution, and the son-in-law of Hanan ben Shet (see Hanan ben Shet). He is mentioned as the High Priest in the Gospels, but by the time covered in Acts of the Appostles, he apparently no longer occupied that office. Various traditions connect this fact with the execution and resurrection of Yeshua.

Klodi (fictional) The ethnic group that inhabited the Klodi area of Klodi-Famta. They spoke their own language, and were a more developed civilisation than the Fa-tzi-zhi, who also shared their planet. The Klodi were benevolent to the Fa-tzi-zhi, and used to trade with them at various markets near the border. (see also, Fa-tzi-zhi, Klodi-Famta)

Klodi-Famta (fictional) A planet in the Noofrish Sector. Its name is derived from the fact that the land was divided between two ethnic groups, the Klodi and the Famtizhi. It is the planet of Eetoo's birth.

Lazar (Hebrew) A Hebrew name, derivative of the name, Elieazar, used in its Greek form in the New Testement as Lazarus.

linear propulsion (fictional) Any method for propelling a spaceship or any other vehicle using the laws of physics rather then logical relocation or other applications of quantum mechanics. (see also, logical relocation, quantum mechanics)

logical relocation (fictional) A technology based on early human discoveries in quantum mechanics (QM) (see quantum mechanics). One of the theories in QM is that in addition to the three visible dimensions of space, there exists a fourth dimension, where all atoms located in the other three dimensions have also have a presence. This is called Hyperspace. In our narrative, we view Hyperspace as a place where all atoms in the universe are together, within easy distance of eachother, as though it were a giant database on every atom. Using the coordinates from the database, each atom is projected into the other three dimensions of physical space. We also suppose, in our story, that Hyperspace is accessable through the centre of the nucleus of each atom. By converting a light similar to X-ray into a reverse beam (see reverse beam), and modulating it into into a signal, it is possible to direct that into the nucleus of each atom, and manipulate the location coordinates in Hyperspace, thus relocating the atoms in the range (ie. whole objects) to any location of three dimensional space one chooses. (see also simulated linear motion, tele-gate, reverse beam)

man made planets (fictional) The Nephteshi developed the technology of building planets. The method used is to find, or create a black hole with slightly less weight than the planed planet. It should be on its way to, or already rotating around a star at a suitable distance. Then, they bombard it with a substance called, 'zotite' (fictional). Zotite is a highly unstable substance in its raw form, though similar to carbon. In crystal form, it is the hardest substance known, and is the only substance that can withstand the pressure caused by a black hole. As the black hole is being bombarded, some of the zotite begins to crystallise. They continue bombarding it until the zotite stops crystallising, and then remove the excess row zotite. After that, they lay slabs of stone. The upper slabs are laid to allow for passages and chambers to facilitate a great underground city. Some areas have more slabs so as to facilitate mountains. The, comes the top soil and vegetation. This is brought in from a special farm planet by means of logical relocation.

Matityahu: (Hebrew/factual) Correct Hebrew for 'Matthew'. It is believed by many historians that the same kept a running journal during his travels with Yeshua, which he later revised into what we now know of as the Gospel of Matthew. Others, such as Luke and Mark also probably used some of the material in their Gospels. Because of the many Hebrew idioms and usages that appear, even in the Greek text, it's obvious that the original was in Hebrew, which is now believed by many to have been a living language at the time, along with Aramaic.

metzig torch (fictional) A hand held object for producing light by means of electricity, probably similar to a flashlight. The author, however, didn't want to assume that Nephteshi technology would necessarily resemble 20th century Earth's. The details of how a metzig torch works has therefore been left to the reader's imagination.

Mezuzah: (Hebrew/factual) A small box fastened to the door post, containing a small piece of paper on which is written certain scripture passages, in fulfillment of the command in (Deut 6:9)

mikva: (Hebrew/factual) An immersion pool that conforms to the rabbinical requirements for ritual immersion (see: immersion). The pool had to be filled by a natural flow of water. A river or stream could be used, but not water poured from a vessel. An artificial pool fed by a rain spout, or by water overflowing from a second pool would qualify (Mishnah: Tactate Mikvaot). According to at least one early Church document the early believers had similar requirements for baptism pools, but where it was impossible to comply, any body of water would suffice. If there wasn't sufficient water to immerse, it could be poured over the head (Didache 7). Mikva b'rit is the act of ritual immersion.

Milky Way Galaxy (factual) The galaxy in which most of the narrative takes place. The author decided to retain the name 'Milky Way' as opposed to some exotic sci-fi sounding name, because that is likely the name the ancients knew it by, and therefore, would have continued to use.

Miriam: (Hebrew/factual) Correct Hebrew for 'Mary.'

minyan: (Hebrew) A quorum of at least ten Jewish men necessary to be present before congregational prayers can begin in a synagogue. This is based on the scriptural inference that a congregation consists of at least ten.

mitzvot: (Hebrew/factual) The commandments.

Nefzed (fictional) A planet in the Ziern Sector. It was the home of the Nefzedi people, closely related to the Nephteshi, until they were taken over by bionics. The Nefzedi were originally from an African nation Sourth of Nephtesh. They have African features, such as black skin and kinky hair.

Nephtesh (fictional) A planet in the Noonz Sector. The first planet outside of Red Earth to be inhabited by humans. It's a natural planet, but it's vegetation and topsoil, along with the ancient Red Earth kingdom of Nephtesh was relocated onto that planet, which resulted in the whole portion of North Africa eventually becoming dessert. Nephtesh became the centre of an interstellar empire that collapsed about four hundred years before our narrative begins. As to physical features, the Nephteshis resembled the Egyptians: dark skin and straight hair.

non-humans (fictional) see Utz, Groki, Tzozk

Noofrish Sector (fictional) A sector of the Milky Way galaxy that includes the planets Tok and Klodi-Famta. It's a human-friendly sector as most of those on the sector council are benevolent species. (see sector)

Noonz Sector (fictional) A sector of the Milky Way galaxy that includes the planet Nephtesh. The Noonz Sector has a Groki majority, making it a non human-friendly sector. (see sector)

Papyrus; papyri: (Egyptian) A reed plant that grows in the swamps of the Nile river, or paper made from the same reed.

pin switch (fictional) see computer

Planet of Red Earth (factual) The name of the planet we (the author and readers) know of as Earth. The term 'Red Earth' is a reference to the rocks and soil found on it, not our name. It's also the name of the first human. It's location was forgotten soon after the planet Nephtesh was settled because records were kept in only one place, and Imhotep, a ruler in Egypt at the time, surreptitiously but forcibly had it removed so as to protect the planet. He also closed the only existing tele-gate from his end.

P'rushim: (Hebrew/factual history) Literally, the separated ones. Proper Hebrew for 'Pharisee'. Usually refers to the general category of those rabbis and their followers who believed in an ultimate resurrection of the dead; in the existence of angels and demons, and an afterlife; and in the Oral Torah, or the traditions of the elders. They have survived to this day as Orthodox Judaism. There were many groupings and emphases among the Pharisees, two major ones being the schools of (or beit) Hillel and Shammai (see Hillel; Shammai). Doctrinally, Yeshua and the apostles were usually in agreement with the Pharisees. Their conflict came only in the area of hypocrisy and hardness of heart, displayed by a number of them, which are common faults of any religious institution -- not only Jewish. Therefore, this author refrains from treating the word 'Pharasee' as a sysnomym for 'hypocrite', or 'legalist' in any of his books or articles.

Quantum Mechanics (factual) A lot of the technology (fictional science) in this narrative is based on a peripheral (read: 'shallow') understanding of Quantum Mechanics. That's the study of particles and waves on a sub-atomic scale. Some of the descrepencies between some of their findings, and those of Einstein's theory of Relativity and Neutonion Physics have led to some interesting theories that have fueled many a science fiction novel, including some of mine. For the most readable explanation of Quantum Mechanics I've found yet, read Ronald C. Pine's Quantum Physics and Reality, at personal.tcu.edu/~diagram/edu/pine3.html. You could also surf to the Wikipedia entry on it: en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Quantum_mechanics. One of the explanations of the contradiction between how light acts, as a wave or as a particle (photon), is David Bohm's theory of Hyperspace (a term the reader, no doubt, recognises from Star Wars and Star Trek). This theory states that in addition to the three usual dimensions, in which many things in our universe are so far apart as to prohibit us ever visiting them, there's a fourth dimension, one characterised by co-ordinates and vectors. My own take on that involves things like logical relocation (see logical relocation), and my own theory that both Newton's laws and Einstein's are workable because they are programmed to do so on a QM level. I'm not a scientist, only a writer of science fiction. It makes a good story. For the one application in this narrative that's based on actual QM phenomena under study (but every bit as far-fetch sounding as my own ideas), see twin particles.

Rabban: (Hebrew/factual) A title of endearment applied to the great sages, such as Hillel, Shammai, Gam'liel etc. Probably used by pupils of their own rabbis.

Rabbi: (Hebrew/factual) A scribe or a teacher well versed in the Torah and oral traditions of the elders. In the first century, they sat as judges and arbitrators in their communities (see: beth din), teachers in the synagogue, and sometimes sat in the Great Sanhedrin in Jerusalem. They were usually well versed in a wide variety of subjects, including medicine, agriculture, astronomy, and various sciences. One could eventually became a rabbi by becoming a pupil to a rabbi. This would involve living with him, going everywhere he went, and serving his basic needs, as well as being taught at his feet. It involved not only the impartation of knowledge, but of the rabbi's life as well. First century rabbis often disparaged the idea of living off of their teaching profession. They supported themselves, sometimes meagerly, through secular jobs, just as Shaul did as a tent-maker.

Reb: (Yiddish/factual) Mister. (Though Yiddish wasn't spoken until much later, this and other Yiddish words have been included in the present volume to provide 'atmosphere.')

reverse beam (fictional) A way of modifying light so as to direct it to the nucleus of an atom, and send reloctator signals to the Hyperspace dimension. Normal light begins at a point in space, and disperses as it travels outward. A reverse beam does the opposite, and naturally focuses onto a single point just as easily as normal light originates from that point. By nature, it gravitates to the nucleus of the atom, as though it were attracted to the Hyperspace dimension. The secret is to send a modulated signal as normal light, and then convert it into a reverse beam. See logical relocation.

sector (fictional) A portion of the galaxy governed by a council consisting of the representatives of the habitable planets within that sector for the purpose of sorting out any inter-planetary problems, and rules of travel within the sector. Each planet, however, retrains its own sovereignty. Some sectors are less friendly towards humans, especially if they have a Groki majority.

Sefer Vayikra: (Hebrew/factual) The book of Leviticus.

seven commandments of the sons of Noach: (factual) Based on rabbinical tradition and the inferences made from God's commandments to Noah in Genesis 9:1-7, it is said that God gave Noah seven commandments to be observed by the whole human race. Gentile proselytes who turned to God were not necessarily required to enter fully into the covenant of circumcision, but were told to simply keep these seven laws (Babylonian Talmud: Sanh 56A):

1 The practice of equity

2 Against blaspheming the Name of God

3 Against idolatry

4 Against immorality

5 Against bloodshed without just cause

6 Against robbery

7 Against devouring a limb torn from a live animal

Shabbat: (Hebrew/factual) Correct Hebrew for 'Sabbath,' the seventh day of the week that was set aside as a day of rest.

Shalem: (Akkadi/fictional) Peace. Based on Hebrew shalom and Arabic salaam.

Shalom: (Hebrew/factual) Peace. Often said as a greeting.

Shalom alaechem: (Hebrew/factual) A greeting: 'Peace be to you.' The proper answer is, 'Alaechem shalom': 'And to you, peace.'

Shammai: (factual history) A contemporary of Rabban Hillel (see Hillel), known for his strictness to the letter of the Law, and his rigidity, and sometimes his intolerance. Father of one of the two great schools of the Pharisees, the other being the school of Hillel. The school of Shammai, which was predominant during the first century until the destruction of Jerusalem in 70 ce., emphasised action, as opposed to study.

Sha'ul of Tarsus: (factual history) or Rabbi Sha'ul, later known as Apostle Paul. The New Testament references indicate he was a pupil of Rabban Gam'liel, and was a tentmaker by trade. Rabbis generally supported themselves with a secular trade to avoid being a burden on their pupils and the community they served, a practice Sha'ul carried over into his Apostolic ministry. Though Rabban Gam'liel was known, both in the Talmud and in the New Testament account, for his lenient views, Sha'ul, until his abrupt change of mind and direction, was a hardliner. This paradox could be easier to understand in light of the fact that Gam'liel's own son, Shim'on, also tended towards hard line views, according to Talmudic sources.

Shim'on /Shee-me-on/: (Hebrew/factual) Correct Hebrew for 'Simon,' or 'Simeon.'

Shim'on ben Gam'liel: (factual history) The son of Rabban Gam'liel, and the great grandson of Rabban Hillel. However, he is thought to have leaned more to the school of Shammai (see: Hillel; Shammai). He was the president of the Great Sanhedrin at one point. He had a part in the Jewish revolt and was killed either before or during the destruction of Jerusalem in 70 ce.

Shim'on the P'rushah (factual history) An acquaintance of Yeshua, apparently living not far from Lazar and his sisters, Miriam and Marta. The name has also been translated in some English versions of the New Testament as 'Simon the Lepar'.

Shema /She-ma/: (Hebrew/factual) The first word of Deut. 6:4, meaning 'Hear.' Used to refer to the declaration based on that verse: 'Sh'ma Yisrael, Adonai Alohenu, Adoni Echad': 'HEAR O Israel, the LORD our God, the LORD is ONE.' This is the most important declaration of the Jewish faith. It also refers to the entire passage from verse 4 to verse 9, which is recited as a prayer three times a day.

simulated linear motion (fictional) To fully understand this definition, please make sure you understand the definition of Logical Relocation. One of the problems of using Logical Relocation for space travel was, how to move about in an area that was dense with gasses or solid objects. There was the risk of relocating an object or person to the same space occupied by another object. In a planets atmosphere, there was the danger of the local air being in the bloodstream, which would be fatal. Atomic fusion could also result. To overcome this, early space travellers developed Simulated Linear Motion. This technique involved relocating the ship in very rapid steps, each slightly less than half a hydrogen atom. This pushes other matter out of the way rather than superimposing them. This can be done so rapidly that the ship appears to be moving at a high speed, and yet not overcome by the laws of physics. (see also, logical relocation)

Sons of Light (factual history) The name by which the Essenes referred to themselves, according to recent research. See: Essenes

Teknesh (fictional) A galaxy that was settled by humans of the Nephteshi empire. It got cut off from the Milky Way portion of the empire, and therefore continued on as an empire in its own right long after the collapse of the Nephteshi empire. The planet, Thevsos, is located in Teknesh. The name, 'Teknesh' is derived from the name of the dynasty that ruled the galaxy. Non-humans referred to it as 'Zuyun'.

tele-gate (fictional) A pair of gates that work by logical relocation technology. The gates are equipped with a set of twin particle transmitters (see twin particle) so that the gates will be in constant communication as long as they're switched on. Each gate is also equipped with a relocator beam, placed so that any person or object will be relocated to the other gate by stepping through it, no matter where in the universe the gate is located. Because of the constant movement of planets around their suns, and rotation of galaxies, the coordinates are always changing, thus the need to continually readjust the relocator beam using the information received through the twin particle communicator. (see also, logical relocation)

Thernguin net (fictional) A device for preventing objects from moving through it's space via logical relocation or any other method based on quantum mechanics (see: quantum mechanics).The author hasn't figgured out how it can possibly work though.

Thevsos (fictional) A highly populated planet in the Teknesh galaxy, with advanced technology. The lower atmosphere of the planet is polluted, but the buildings are raised above the layer of pollution by means of towers that make the buildings look like flowers.

Tok (fictional) A planet in the Noofrish Sector. The birth planet of the Tzozks. A number of other non-human species also live there, who are generally friendly to humans. All of the human communities on Tok were taken in as refugees. The Akkadi were the first humans to be allowed to settle on Tok, as they were slaves in harsh conditions on a Nephteshi planet. Later, the Nefzedi were invited because their planet was taken over by bionics.

toga: (Latin/factual) A large heavy gown worn by Romans.

Torah /to-rah/: (Hebrew/factual) Literally: the teaching. Refers most directly to the Pentateuch, or the first five books of the Bible. In its wider use, includes the whole Bible. According to the Greek rendering of Hebrews 8:6, the New Testament was given as Torah. In the rabbinical sense, it includes Oral Torah, or the traditions of the elders (see Oral Torah).

Tsaddok: (Hebrew/factual history) A High Priest during the reign of Solomon. Because of the corruption of the previous family of priests, culminating in the tenure of Eli and his two sons, the Prophet Samuel prophesied that that line would no longer be entitled to serve as High Priest. They actually did serve until the end of King David's reign, but King Solomon, on his father's advice, appointed Tsaddok. Since that time, it has been considered Biblically correct to have a priest of Tsaddok's line as High Priest, although during the first half of the first century, this was not the case. Herod the Great exiled all the priests of Tsaddok's lineage and placed someone of his own choice in the office -- one who would support his corrupt ways. During Yeshua's ministry, this restriction was still in effect, which meant Yohannan the Immerse had to do all his preaching near the Jordan river, well outside Jerusalem.

Tsaddukhim: (Hebrew/factual history) Correct Hebrew for 'Sadducee'. A first century Jewish sect that was opposed to the P'rushim's belief in Oral Torah, resurrection of the dead, and spirit beings (see: P'rushim). Sometimes they were loosely referred to as Epicureans (as in the Greek philosophy), because of their materialistic outlook. It was the popular religion of the aristocratic and well-to-do of Jerusalem. Most of the High Priests were of the Zaddukhim sect \ much to the chagrin of the P'rushim \-- and therefore corrupt. Because they didn't believe in Oral Torah, they often exacted harsh penalties, applying the Law literally by requiring an 'eye for an eye, and tooth for a tooth.' Regardless of the name, High Priest of the Tsaddukhim sect were not descended from Tsaddok (see Tsaddok)

Tunic: A sewn garment with long or short sleeves, and coming down either to the knees or to the ankles, and not open in the front. Sometimes worn as an undergarment, over which was worn a chlamys or a himation (see chlamys; himation).

twin particles (factual) Unlike some of the other concepts found in this narrative, this is one that really is under study by scientists researching Quantum Mechanics (see Quantum Mechanics). Twin particles are pairs of particles extracted from an atom that have been observed to always act the same way, no matter how far apart they are. Thus, they would a good technology for communication, which I have in the narrative. Application to fictional science: An atom is split and each of the twins is placed in a separate box that is able to maintain their spin indefinitely. Each box has a reader/controller that can read and send messages by adjusting the tilt of the spin. For obvious reasons, twin particle communicators can only be used in pairs. In our narrative, a network of twin particle communicators is set up throughout the galaxy, so that a message that is meant to be broadcast is relayed through the whole network. Extra pairs of communicators are also used for special missions, such as ones in which Heptosh is involved. Thus, he can communicate over an unlimited distance, but only with the one who holds the other twin. They were also used in tele-gates to send back location coordinates (see tele-gate). For more, look up the Wikipedia entry: en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Quantum_mechanics

Tzozk (fictional) A non human species with a body that looks almost human, though taller, and slightly different facial shape. Parts of their body (crown of the head, the shoulders and the arms) are covered by an exoskeleton, and the rest with grayish skin. Their brain capacity is about equal to that of a Groki (several times that of a human). They dress those areas not covered with an exoskeleton i.e. from the chest down. The planet of their birth is Tok, so, though it is a cosmopolitan planet, they perform duties of administration, which they're especially good at. (see also, Tok)

Utz (fictional) A non-human creature that's approximately twice the size of a human, has knees that bend so that the feet come to the front like a bird's, and the crown of the head consisting of a translucent dome. The cranial dome can glow to show various emotions and dispositions, and can impart various feelings, good and bad, to those close by. The Utz also has more than one vocal/listening organ. Besides the usual sense organs on the face, they have two tactical like tubes, through which they can listen and speak, thus hold more than one conversation at a time. Their brain capacity is such that this sort of multi-tasking is no problem for them. They also sense other things, such as the presence of various forms of life in other parts of the galaxy. Their mating call can be picked up by other Utzes throughout the galaxy. The Utz and the Groki are both sub species of the same genus. The Utz differs from the Groki in that they are larger, their life-cycles are slower, they live longer, and there are far fewer of them than the Groki. They tend to take things slower, have a deep regard for life in every form. (see also Groki)

Yakov: (Hebrew/factual) Correct Hebrew for 'Jacob.' For some strange reason, came to be translated 'James' in English versions of the New Testament.

Yehuda: (Hebrew/factual) Correct Hebrew for the name 'Judah' or 'Judas', or the region of 'Judea'.

Yerushalayim: (Hebrew/factual) Correct Hebrew for 'Jerusalem'.

Yeshua: (Hebrew/factual) Correct Hebrew for 'Jesus'. Just a note, while we're on the subject: In the past century, it was thought by many that the 'Jesus of history' and the 'Jesus of faith' were two different fields of study. The two were thought so far apart that it necessitated those following the 'Jesus of faith', if they were to take their faith seriously, totally ignoring any research into the 'Jesus of history.' However, in the last few decades, the field of study known as 'Jesus Studies', has made a few turns, especially since the discovery of the Dead Sea Scrolls and other treasure troves of literature. The gap has been narrowed to the point that the 'Jesus of History', the actual Yeshua ben Yoseph of Natsaret, can now be recognised and honestly embraced as one and the same as the one who came to establish the Kingdom of God, and is still in the process of doing so to this day. It's no longer necessary to ignore portions of the Bible in order to do so, although in some cases, we need to see some passages in a new light. The trend is towards understanding the New Testament as being centred on the Kingdom of God, and acknowledging the underlying Jewish culture. Some good sources for this study are such scholars as E.P.Sanders, Gezer Vermes, David Bevin, Pinkas Lapid, and many others.

Yisrael: (Hebrew/factual) Correct Hebrew for 'Israel'.

Yohannan: (Hebrew/factual) Correct Hebrew for 'John.'

Yohannan ben Zakkai: (factual history) A first century rabbi who lived a long life. He was a pupil of Hillel, and a contemporary of Gam'liel, and his son, Shim'on ben Gam'liel. His teachings reflected the more pragmatic stance of the school of Hillel. (see: Hillel; Gam'liel; Shim'on ben Gam'liel) He was in Jerusalem during Jewish revolt against Rome, but was able to escape by pretending to have died, and was smuggled out of Jerusalem in a coffin. The Jewish Zealots, who were trying to prevent anyone's escape, allowed his coffin to pass, since he was so highly respected. He then went to the Roman General, and asked for permission to start a school in Yavneh (Jamnia in Greek). Many other rabbis who were able to escape from Jerusalem before the final destruction, joined him there, and helped him to lay the foundation of what has become Judaism in its present form. He was succeeded ten years later by Rabban Gam'liel's grandson, Gam'liel ben Shim'on.

Yohannan the Immerser: (factual history) The man known in Christian circles as John the Baptist (see immersion).

Zavdai: (Hebrew/factual history) Correct Hebrew for 'Zebedee.'

Ziern Sector (fictional) A sector of the Milky Way galaxy that includes the planet Nefzed. The Ziern Sector has a Groki majority, making it a non human-friendly sector. (see sector)

Zotite (fictional) see: man made planets This is the fourth dimension, characterised by vectors and coordinates.

Zuyun (fictional) see: Teknesh

# Suppliment to the Table of Contents:  
A Running Synopsis and Other Notes

Part One: The Shepherd

Eetoo, a primitive shepherd boy living on the planet Klodi-Famta, realises his mission in life: to search for the golden tablets of Sim Thep that will complete his tribe's knowledge of the truth. They are located on the forgotten Planet of Red Earth, the birthplace of humanity.

Heptosh, travelling from the planet Tok, is on a reconnaissance mission to find out what happened to the Klodi civilisation which had become silent twelve years earlier. His ship breaks down.

Heptosh and Eetoo meet. Adventure ensues. Their chief danger: the bionics. They were once human, but on transformation they lost their souls, and they seek to seduce other humans into becoming bionic.

Part Two: The Pupil

Eetoo goes to live on the planet Tok with Heptosh as his guardian. Eetoo, a primitive, has a lot to learn about cosmopolitan interstellar life before he can go on his search of the golden tablets.

Part of Eetoo's education includes travelling to corners of the universe where no one knew humans existed -- let alone intelligent life.

Eetoo makes new friends. There are non-humans, as well as fellow humans. He meets Tsaphar, a beautiful girl about his age. They fall in love, but there are obstacles.

Of the non-humans, Neuryzh the Utz is a lover of life in all forms, and has profound wisdom in how to enhance it. He becomes a mentor to Eetoo. Blazz the Groki would rather see humanity exterminated. His kind have experienced the dark side of human nature in the days of the ancient Nephteshi Interstellar Empire. Sparked by pointed comments by Blazz, Eetoo begins to ponder the dilemma of humanity.

All the while, Heptosh, with Eetoo and others, must fight the bionic menace, as well as the various other manifestations of human greed and ambition.

No one can remember the location of the planet Nephtesh, the first planet to be colonised by humans when they left the planet of Red Earth. However, the only way Eetoo can reach Red Earth is from Nephtesh.

Part Three: The Adventurer

Eetoo and Tsaphar arrive at the planet of Red Earth and find a land of paradox. It's the age of the Roman Empire, and the Holy Temple still stands in the city of Jerusalem, where the adventurers must go to search for the Golden Tablets.

Their experience vividly illustrates the dilemma of humanity as they encounter stark contrasts in living conditions, observe the various and exotic sects, experience the heroism of saints and sages, and the treachery of villains. They also meet the one whom many hope in as the Messiah of Israel. Evil is black indeed, but the good shine as lights.

The parts of the narrative set on the Planet of Red Earth (our earth, actually), are influenced by recent studies of first century history in light of the Dead Sea Scrolls, the Pseudopigrapha, Rabbinical sources, as well as readings of Shalom Asch's The Nazarene.

The author's limited knowledge of Quantum Mechanics influenced some of the technologies referred to throughout the narrative.

There is a glossary at the end of the book.

There are four narrative points of view:

Eetoo \-- narrated in first person present tense, but preceded by a short description in omniscient present tense prose, displayed in italics

Heptosh \-- narrated in third person past tense

Neuryzh the Utz \-- narrated in first person past tense

Tsaphar \-- narrated in third person past tense

Scenes from the latter three always open with the name of the narrative point of view in a heavy font.

# Also by Robby Charters:

### The Wrong Time

**_Download a free copy when you visit my website:www.RobbyCharters.co.uk_**

An Anthology, containing some flash fiction, a novella and three short stories:

**The short stories:**  
* A filmmaker of the future, using a new untested medium, gets tangled up in his story in _The Filmmaker and the Sceptre_ ;  
* Relativity works in mysterious ways in _The Last Shall be First_ ;  
* Geoffrey literally finds himself in _The Wrong Track_

**The novella:** "I thought all this stuff about time warps and things was silly scifi stuff. I'm not a fan of Star Trek or any of these other things -- which I thought was for people who couldn't get a life, who sit in their parents basement with their chemistry sets and oscilloscopes. I thought I was a level headed, successful, morally responsible member of society. Until one day I stepped into the ... _Wrong Time_ "

**The flash fiction:** From a physics class of the future: what is a "flong"? in _The Flong Files_

and more...

**Readers Comments at _Amazon:  _**

_"...Kudos to the author for a readable, well-researched, original and inventive collection..."  
" ...is a thoroughly intriguing and enjoyable collection of short stories by Robby Charters, tied together with a ribbon of twisted time..."  
"...fantastic. Thoroughly entertaining, retains interest, and had a great grasp on scientific theory..."

_

### **Pepe**

In a world of flying magnetic trains and floating cafés, he lives in an abandoned construction site with his sister, cleaning windscreens at a busy intersection while his sister begs. He doesn't know who he really is. That fact could cost him his life – or it could be the key to the future of Cardovia.

The evil general and president-for-life, a paraplegic whose mobility depends on a neuro-computer system controlling an army of robots, wants him eliminated. The general's secrets are well-kept, except to a mysterious mystic old Japanese man who has hope, and a 13-year-old hacker who accidentally witness one of his heinous crimes.

For Pepe, it's a "coming of age" as he discovers his past, and the dimmest images of his dreams begin to materialise. Before the end, we see things falling apart as hope plummets into oblivion, while all are perusing what might be a lost cause, when suddenly a forgotten fact pulls it all into a satisfying conclusion.

_"Books this good usually don't show up on my radar... Excellent nerd sci fi totally deserving your money."_

\-- Ezekiel Carsella at Books N Tech

_"Pepe was an action packed ride that I enjoyed from start to finish. Mr. Charters has a way of creating a near future in exquisite detail, and I felt like that really made the story."_

\-- Paige Boggs at Effectively Paige

_"...One of the best teen novels I've read in a long while, I really enjoyed this..."  _

\-- Sheila Deeth, Vine Voice at Amazon

### The Zondon

Some enemies are so powerful and strategically placed that the only way one can fight them is through Wisdom. And there are times, while fighting those enemies, one is faced with a choice – a test of one's character – one moves forward by listening to the heart, all the while the brain is screaming for the alternative. Should the initial result appear a disaster, the brain says 'I told you so', but later one realises that that was exactly the right choice – the test passed with flying colours.

Seven people, born in every corner of the world: each has been plagued with doubts, dreams and obsessions since childhood that don't make sense. They each had a twin who didn't share their obsession, and made their lives miserable. Ernie Magawan is one of them, and is the first to make the self-discovery.

Though born on earth, they are in fact, Zondon, from a planet clear across the galaxy, here on a mission that they must complete. The future of the human race, and of the galaxy depend on it. Those memories are awakened through contact with a mysterious green crystal.

On 'awakening', Ernie Magawan realises that he must find and awaken the other six. The action adventure takes him on a roller-coaster ride from the archaeological site in Egypt where he found the crystal, to the streets of Bangkok, to the mountains of Afghanistan, to Jerusalem, to a nuclear silo in North Korea, and finally the Golden Triangle. On the way, he and his growing team rub shoulders with international terrorists, Neo-Nazis, migrant farm workers, and a mystic rabbi, as well as their ultimate enemy, a formidable creature, also from across the galaxy, in the guise of a powerful international financier and terrorist boss, who has been waiting for them all their lives.

Armed with extrasensory powers of mind control as well as access to vast political resources, terrorist organisations and WMDs, he is the hidden hand behind all diabolical conspiracies.

### The Story of Saint Catrick

Dr. Catrick is a professor at the Feline University in Catropolis. As a young cat, he had a life changing experience that set him on his mission in life, to proclaim that animal species can and should live in harmony. All the while, the rodents are rising up against cat rule. Catrick and his friends encounter political agendas, prejudices, and countless other reasons for not doing the obvious.

### Allegory

Imagine waking up in a strange pace. you have no memory of how you got there, nor who you are. one thing becomes increasing clear: this isn't the same world in which you went to sleep. it's ... _Allegory_

**Readers Comments at _Amazon  _**(avarage of 41/2 stars out of 55 reviews):

_  "...I was so involved that I could not put the book down. It is definetly a book you find yourself in..."_ _  
"...Worst book ever. I hated the whole thing. Don't buy it unless you're a Jesus freak. Terrible. Awful book, really bad..."_ _  
"...This story made me to pause my life and have a look at what we are doing at the moment..."  
"...strange, but well written. It made me think about things I hadn't thought about in a long time..."  
"...If you've read and like/love C. S. Lewis's book "The Great Divorce", you'll enjoy this book..."_

### The Eurasian

The world of the late 21st century is divided between Greater China, the Western Block, the Islamic Block and the Southern Free States of Africa and South America. The Western Block is dominated by the multinational corporations, who have created a paradise for its citizens -- so everyone thinks.

Mickey O'Brien is the Eurasian, half Asian and half Irish. He has a problem with that, because all his friends are fully Asian. However, no one has actually met each other -- only their virtual projected images they show on their on-line classroom environment. He and his classmates meet each other for the first time as they go on a class trip to America. It turns out they all had things to hide.

In America, they accidentally discover what the Multinationals have been trying to hide. Their hover van is hijacked, and they are left trapped in the great American outback, a vast area of what was once U.S.A., now divided between countless republics. Some are Nazi, some are militant Christian and other redneck cowboy states, some Native American Nations, Mafia kingdoms, etc etc. The wild west is again wild. Once having stumbled in, can they ever find their way out again?

It's a story of finding out what's real, and discovering true faith as they become involved in an espionage war trying to prevent a Nazis takeover.

### Pappa Gander: the Less Better Half of Mother Goose

At long last, Pappa Gander gets a few words in edgewise. Read some of your old familiar nursery rhymes rewritten his way, plus a few other rhymes, limericks, some haiku, and stories...

_**Jack and the Beanstalk**_ \-- did you ever wonder what happened to the cow? or the beans from the beanstalk? What did Jack do later in life? Find out in Jack and the Beanstalk, the Whole Story, Plus the Sequel...

**_The Adventures of Jack and Jill_** \-- a hilarious blend of a lot of familiar rhymes. Pappa Gander gets things a bit mixed up here, and ends up with a second version of Jack and the Beanstalk, but with the Seven Dwarves instead of the giant...

**_Snow White_** , from an alternative universe where things happen a bit differently...

Robby, the author behind Pappa Gander says: "My poetic inspirations were Roald Dahl, Shel Silverstien and Ogden Nash. Also included are some of my cartoons, largly influenced by Gary Larson (Far Side). Some of the rhymes were done strictly because I found words that rhyme in an amusing way (amusing to me, anyway)."
